GREENWICH UNITARY DEVELOPMENT PLAN

Adopted 20 July 2006

Published by Greenwich Council Produced by Greenwich Strategic Planning Peggy Middleton House 50 Woolwich New Road London SE18 6HQ

Designed and Produced by Cook Hammond & Kell Whittington House 764-768 Holloway Road London N19 3JQ

Copyright Maps in this publication are reproduced with permission from Ordnance Survey with permission of the Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office. Greenwich Council licence 100019695 (2007). Unauthorised reproduction infringes Crown copyright and may lead to prosecution or civil proceedings.

FOREWORD BY THE LEADER OF THE COUNCIL
These are exciting times for Greenwich. Record inward investment, secured by Greenwich Council and our partners, is transforming the face of our borough. Step by step, we are reversing years of economic decline brought about by the demise of our traditional industries. As a result, the visible signs of regeneration lie all around us – in every part of our borough. Over the last year, we have made every effort to ensure that our priorities mirror your priorities. Around 35,000 residents seized the opportunity to tell us their vision for a future Greenwich at one of our Great Get Together consultation events. We have listened to what you told us. We are seeking to meet your aspirations with an ambitious plan that takes advantage of the once in a lifetime opportunity record amounts of inward investment have given us. You told us that transport was one of your main priorities.We agree.That’s why we are committed to securing new transport links that will open up job opportunities across the capital and attract new businesses to our borough. The North Greenwich stop on the Jubilee line has shown just how much of a catalyst transport links can be in terms of regeneration. It has become the most successful station on the Jubilee line extension and together with new and improved local bus services, our existing rail services and a commuter river service, it is helping our borough to become south east London’s transport hub. This unique position will soon be strengthened even further.Work is well underway on a new DLR station in Woolwich that will open in 2009. A Crossrail station in Abbey Wood will follow just a few years later. Our attempts to persuade people of the overwhelming economic case for opening a further Crossrail station in Woolwich continue apace. Like the thousands of local residents and businesses who supported our campaign, we understand that we cannot afford to miss out on the wider benefits this development would bring. You also told us that access to high quality and affordable housing is one of the biggest challenges we face today. Again we agree. That’s why we will continue to build on our proud record of substantial housing developments; delivering thousands of new and affordable homes on the Greenwich Peninsula, Woolwich Arsenal, Kidbrooke and across the borough. Not only have many of these developments brought former wasteland back into use, they have provided us with an opportunity to negotiate benefits such as schools and new health facilities that will benefit the whole of our community. And finally you told us that you wanted to see new life breathed into our three town centres. We agree. That’s why we have launched ambitious plans to build three new local service centers in Eltham, Woolwich and Greenwich. As well as acting as a catalyst for wider regeneration projects in each area, they will ensure that you can access a range of modern, first class services in your neighbourhood. All of this is part of our long-term vision to help us create a truly sustainable community within the Thames Gateway. It is set out in this, our new Unitary Development Plan (UDP), which is our development blueprint for the future.

FOREWORD

As I stated, none of this could have been possible without the many local people, community organisations and businesses who have fed in their views.Your input has helped us to identify areas for future development opportunities, in particular where new homes should be built and how we can continue to protect our open spaces and the natural environment. Together we can continue to ensure that Greenwich remains a great place in which we can all be proud to live, work, learn and visit.

FOREWORD

CONTENTS
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................................i

PART ONE
Vision .....................................................................................................................................................................1 The Council’s Strategy for Land Use and Development..........................................................................1 Borough Profile ...................................................................................................................................................4 Policy Context.....................................................................................................................................................7 Strategic Planning Policies ..............................................................................................................................14

PART TWO
1. COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES......................................................................................21 C1 Community Services ...............................................................................................................32 C2 Loss of Community Facilities ................................................................................................32 C3 Major Residential Developments .........................................................................................33 C4 Doctors Surgeries, Dentists etc...........................................................................................33 C5 Nursery Provision....................................................................................................................34 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY .......................................................................................................35 J1 Defined Industrial Areas .........................................................................................................39 J2 Aggregates and other ‘Open Yard’ Industries....................................................................41 J3 Charlton Business Park ..........................................................................................................41 J4 Town Centres ...........................................................................................................................42 J5 Employment Sites Outside Defined Employment Locations ........................................42 J6 Industrial and Business Developments ...............................................................................43 J7 B1 Uses.......................................................................................................................................44 J8 B8 Distributive Industries and Trade Wholesale Uses....................................................44 J9 Cultural and Creative Industries..........................................................................................45 J10 ‘Bad Neighbour’ Industries ....................................................................................................46 J11 Home Working .........................................................................................................................46 J12 Work/Live Units .......................................................................................................................46 J13 Quality Jobs ...............................................................................................................................47 J14 Training and Business Support..............................................................................................48 J15 Community Benefits................................................................................................................48 J16 Accessibility ...............................................................................................................................49 HOUSING .........................................................................................................................................................51 H1 New Housing ............................................................................................................................54 H2 Preventing the Loss of Housing............................................................................................55 H3 Effective Use of Dwellings......................................................................................................55

2.

3.

CONTENTS

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................65 Sheltered Housing..................................................................................................................................................62 Housing Mix...............................................98 5..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................71 O1-O4 Metropolitan Open Land .................................................77 O10 Community Benefits..............................................................84 O21 River Corridors .......58 Density.............................. Kidbrooke Development Area.........................94-95 E5 Light Pollution ......68 Travellers and Romany People.......................................................................85 O24/O25 Management of Wildlife Sites.....83 O20 Green Corridors..............................................................................................................................82-83 O18/O19 Sites of Nature Conservation Importance.........................................................................76 O7 Community Open Space......................................60 Amenity Space and Gardens .........................................................67-68 Supported Housing...............................................................................................................................................................................................84 O22 Species Protection ....96 E8 Energy Efficiency.............................................................................................97 E9 Renewable Energy......................................................................................................................................................................57 Housing Design.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................64 Non Self-Contained Shared or Bedsitter Accommodation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................61 Housing Improvement ...................................................................................................95 E6/E7 Air Pollution ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................67 Wheelchair Standard Housing..................................................................65 Lifetime Homes ..........................................................................................................84 O23 Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites .........62 Affordable Housing.........................69 OPEN SPACES ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................H4 H5/H6 H7 H8/H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 H17 H18 H19/H20 H21 H22 4..............................................................................................80 O12 Park Facilities........................................................76 O6 Green Belt..........................77 O8 Other Open Spaces..........73-75 O5 Green Chain.............................................................................................................................................................79 O11 Sportsgrounds and Playing Fields ...................................................................81 O13 Floodlighting .59 Backland and Infill Development...........................................77 O9 Public Open Space Deficiency Areas ....................................................................................................................................................56 Conversions...81 O14 Allotments......................................................82 O15-O17 Recreational Footpaths and Cycleways.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................93 E1-E4 Pollution................... CONTENTS ..........85 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION.61 Children’s Play Areas .....................

...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................127 MOVEMENT ........................118 D21 Changes of Use of Listed Buildings................................113 D9/D10 Residential Extensions .............................115 D13 Shopfronts and Signs...............................................................................................................................................................................107 D1/D2 Urban Design................................................................109-110 D3 Ecological Factors .......................................................................................................................................................E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 6...................................................120 D24 Historic Landscapes .........................................................................................100 Electromagnetic Fields.........................................................................................................................................................................................................112 D6 Access for People with Disabilities ..100 Waste Reduction.... 118 D18 Preservation of Listed Building................................................................99 Site Servicing........111 D5 Parking and Access Arrangements...............................................................................................................125 D30/D31 Archaeology ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................118 D19 External or Internal Alterations or Additions to Listed Buildings.........................................................................114 D12 Satellite Antennae .....................................125 D32 Environmental Improvements.............................................................120 D23 Local List of Buildings of Architectural or Historic Interest ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................117 D16/D17 Conservation Areas.....................................................111 D4 Improvements to the Urban and Natural Environment ........................................................................ CONTENTS ............................................................................................................................................131 7.......................................................99 Contaminated Land .............................................................................................................................................................124 D29 Areas of Special Character...............................................................................................117.....................................................................104 DESIGN & CONSERVATION ..................................................................121 D27 Local Views .........114 D11 Telecommunications Development .............................................................................................120 D22 Buildings at Risk .......102 Minimise Waste at Source ...............................................................................................112 D7 Safety and Security in the Environment .....................................................116 D14 Street Furniture......................................................................................................................... Hazardous Materials..............................................120 D25/D26 Strategic Views..116 D15 Advertisements ............................................................127 D33 Temporary Use of Vacant Land Awaiting Development .................................................................................................................................................. Reuse..........................102 Waste Inert Material..............................................................................................................118 D20 Setting and Proportions of a Listed Building ..........................................................................................................................................................103 Drainage and Flood Protection............General Principles................129 M1 Development and Transport .........................................................................................................104 Safeguarding Existing Tidal and Fluvial Defences..113 D8 Trees............. Recovery and Disposal ....103 Development in Fluvial Flood Risk Areas ....................................123 D28 High Buildings ............................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................................................................140 Specific Improvements..................................................151 TOWN CENTRES..............................................................132-133 Major New Transport Developments.........................................................131 Travel Plans .................................150 Adverse Effect of Freight on the Environment ................................................................................136 Accessibility ......141 Relationship of Development to the Road Hierarchy and Town Centres......................................135 Waterfront Transit ......................................................................146 Pedestrians.......................139 Road Hierarchy ...................159 CONTENTS .............................................................................................................................................150 Areas of High Freight Accessibility...........................................................................................................................................................................................149 Rail Freight.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................159 TC3 Other Key Uses ..................................................................................................................... Transport Assessment ..................137 Safeguarded Schemes........................................................................................Access in Public Areas....Traffic Calming Measures .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................144 Off-Street Public Parking .................................................................133 Accessible Public Transport.................................................................................135 Transport Interchanges....................................................................145 Parking Strategies............................148 People with Disabilities ...............................................................................................................150 Coaches.........................................................................159 TC4 ‘Island Site’ ................................................................................................................155 Woolwich Town Centre TC1 Royal Arsenal .........................................................................................................................138 General Criteria for Road Schemes ..............................................142-143 Community Benefits...................................................144 Services Areas..........................158 TC2 Primary Shopping Centre ......................133 Use of the River..................................................................................................134 Bus Priority...............................132 Extension of the Public Transport Network .........................................................................................141 Car Parking Standards.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................148 Restriction on Road Freight................................................................................................................141 Relocation of High Traffic Generators..................................................145 Cycling ...............................................................................................................................................M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23-M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40-42 8..............................137 Heliports and Airports ........................................133 Safeguarded and other Rail Schemes...........150 Water Borne Freight ..................................................................................136 Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities ....................................140 New Housing Developments .........................139 Environmental Areas ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................170 TC28 Hot Food Takeaway Outlets including Drive Through Restaurants................................................................................... Bed and Breakfast Accommodation and Guesthouses.............................................................................................................. Leisure and Tourism .............................................178-179 Small Hotels.................................................172 9.......................191 W7 Support Facilities for Water-based Uses..163 Eltham Town Centre TC13 Focus for South Greenwich............................................................................................................166 TC19 Essential Local Facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and Freestanding Premises......................................160 Greenwich Town Centre TC7 World Heritage Site.............179 Diversification ............................................................................................................................................................................167 TC20 Arts...... WATERFRONT ................................................183 W1 Development Principles .........................................177 Location and Criteria ........................... Streetscape and Environmental Quality................................................190 W6 Floating Vessels......................................................................................................................................................................161 TC9 The Multi-functional Role of Greenwich Town Centre .........................................................................................................191 CONTENTS ..........................................170 TC27 Markets and Car Boot Sales ..................163 TC14 Shopping...........................166 TC18 Non-retail (A1) Uses in Core and Fringe Frontages.............................................171 TC29 Retail Facilities in Petrol Stations..............................................................................................................................................................................................................169 TC25-TC26 Site Access...........................................................189 W4 Thamesmead ............................... Servicing and Parking .........168 TC22 Town Centre Living..........169 TC24 Civic Spaces......188 W2 Thameside Policy Area ...........180 Camping and Caravanning ...........................................................................................................................168 TC23 Environmental Protection....................164 TC17 Protected Core and Fringe Shopping Frontages ....................................................................................................................................................160 TC8 Historic Town Centre......162 TC11 Market Development................................................................... Cultural and Entertainment Facilities .....................................................161 TC10 Shopping and ‘Food & Drink’ Uses ...................................................................167 TC21 Use of Premises Above Shops. TOURISM T1 T2 T3 T4 .........164 General Policies TC16 Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach.160 Public Transport Links...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................TC5 TC6 Pedestrian and Cycle Access...............................................................................................................................................................................................190 W5 Safeguarded Wharves............................................................188 W3 Mixed Use Areas ..............................................................................................180 10.....................................................................................................163 TC15 Traffic Management.....................................162 TC12 Traffic Management and Transport Links ................................

.............208 Open Space....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................195 IM3 Partnership ..............................................................................196 IM5 Enforcement...................................................................... IMPLEMENTATION ...............................................................205-207 Housing..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................195 IM4 Consultation and Community Liaison.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.....................11.................................197 SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES Community Needs and Services ...................................212-213 Mixed Uses.............................................................................................................................................................................................................193 IM1 Monitoring and Review .............................................................................................................................................................................214-221 APPENDICES 1..............204 Jobs.................209-211 Movement................................. Legislative Background......................................................................194 IM2 Resources .223 Glossary and Abbreviations..................................................225 CONTENTS ....................................................................................................................................................................................

.vi Public Open Space Deficiency Areas ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................126 Cycle Network...................... 12.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................152 Retail Car Parking Standards .. 4..............................................27-28 Types of Publicly Accessible Open Space.............................................................................147 Waterfront Area................................................................................122 Areas of Archeological Potential................................................v Key Sub-regional Diagram ................................................................78 Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites............................................................. 3..............184 TABLES C1 C2 O1 O2 M1 M2 TC1 TC2 TC3 IM1 Groups Most Disadvantaged by the Built Environment..............79 Sites of Nature Conservation Importance.....................................88-92 Cycle Parking Standards......................................................................................................86 Flooding & Attenuation Areas... 9.................................... 7.... 6........................................... 2.......................................................... 5.............................................................................22-25 Key Policies for Disadvantaged Groups .............................................................. 8............................119 Local Views ..v Ward Boundaries.................................175-176 Targets & Indicators for UDP Monitoring .........................156 District & Local Centre Shopping Frontages .......................................MAPS 1......153 Town Centre Hierarchy ...............................................................................iv Greenwich in the London Context .................................................................173-174 Premises in Neighbourhood Parades..................... 10.............198-201 CONTENTS ............................................................. Greenwich in the South East...105 Conservation Areas............................................................................................................................................................................. 11............................................................................................................................

. people moving in to and out of the borough and by changing lifestyles. This is done through both positive and control planning. are influenced by changing technology.This sets out the vision for use of land in the Borough. • Control Planning works through the granting of planning permission. looks at how individual uses of land affects people and places on a wider scale and helps protect our built and natural heritage.This is used to permit good developments or new uses of land and buildings and prevent ones that may be harmful to the public interest. use land. It is a legal document with the following purposes: . at the Borough level. positive planning and planning control work with each other through the Greenwich Unitary Development Plan. The system of planning in Britain is designed so that. defining the areas where development is not desired or where it needs to be carefully directed and. from the Greenwich Strategy (2003).INTRODUCTION PLANNING IN THE LONDON BOROUGH OF GREENWICH Change occurs all the time. As a community we have to decide how best the land can be used to meet a wide range of wants and needs. Our need for buildings such as factories. Planning aims to manage land-use change by being aware of what is happening of influence to the Borough. housing and shops.To provide a framework of acceptable uses within the Borough. and for services such as health and leisure facilities. decisions and activities. Understanding the Plan The Greenwich UDP is made up of a Written Statement and a Proposals Map. Greenwich UDP is in two parts: • Part 1 outlines the Vision for Greenwich.2011 (or 2016 for Part 1 of the Plan). The Greenwich Unitary Development Plan does this for the Borough of Greenwich and is intended to cover the period 2001 . and also provides the main guidance for making decisions on individual planning proposals. INTRODUCTION i .To provide a detailed basis for the control of development. Written Statement As required by legislation and in accordance with (Central Government) Planning Policy Guidance Note 12: Development Plans. and these changes are shaped by the way we live and shape subsequent needs.This in turn affects how we in Greenwich Borough. • Positive planning helps to work out what type of environment we want to live in. and guiding development in the interests of the community. The Purpose of the Unitary Development Plan (UDP) Local Councils have a duty to prepare a Development Plan by law.

Key to part I are the strategic land use policies for the Borough. A policy relating to a designation can be found in the Plan by looking it up in the Contents Page.It contains a strategy for land use and development based on three key themes on which the UDP is based: Equality and Social Inclusion. A Public Inquiry was held between January and April 2005. Proposals Map The Main Proposals Map covers the whole Borough. where an independent Inspector examined unresolved objections. Each of the sections contain a number of policies. It contains a profile of the Borough. whilst Inset Maps A-C cover the town centres of Eltham.The Inspector’s Report on Objections was published by the Council in November 2005. ii INTRODUCTION . It is important to remember that many policies in Part II will apply to all types of development and need to be taken into consideration. or look up the most relevant topic chapter. In response to the Inspector’s Report. such as cycling you can either use the Contents Page at the front of the plan. Part II also contains a schedule of proposals for individual sites in the Borough. Greenwich and Woolwich. Town Centres and Movement. The Map shows individual sites of proposed developments and areas within the Borough which have been designated for particular uses. Using the Plan The plan can be read as a document on planning in Greenwich. If you are interested in a particular site or building or want an indication of how the Council would respond to a site proposal. which are listed under such topic headings as Jobs and Mixed Uses. which in this case would be Movement. each with a policy number and indicated by a coloured background. Designations can be identified using the map’s key and site schedules can be identified by a letter and number with corresponding details contained in Part II of the Written Statement. Part II is developed from Part I and is broken down into sections such as Open Spaces. Sustainable Development and Regeneration. Reviewing the Plan The review of the 1994 Adopted UDP was carried out over a number of years. or used for reference purposes on particular topics or development proposals. alongside details of the achievements of the previous UDP and future opportunities in this UDP. upon which the detailed policies in Part II are based. If you are interested in a particular issue. Each policy is followed by a reason that outlines the key factors involved in its determination. the Council published Modifications (January 2006) and a Further Modification (April 2006) for public consultation. The Council published the First Deposit Draft UDP (February 2002) and the Second Deposit Draft UDP (April 2004) for public consultation. or for conservation. The Council adopted the Replacement Unitary Development Plan on 20 July 2006. the Proposals Map will indicate if there are any designations or scheduled proposals for the site.

During this period. Peggy Middleton House. the Council will bring forward Local Development Documents to replace parts of the UDP in accordance with the Local Development Scheme (LDS .The Replacement UDP (2006) together with the London Plan (2004).a project plan outlining the content and production of planning policy documents). in all local libraries in the Borough and from the Development Planning Reception.when it replaced the 1994 Unitary Development Plan.greenwich. INTRODUCTION iii . 50 Woolwich New Road. London SE18 6HQ or by telephoning 020 8921 5190.The UDP is also available on the Council website. First Floor.uk). Under the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. forms the Development Plan for the Borough. The LDS is available on the Council website at www.gov. UDPs usually retain ‘development plan status’ for a period of three years.

Map 1: Greenwich in the South East Leicestershire Cambridgeshire Warwickshire Northants Beds Suffolk Hertfordshire Oxfordshire Bucks London Greater London Berkshire Surrey Hampshire W. Sussex FRANCE Isle of Wight © Crown copyright English Channel Greenwich iv INTRODUCTION . Sussex Essex Kent E.

Map 2: Greenwich in London Context Enfield Barnet Haringey Harrow Hackney Brent © Crown copyright Redbridge Waltham Forest Barking Newham Havering Camden Islington City Tower Hamlets Hillingdon Ealing Westminster Kensington & Chelsea Hammersmith & Fulham Southwark Greenwich Bexley Lambeth Hounslow Ricmond upon Thames Merton Kingston upon Thames Sutton Bromley Croydon Wandsworth Lewisham Map 3: Ward Boundaries Thamesmead Moorings Peninsula Woolwich Riverside Abbey Wood © Crown copyright Greenwich West Blackheath Westcombe Charlton Woolwich Common Glyndon Plumstead Kidbrooke with Hornfair Shooters Hill Eltham West Eltham North Middle Park and Sutcliffe Eltham South Coldharbour and New Eltham INTRODUCTION v .

Barking HAVERING Jubilee Line TOWER HAMLETS A13 3rd Blackwall crossing Thames Gateway Bridge NEWHAM Rail Lines Map 4: Key Sub-regional Diagram Greenwich Waterfront Transit Thamesmead Canary Wharf London City Airport Greenwich Peninsula Proposed Thames Crossing A206 A1 02 Woolwich GREENWICH A20 5 Thames Gateway Greenwich Metropolitan Green Belt Lewisham A2 Eltham BEXLEY Metropolitan Open Land LEWISHAM Bexleyheath Strategic Centre A 20 DARTFORD Proposed Crossrail 25 Proposed DLR Woolwich Extension Bromley BROMLEY © Crown copyright M M 25 vi HACKNEY Stratford BARKING INTRODUCTION .

PART ONE .

b. VISION 2. We will have improved educational achievement. Government guidance is that UDPs should not contain policies for matters other than land use and should not duplicate provisions in other legislation.1 The Greenwich Unitary Development Plan (UDP) is the revised statutory development plan for the whole of the Borough of Greenwich setting out policies for the period to 2011 and in some instances to 2016. Our residents will have sufficient skills to get jobs. j.2 The role of the UDP is to set out clearly the land use implications of this vision for Greenwich. d.These are the things most important to Greenwich and its communities and contribute to Greenwich being a place where people live. Although identified as three themes they are not independent but are closely integrated with each other. Greenwich will be a world tourist destination.1 The Greenwich Strategy (2003) sets out the Council’s vision for Greenwich in 2010. THE COUNCIL’S STRATEGY FOR LAND USE AND DEVELOPMENT 3. Effective and co-ordinated public transport will serve all our communities. digital and performing arts. h. sports and recreation. Local people will be able to get good quality housing. We will play a vital part in the diverse cultural life of London with visual. There will be high quality and accessible health and social care services for all our residents.1 The Council’s strategy for development and the use of land develops that vision around three main themes that form the basis of the plan.1. Equality and social inclusion. Greenwich will make a major contribution to London’s economy. a. g. 2. visit and learn now and in the future. k.2 These themes run throughout the plan and are reflected in its policies and proposals. Regeneration 3. We will live in a clean and well cared for environment. We will support vulnerable and disadvantaged people and encourage independent living m. i. e. INTRODUCTION 1. 3. Sustainable development. b. Crime will be reduced and there will be a strong sense of community. l. f. and c. 2. It also reflects Government Guidance and the other strategies of the Council. We will make best use of natural resources in Greenwich.These are: a. We will reduce discrimination and improve opportunity. c. work. PART ONE 1 .

4 S U S TA I N A B L E D E V E L O P M E N T 3. disability.E Q UA L I T Y A N D S O C I A L I N C L U S I O N 3. or religious belief. • Conservation of the Borough’s open spaces and natural environment. walking and cycling which is accessible to all. Historically development has largely been concentrated on ‘brownfield’ sites in the Borough. It also explicitly states that no individuals or groups in the Borough should be disadvantaged by reason of ethnicity. However. community. good community relations. the Council will improve its awareness and understanding of the needs of different groups in the borough through effective community profiling. 3. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that sustainable development is the core principle underpinning planning. • Preservation of the best of the Borough’s heritage.The Government’s current target is to achieve at least 60% of new build on recycled land. Through implementation of the Policy. • A sustainable transport strategy which integrates land use and transport and promotes greater use of public transport.The UDP will take account of health impacts 3. the ability to concentrate development on recycled land does often come with a cost because of the need in many instances to deal with contamination. age. race.3 Developing an inclusive society and mixed communities is a major part of Government policy. the Council is committed to “promoting equality of opportunity. consultation. and • Development of buildings that are environmentally efficient to build and run. Sustainable development also involves recognising the relationship between the physical environment in its contribution to peoples’ well-being. by including policies to encourage: • High quality urban design. 3. Equality and social inclusion can be promoted by providing and accessing opportunities for all residents but especially those experiencing social and economic disadvantage or discrimination. education services and recreation accessible to all. It is generally acknowledged that the planning system has a vital role to play in ensuring that land use and other resources are used more sustainably. sexual orientation. Developing an inclusive society and mixed communities is a major policy theme of the government. • Mixed-use development in town centres. and to tackling all forms of discrimination in Greenwich through the Council as service provider and community leader”. gender. To help residents from all communities to grasp opportunities it will be necessary to make provision for the following:• Affordable housing in mixed-use residential areas • Safe and sustainable travel • The creation of an accessible environment including new jobs and training for job seekers • Making shops. colour and national origin.7 2 PART ONE . additional building costs and off-site works. cover significant restoration costs. liaison and involvement.6 Another aspect of sustainable development is ensuring that as much new development as possible takes place on ‘brownfield’ land. and has significantly exceeded that target.5 Sustainable development is not just concerned with the environment but also needs to encompass social and economic considerations. health. A more sustainable environment is promoted throughout the plan. Through the Greenwich Equality Policy.

9 3. Regeneration should also take account of the impact of any growth in jobs and/or housing on demand for health. community and education services locally. mechanisms such as the Lottery and Single Regeneration Budget [SRB] and negotiated contributions through Planning Obligations. community and environmental needs.10 I M P L E M E N T I N G T H E S T R AT E G Y 3. d. for example. R E G E N E R AT I O N 3.8 Regeneration needs to be sustainable and incorporate issues of equality that contribute towards a more cohesive and inclusive society. The full use of the Council’s statutory powers to guide and control development. Regeneration in the Borough needs to be considered in the context of the Government’s desire to regenerate the Thames Gateway area to the east and south east of London. poverty and facing unemployment as well as those of other disadvantaged groups need to be considered alongside those of business and economic efficiency. through the use of legal agreements. b. PART ONE 3 . although the multiple problems encompassed by the term regeneration requires a partnership approach with all relevant stakeholders.11 The strategy will be implemented in a number of ways. In partnership with the private sector to obtain the optimum benefit possible for the Borough. The Council through its land use policies seeks to continue to revitalise older rundown parts of the Borough especially those on the waterfront and in South Greenwich. Thus the needs of residents living in. community and education provision. to retain and enhance economic activity and promote sustainable economic and employment growth. other public bodies and agencies in responding to issues and pursuing initiatives of a Londonwide nature. the needs of the local community and to improvements in the transport infrastructure. The full use of financial resources. It will also draw on the opportunities open to Greenwich as part of a world centre of international trade. including Central Government. guidance and advice notes and area plans to illustrate and promote development opportunities that meet socially inclusive health. European and other grants. or experiencing. especially the public transport network. e. sustainability and regeneration into the land use planning process. The preparation of strategies. 3.The next paragraph sets out how the strategy will be implemented while section 6 develops these themes in more detail by setting out the strategic policies.Tourism will be promoted as a useful element in the regeneration of the Borough’s economy through visitor management and/or environmental management to promote and safeguard communities and negate any adverse effect upon local communities. Regeneration also needs to take account of existing inequalities in health. In joining with other London Boroughs. planning briefs. The above sets out how the UDP aims to integrate the three themes of equality and social inclusion. by targeting initiatives and renewal at areas of greatest need. c. but particularly through the following mechanisms: a.proposals as a mechanism for ensuring that major developments promote public health within the Borough. community and education provision. Regeneration and town planning are most obviously connected when considering physical change. Care will be taken to relate such regeneration to existing health. business and tourism.

The physical structure of the Borough is marked by a 13 kilometre frontage to the River Thames. On this basic structure an ecological heritage has developed reflected in different landscapes. which was started in the late 60’s and is still being developed. It is important that such areas are conserved and enhanced.2 The Borough of Greenwich has inherited an environment which in many areas is of high quality and is a considerable asset.044 hectares and is the twelfth largest Borough in London.f. Recognition of Maritime Greenwich through the inscription of the town centre and neighbouring environs as a World Heritage Site of international importance indicates the quality of heritage and architecture. 4. open spaces and employment locations and is designed around the lakes and canals 4. By entering into dialogue with the community and voluntary sectors to ensure that local knowledge and aspirations are reflected in planning activities and by encouraging community organisations.5 4 PART ONE . The UDP to be successful must not only distinguish these different areas and have appropriate policies but must also seek to ensure that environmental considerations are central to all development/land use decisions. land uses and economic activities that are of significant cultural and heritage value. BOROUGH PROFILE 4. The main town centres are Woolwich and Greenwich. It is broadly residential but has its own town centre. an ancient woodland of great ecological merit and significance.4 4. The urban fabric is generally tight knit with streets of terraced housing interwoven with other commercial uses. partly in Greenwich and partly in Bexley. have been until recently. the former marshy river flood plain. The north of the Borough. Through other strategies of the council and the necessary partnerships which are formed to aid their implementation. The Borough population is 228.129 metres). 2005 mid year estimate).To the east is the community of Thamesmead. The interaction between people and the environment has produced a mosaic of built environments. Conversely there are areas in the Borough where the environment is of low quality and in need of improvement. This plateau in turn rises to Shooters Hill. g. limited.1 The Borough has an area of 5. except for Greenwich Park.To the south and west the land slopes away to the Ravensbourne and its tributaries before rising again to the southern boundary. Open spaces.100 (Office for National Statistics. It is this inter relationship between the physical fabric and local communities that provides the unique character of the place. has a contrasting mix of the older developed areas of the Borough where communities have grown in association with the river and riverside industries and contemporary waterfront developments. Perhaps the most important feature is Oxleas Wood. the steep slope of the river cliff or escarpment which rises to a plateau stretching from Blackheath to Plumstead and Bostall Heath. These relationships must be built upon and improved as they constitute the basic resource on which the Borough must work and the basis for future planning activity. THE ENVIRONMENT 4.The Greenwich Strategy is an important voice to feed community needs and aspirations into the UDP.3 4. But the Borough is also rich in other woods and commons and almost a quarter of its area is in some type of open space use. self-help groups and cooperatives to participate in the implementation of the strategy. near the river.The Ravensbourne marks the Borough’s western edge and joins The Thames at Deptford Creek. the highest point in the Borough (and London . Interspersed with the older areas are a number of relatively recent developments of housing and industrial estates.

Greenwich’s population comprises a rich mix of ethnicity.6 On steep cliffs of the ‘river cliff ’ there are interesting residential environments with streets of close packed terraced houses with fine views over the river. lower density character for the area. Millennium Dome and new open spaces.400 are households with a married couple (including those with dependent and non-dependent children). but then increase to 17% in 2021. 4. Single person households account for 21. to 8% in 2021. 2011 and 2021 but with a numerical increase of nearly 1700 children (2001-2021).8 Population projections for the Borough show the total number of residents increasing from 217. There are areas of great architectural merit and importance. Beyond the ‘cliff edge’ the Borough starts to take on a more suburban style with more detached and semi detached housing in communities that developed in relation to the provision of the railways in the early part of the century. with almost all of these one-person pensioner households. 20.needed to drain the area.100 from 1991. culture and language. 4. with Black or Black British and African being the largest groups. residential areas where heavy goods traffic has an adverse impact. Modern developments are particularly focused on the Peninsula with its tube station. for example. at 7% of the population in 2001. expected to grow to over 103. [Greater London Authority 2003 population projections Scenario 8.This is in contrast to a decline in population in the 1960’s and 1970’s. The proportion of older people (over 60) in the Borough will decrease from 17% in 2001 to 15% of the total population both in 2006 and 2011. The number of people over 85 years of age will fall from 10% of the over 60 population in 2001 and 2011.13 4. there are also areas where the relationship between environment and land use should be improved.7 P O P U L AT I O N S T R U C T U R E A N D T R E N D S 4. Within the broad pattern described above there are many smaller areas with their own particular mix of diversity and identity.11 4.12 4. The wards that will see the greatest increase in population are West Greenwich. an increase of 8.047 in 2011 and 246. 4. The 2001 Census recorded 92. and reflects amongst other things the recent and future house building in the Borough. Pensioner-only households comprise 14% of the total households in the Borough. Maryon Wilson Park and again the area has seen a number of comparatively recent residential developments. reflecting permitted and proposed developments in the Waterfont area including Greenwich Peninsula. This is a decrease from 24% in 1991. The proportion of children under five requiring primary childcare and educational facilities is projected to remain stable. In places open spaces have remained.805 in 2001 to 231.The majority of ethnic minority communities are in the north of the Borough. Peninsula and Thamesmead Moorings.000 by 2011. such as the Progress Estate. and areas of a distinct style. The 2001 Census recorded that 23% of the population was from a minority ethnic group (defined as all groups other than ‘white’).800 households in the Borough.14 PART ONE 5 . the Royal Arsenal and Charlton House. Millennium village.000 of the total.9 4.This area also has many fine open spaces that help to provide a much looser.The main town centre for this part of the Borough is Eltham.956 in 2006. 241. However. The other marked change is that by 2021 the proportion of 20-40 year olds will have declined from 34% to 30% whilst the proportion of 40-60 year olds will have increased from 23 % to 27%.1].100 are lone-parent households and 4.10 4.700 households contain co-habiting couples (2001 Census). the Old Royal Naval College. for example.616 in 2016. 13. for example.

PA S T AC H I E V E M E N T S 4. • New developments along the Waterfront. primarily in the north of the Borough. 6 PART ONE .16 The London Borough of Greenwich has many locational advantages being close to Central London and having an extensive river frontage. • New uses for the Old Royal Naval College. as well as being on the route between Central London and the Channel Tunnel and Channel Ports. • The designation of two new conservation areas. including a lack of green space.100 more dwellings between 1991 and 2001. ODPM 2004).100 between 1991 and 2001. • New residential development in Thamesmead. This will. This position should be advantageous for attracting new investment. • The inscription of Maritime Greenwich as a World Heritage Site.000 between 1991 and 2001. Some of these areas also experience environmental deprivation. • The Millennium Dome. L O C AT I O N 4. • The re-emergence of the river itself and riverside land as a key focus for a wide range of new uses.17 The strategies formed within the previous Plan period have come to fruition. of course. economic and environmental conditions and to facilitate neighbourhood renewal. • A new riverside park in Woolwich Town Centre. • Significant developments at Deptford Creek and the Peninsula.4.The Borough has a key location on the navigations and terminals that comprise the Port of London. resulting in: • The population growing by nearly 8. • Households growing by around 8. and their successful melding with existing riverside uses. • The extension of the Docklands Light Railway to Greenwich and the Jubilee Line to North Greenwich. leading to the need to improve social. • 7.Ten out of the Borough’s seventeen wards. • The expansion of Thamesmead Town Centre. City airport and the channel tunnel are specifically opening up new international/pan European markets. • The refocusing of development opportunities into east and south east London. and • The amount of derelict land reduced by 100 hectares. Such areas of deprivation suffer from a combination of economic and social problems. contain areas within the most deprived 10% in England.15 Greenwich ranks as the 41st most deprived local authority in England and the 9th most deprived Borough in London in terms of ‘extent’ of deprivation (Indices of Deprivation. depend to a large extent on continuing investment in transport infrastructure such as an extension of the Docklands Light Railway into the heart of Woolwich town centre and the Waterfront Transit scheme. It is part of the East London regeneration area and close to Docklands and the city airport.

000 new dwellings will be provided. including redevelopment of the New Haddo estate.400 dwellings including 1. • Continued development of Thamesmead. These will include a Docklands Light Railway extension from London City Airport. recognising its major tourism potential and including new linkages to enhance the commercial redevelopment of Woolwich. and open up a significant stretch of the Thames to the public with a riverside walk.The introduction of the European Spatial Planning Policy will contribute to the objectives of sustainable development and employment. the Blackwall-Silvertown Crossing and part of the Crossrail train network from north Kent beyond London. leisure facility and function centre. including the Borough of Greenwich.F U T U R E O P P O RT U N I T I E S 4.000 by 2011. • The provision of a number of new Thames Crossings. including transformation of the Dome into an international class sports arena.900 replacement affordable units and open spaces. community and educational facilities. POLICY CONTEXT EUROPEAN 5. provide new leisure facilities.This will transform housing and the local infrastructure and tackle crime and exclusion and promote opportunity. • Substantial progress in the build-out of the Meridian Delta Limited Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula. and • The provision of Waterfront Transit.1 The South East of England. which will provide a framework reference document for Regional Planning Guidance on European issues. 5. The EU will be involved in planning and environmental issues through the European Spatial Development Perspective.000 between 2001 and 2016. including Tripcock Point where approximately 2. • Household numbers growing to over 103.000 new homes by 2010. including a mixed-use residential-led development at Kidbrooke providing 4. plus the completion of Greenwich Millennium Village. to Woolwich Arsenal. PART ONE 7 . trading patterns and investment. • Construction of approximately 10. The rising European influence and competitiveness requires the Borough (as well as the rest of Britain) to increase its attractiveness to business by improving environmental quality. • Significant development in West Greenwich / Deptford Creekside providing new homes. shopping and transport facilities.18 The Plan period for the current plan is likely to see the following come to fruition: • Population growing by around 29. multinational businesses and European organisations. Increasingly the country is influenced by decisions made on a European basis by the EU. • Continued re-use and development of the former Royal Arsenal site in Woolwich and its listed buildings for a mix of uses. does not exist on a social or economic island. business skills and labour skills to enable it to compete more effectively across Europe. • Development at Warren Lane and MacBean Street to enhance the retail core of Woolwich. In particular 1992 heralded the start of the single European Market with its consequent impact on firms. the Thames Gateway Bridge (across Gallion’s Reach). • The regeneration of South Greenwich. business space.

Many of these issues have now worked through into national planning guidance as expressed in the Government’s Planning Policy Guidance (PPG) Notes. There has been particular concern regarding levels of public transport investment and a growing recognition that partnership was a necessary mechanism to resolve many of the planning issues facing society. developers and business interests with a measure of certainty about what types of developments will and will not be permitted. intense development pressures in the South East and mounting concern about transport. and those related to individual sites. the UDP will retain ‘development plan status’ for a period of at least three years. Greenwich Local Agenda 21 focuses the National Strategy and seeks to integrate environmental concerns prevalent in the Borough with social and economic issues Currently there are 16 PPGs and 9 PPSs on a variety of topics. In particular the principles of sustainability are now incorporated into planning guidance. whilst taking account of the interests of conservation. A number of the PPGs are currently being revised and replaced by PPSs. They should provide a statement of the authority’s policies and proposals for the use of land in its area. succinct and easily understood. PPG12 also indicates that plans need to be clear. PPG12 states that “By identifying sites for development. PPG12 ‘Development Plans’ (1999). efficiency and amenity in the development and use of land. an authority can demonstrate in a positive way how the vision and strategy in the plan will be implemented in practical terms. The main function of Part One of a UDP is to state in broad terms the general policies and proposals of strategic importance for the development and use of land in the area.2 The last ten years there has been an increasing awareness of environmental issues as part of the rising “green consciousness”. the Council will bring forward Local Development Documents to replace parts of the UDP in accordance with the Local Development Scheme 5.7 5. amenity bodies.4 5. Planning Policy Statements (PPS) and Circulars. They provide a means for coordinating development.3 5. It outlines key issues on plan contents and procedures and stresses the importance that the Government attaches to the need for plans to be prepared and updated quickly and efficiently.5 5. The 1992 United Nations Earth Summit in Rio sought to minimise our negative impacts on the environment whilst continuing to improve our quality of life. PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that the planning system should facilitate and promote sustainable and inclusive patterns of development. Policies in UDP’s may include those which relate to the whole or part of the plan area. thus providing residents. During the three-year period. Properly used. taking account of national and regional policies. Development plans are intended to provide a firm basis for rational and consistent decisions on planning applications and appeals. Development plans should contain the local planning authority’s policies and proposals for the development and use of land. and protecting the local environment. Part Two of the UDP sets out the local planning authority’s detailed policies and specific proposals for the development and use of land which will guide its day to day planning decisions.6 5. and provided a framework by which countries could develop their strategies.‘Agenda 21’ was the resulting document of actions required to work towards sustainable development.N AT I O N A L 5. including the provision of infrastructure.The planning system should work towards ensuring that development and growth are sustainable.” Under the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004.8 8 PART ONE . provides a strategic overview of the role and importance of development plans within the planning system. It should concentrate on providing a strategic framework within which detailed policies can be framed in Part Two of the UDP. setting out the criteria which will be used to judge whether planning applications should be allowed. the planning system can help to secure economy.

economically active. Provide opportunity and equity for the Region’s population to reduce social exclusion. The Draft South East Plan was published in March 2006 (Regional Spatial Strategy for the South East excluding London). the M25. The region as a whole is faced by a number of other issues such as the lack of affordable housing.10 T H A M E S G AT E WAY 5. and d. the need for public transport investment. Improving economic performance within Europe b. Provide a more sustainable pattern of development with better management of natural assets. London remains the focus of the region although competition from the rest of the South East as a potential location for services and industries is ever increasing particularly as a result of substantial infrastructure investment. Safeguard and enhance environmental assets. The Thames Gateway Planning Framework (RPG9a . Encourage sustainable patterns of development. development pressured regions within the Country and these regional factors are all exemplified in the Capital. The focus of the Draft South East Plan is on enabling urban renaissance. and of vacant and under used sites e.11 The Thames Gateway is the name given to the area that extends 43 miles long by 20 miles across from Lewisham and Tower Hamlets in London to Tilbury in Essex and the Isle of Sheppey in Kent.1995) is supplementary guidance to RPG9 and identifies Thames Gateway as a major potential focus for growth and development. highly congested.REGIONAL 5.12 The Thames Gateway is also one of the national growth areas in the Government’s Sustainable Communities Plan (2003).9 The South East region is one of the most densely populated. Within London Thames Gateway encompasses an area on either side of the River Thames extending eastward from Deptford and the Royal Docks but also extending up the Lea Valley to Stratford. concentrating development in urban areas.The area has been identified by Government as the main area for development growth in the South East. for example along the M4. whilst other areas experience “overheating” from too much growth/development. promoting a prosperous and multi-purpose countryside. Maximise opportunities for new economic activity. Reinforce and strengthen existing economic and community strengths d. making full use of existing infrastructure. for example Inner London. thereby reducing use of and reliance on the private car. promoting regeneration and renewal. c. Encourage a dynamic and robust economy. Ensure a higher quality of environment and quality of life. created by improved transport connections to Europe c.The result has been that some areas suffer from high unemployment and lack regeneration.The vision set out in guidance is to: a. reducing travel demand and promoting wider choices in travel options. b. This east/west imbalance is also reflected in London. A key feature of the region is that economic growth is not spread evenly through the region but has favoured the west over the east. pressure on urban open spaces and countryside and a need to improve and enhance the environmental quality of the region. It also provides the wider spatial framework for Thames Gateway. 5. 5. which is a regional and national priority for regeneration (see below). for example. Up to £446 million will be made available in the Thames Gateway to PART ONE 9 . Objectives for the Gateway include: a.

The Deputy Prime Minister announced in his July 2002 statement. that there was potential for 200. reaffirms the Mayor’s vision to develop London as an exemplary sustainable world city. echoed in the Communities Plan.These include those in regionally identified Strategic Views and affecting Strategic Wharves on the Thames. The Plan also proposes regenerating existing deprived communities through access to 300. the treatment of town centres and the river Thames.000 new jobs in the Gateway by 2031. (Government Office for London) The Spatial Development Strategy. and implementing a number of strategies covering Spatial Development. the built and natural environment. The Plan has six objectives. vibrant urban living. The Government Office for London has the responsibility. quality public services and infrastructure. which are summarised as follows:- 5. forms the Development Plan for the Borough. Waste Management and Biodiversity.000 homes to be provided in London and the growth areas by 2016.create models of well designed. The Mayor is responsible for strategic planning in London. Economic Development.13 The Greater London Authority Act 1999 created the Greater London Assembly and the Mayor of London. economic regeneration.The London Assembly is a scrutinising body to provide a check and a balance on the Mayor. Although it has a formal end date of 2020. on behalf of the Secretary of State. Circular 1/2000 states that the London Plan should cover a range of issues including sustainable development. Government Circular 1/2000 clarifies that the Mayor must be consulted on a range of development proposals. social inclusion and improvements in environmental management and the use of resources. social inclusion.The London Boroughs.The London Plan (2004). including reviewing the Mayor’s draft strategies. in preparing their UDPs must be in general conformity with the Mayor’s Spatial Development Strategy (SDS). marrying homes with jobs. to ensure that the Mayoral strategies are prepared having regard to national and regional guidance. including producing. in additional to current plans. Noise.15 5. T H E M AYO R A N D T H E A S S E M B LY 5. together with the UDP (2006). Under the Town and Country Planning (Mayor of London) Order 2000. Culture.This will be based on economic growth.The Mayor is directly elected and has a number of statutory duties including to engage with the Assembly and the people of London. The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 has given the London Plan ‘development plan’ status. London as a world city. the Mayor may direct the Council to refuse a planning application that conflicts with the Spatial Development Strategy or is ‘otherwise contrary to good strategic planning in Greater London’. it interacts with strategies of differing timescales and is subject to ongoing monitoring and review.14 5. but covers issues beyond those considered the mainstream of the current statutory planning system. The London Plan (2004) . only deals with matters of strategic importance to London. called the London Plan. Transport. Air Quality.16 10 PART ONE .

the sustainable use of resources. well-designed and green city • Integrate Spatial Development with the Mayor’s Environmental Strategies.21 Objective 5:. densities and growth in line with public transport capacity in order to achieve an urban renaissance • Enable London and the Opportunity Areas to accommodate more jobs. tourism and create opportunities to stimulate the right economic growth locations • Develop a broad economic base. build more accessible housing and address the needs of the breadth of London’s population • Advance the standards of local services including education.000 jobs created in this sub-region. thriving biodiversity. foster dynamic growth sectors whilst encouraging research and development 5. reduce the need to travel and by encouraging development to locate near to public transport • Improve transport links between London and major transport interchanges.To promote social inclusion and tackle deprivation and discrimination • Tackle unemployment. promote safe and networked access by modes other than the private car and encourage the sustainable movement of freight 5. advice and training services • Encourage local participation in the development process.19 Objective 3:. health. attract industries. and Opportunity Areas including Creekside. con-ordinated services and improved access in suburban areas. concentrated deprivation and homelessness by broadening access to education. improving air quality and assessing flood risk • Promote green industries.To make London a better city for people to live in • Enhance the design of buildings and public spaces. During the London Plan period. there are expected to be 104. community benefits. Greenwich Peninsula and Thamesmead.To improve London’s accessibility • Provide a land-use framework for implementing the Mayor’s transport strategy. considering issues such as the consumption of energy and waste.The Council will PART ONE 11 . new development and regeneration in the East London Priority Area and strengthen the role of suburban town centres • Promote co-ordination of area-based regeneration initiatives. protecting and enhancing designated open spaces 5. health and other social and community services 5. provide transport-related services and infrastructure.17 Objective 1:. release identified surplus employment land. urban design.To make London a more prosperous city with strong and diverse economic growth • Create a spatial framework to realise the Mayor’s Economic Development Strategy. The London Plan identifies locations where this new growth will predominately be provided: Areas of Intensification including Kidbrooke and Woolwich.To accommodate London’s growth within its boundaries without encroaching on open spaces • Maximising capacity. regeneration and infrastructure improvement.22 Objective 6:. employment opportunities. prevent discrimination and provide a spatial framework for education.18 Objective 2:. use of London’s waterways and the protection of open spaces 5.To make London a more attractive.5. cleanliness. recycled land. public safety and develop London’s cultural assets 5. consolidate the infrastructural base.23 East London is the Mayor’s priority area for development. historic conservation.000 additional homes and 249.20 Objective 4:.

B O R O U G H S T R AT E G I E S 5. pinpointing the challenges and targeting the actions necessary to deliver real improvements.The Council and its partners will contribute to securing its objectives at many levels. will jointly monitor progress annually against the Strategy’s vision and actions. BOROUGH OF GREENWICH 5. RIVER THAMES 5. plans and initiatives.27 12 PART ONE .The key themes for the Greenwich Strategy are the areas of well being .25 There are also a number of other strategies which relate to all or parts of the Borough. community and voluntary sector agencies. and • Use fair and open Competition to procure the service. why and how a service is being provided. leisure and tourist resource while the river is also used for the transport of freight and passengers.The London Plan also provides the policy context for the safeguarding of a number of named wharves on the River. following public consultation. economic and environmental issues facing the Borough are addressed through a variety of strategies. • Compare the performance with others.social. deals specifically with the River Thames and the Thames Policy Area between Hampton and Crayford Ness. through strategy aimed at London’s waterways (the Blue Ribbon Network). The London Plan.26 The social. O T H E R C R O S S . charities and the private sector. environmental and economic. It provides the context for locally based bids for resources from Central Government. plans and initiatives. It is a strategic document setting out the vision for the Borough for 2010 (see Section 2 above) and identifying medium and long term aims for the borough. jointly and through individual services. Each service is considered against: • Challenge. six of which are located in the Borough.The Strategy was completed and issued by the Greenwich Partnership in late 2003.24 The River Thames is one of London’s most important natural features. including planning. 5. private. The Partnership. • Consult local people and businesses about the quality of the service. Many stretches of the river have undergone significant change in recent years while there continues to be strong development pressures along much of its length. the National Lottery. Europe. The Local Government Act 1999 gives local authorities a duty of Best Value under which they are required to produce Best Value Performance Plans showing their record in delivering services and their plans for improving them. which is made up of the Council. including the Thames Estuary Management Plan and Local Environment Agency Plan (LEAP) Action Plans.work with the Mayor and sub-regional partnerships to help develop a coherent Sub-Regional Development Framework for East London. other public. Authorities will have to review the performance of all their services.The river and its environs are a vital ecological. It thus encompasses the whole of Greenwich’s waterfront and requires high standards of design and development for all schemes fronting the River Thames and Deptford Creek. over a five-year period. The Greenwich Strategy is the overarching plan for all these strategies.

5. • Energy Strategy (2002). • Regeneration Strategy Draft 2006-2020. • Health Improvement Plan 2002-05. • Education Development Plan 2002-07. PART ONE 13 . 2003. • Transport Strategy (2001) and Draft Local Implementation Plan (2005).28 Other strategies that are considered by policies throughout this plan. • Annual Corporate and Performance Plans. • Creating Safer Greenwich: Crime & Disorder Strategy. • Social Inclusion & Justice Strategy 2002-06. • Contaminated Land Inspection Strategy (2002). • Green Space Strategy (2006). • Cultural Strategy for Greenwich: Making Culture Matter (2004). • Greenwich Municipal Waste Management Strategy. • Housing Strategy 2002-07 & Annual Housing Investment Programme. but will draw upon the land use policies contained here to implement projects requiring physical development.These will form the basis for monitoring the implementation of the Plan policies in the Annual Monitoring Report. • Corporate Equality Plan 2003-2006. • Open Space Strategy. • Sports Strategy: Fit for Sport 2004-2008. 5. Strategies adopted or in preparation by the Council include: • Air Quality Action Plan (2002). • Neighbourhood Renewal: A New Way of Doing Business (2002). plans and proposals. • Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan.To facilitate Best Value a comprehensive sets of targets and indicators have been set out in Chapter 11: Implementation. and • Tourism Strategy: Greenwich: A Place to Visit? 2004-10. • Local Agenda 21 (1997). • Children & Young People’s Plan 2006-08. contain their own detailed objectives. • Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich 2002-07. • Business and Enterprise Framework 2004-08. • Greenwich Equality Policy.29 The role of the UDP is to provide guidance and advice on the land use implications of these other Council strategies.

To retain. STRATEGIC PLANNING POLICIES 6. and by promoting efficient use of employment land and improvements to business infrastructure.1 In developing its planning strategy for this Unitary Development Plan the Council has adopted the following policies: Community Needs. especially the priority needs of the most disadvantaged individuals. To provide a high quality sustainable residential environment and to ensure that new housing is built to a high quality design. and to ensure that the benefits of economic activity are shared by all sections of the community including those disadvantaged or facing discrimination in relation to the job market. facilities. To ensure that significant employment generators are accessible by public transport. existing businesses. Housing SH1 SH2 To provide sufficient land to allow for the completion of at least 16. areas of deprivation and areas of new development. and encourage the expansion of. To resist the loss of employment land and premises in active employment use or that are well suited for continued employment use. In order to secure the best use of land and a properly planned environment the council will seek to ensure.6. that new development provides for the infrastructure. Jobs & the Local Economy SJ1 To expand and diversify the Borough’s economic base and employment opportunities by identifying good quality employment sites.100 net additional dwellings between 1997 and 2016. especially in areas of deficiency. size and affordability. consolidate and retain community facilities within the area they serve. To ensure the development of balanced and mixed communities and to meet the varying needs of households. communities and neighbourhoods. amenities and other planning benefits which are necessary to support and serve it and to offset any consequential planning loss to the local area. To retain and improve the existing housing stock. SC3 SJ2 SJ3 SJ4 SJ5 SH3 SH4 14 PART ONE . To provide. through the use of conditions and planning obligations attached to planning permissions. and to promote the provision of premises for small and growing firms. especially those with special needs. To encourage training and the development of the skills of the Borough workforce. Benefits & Services SC1 SC2 To ensure that development policies reflect the needs of all the Borough’s residents. by providing a suitable range of dwellings by type.

The only uses considered to be generally appropriate within MOL are: i. iii. iv. Golf courses. woodlands and orchards. Identifying and conserving sites of nature conservation importance and. Open Spaces SH6 SO1 To adopt a positive approach to the use and treatment of open space by: i.SH5 The scale of housing need in the Borough for affordable housing is such that the Council will seek to ensure that at least 35% of the dwellings provided between 1997 and 2016 are affordable to those on low and lower incomes. vi. Open spaces of strategic importance (Metropolitan Open Land) will be maintained and their character safeguarded from built development and enhanced as appropriate. Cemeteries and associated crematoria. Improving the environmental quality of open spaces. Nature conservation. biodiversity and open space features throughout the urban environment. improve and enhance the character of existing public and private open space (Green Belt. To ensure that all communities. Agriculture. Community Open Space. Public and private open space. especially in areas of public open space deficiency. Recognising the value of landscape. The Council will facilitate the regeneration and renewal of South Greenwich to alleviate the physical and social isolation of the area and to enable the development of mixed communities and sustainable neighbourhoods. Allotments. ii.The needs of disadvantaged communities and groups with special requirements will be given emphasis. small open spaces) that fulfil a specific function for the local and wider community and encourage full use of their facilities. iv. v. ii. sportsgrounds and playing fields. Metropolitan Open Land. viii. PART ONE 15 . Large grounds attached to educational facilities and institutions. SO3 SO4 vii. Open water features. iii. Maintaining and increasing suitable recreational facilities. residents and workers have adequate access to open space and the riverside. SO2 To safeguard.

the following priorities should be considered in preparing development proposals and transport policies and projects: i. To protect areas liable to river or tidal flooding. particularly in respect of sensitive local areas. To protect and improve the environment in termsof air and water quality. To seek equitable levels of mobility and accessibility for all groups of people. meeting the requirements of the Road Traffic Reduction Act and Local Air Quality Management Plans. Generally. safety and the built and natural environment. To promote the use of previously developed land. To reduce the generation of waste and to encourage re-use and recycling of waste. To promote safe transport in general. ii. and to protect Listed Buildings of architectural or historic interest and their settings. Movement SM1 SM2 To effectively link major transport generators and attractors to the current and foreseeable transport network.Environmental Protection SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4 To encourage environmentally sustainable forms of development. open land. SM4 16 PART ONE . To preserve or enhance areas of recognised and valued character. particularly for those presently disadvantaged in mobility terms. wetlands and wildflower meadows. cycling and public transport. cyclists and public transport users first . wildlife habitats. noise. smell and toxic materials. and particularly safe and convenient movement for pedestrians and cyclists. fine views. particularly in respect of safer journeys to school. people with disabilities. such as walking. SM3 Pedestrians. and reduce the impact of pollution. To preserve or enhance Conservation Areas. and to ensure new developments make efficient and appropriate use of land. and safeguarding the environment through mechanisms such as traffic management. SD2 SD3 SD4 SD5 To encourage the use of sustainable forms of transport. then Car users and powered two wheeled vehicles. by restraining road traffic. at no or minimal cost to the environment. To improve areas of poor quality environment. including historic landscapes. for the Borough. and London as a whole. trees. Design & Conservation SD1 The Council will encourage a high quality of design in all new developments and alterations to existing developments which positively contribute to the improvement of their accessibility. especially from transport and industrial processes. woodland. parking control and development control.

visitors and the business community. Newham). STC4 To promote a high standard of design in town centre buildings and public and civic spaces. as set out below and in tables TC1 and TC2: i. 32 Neighbourhood Parades complement the formal town centre hierarchy and typically have less than 20 shops offering basic convenience goods and services within walking distance. PART ONE 17 . workers and visitors. STC3 To safeguard and enhance safety. Thames Gateway Bridge and to have regard to notification requirements in respect of a third Blackwall crossing (to Silvertown Way in L.They are preferred locations for larger scale development in retail. and to preserve and enhance historic buildings. Greenwich Waterfront Transit is another strategic scheme the Council supports and will be safeguarded as and when appropriate.SM5 To promote a fully integrated public transport system that is extensive in coverage and meets the needs of residents. usually including a small supermarket. improved interchanges and common high standards. ii. walking. leisure and other town centre uses. This would include necessary new infrastructure and services. iii. STC5 To improve town centre accessibility by a choice of means of transport. security. Provision of a minimum range of retailing and services will be safeguarded. and the Borough’s largest and second shopping and office employment centres respectively. changes to the strategic public transport and road networks in respect of Deptford Church Street junction realignment. comfort. Woolwich and Eltham are designated Major Centres. and are suitable locations for appropriately scaled town centre uses to serve their local catchment. Town Centres SM6 SM7 STC1 To safeguard and improve the vitality. and to reduce congestion and pollution in town centres by promoting public transport. To safeguard the Crossrail route. They are appropriate locations for a variety of town centre uses scaled to serve the population of their sub-region without harming the vitality and viability Woolwich or Eltham. Retail developments will be subject to need and sequential testing. workers and visitors in the Borough. and its network of Neighbourhood Parades. businesses. A new Local Centre will be developed by Kidbrooke Station as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area. Proposals that serve this wider market must respect both its heritage and its service role to local residents. iv. Seven Local Centres offer a moderate range of shopping and service activities. Six District Centres offer a significant range of both comparison shopping and a supermarket or range of food shops.B. and in addition a major visitor destination and an inscribed World Heritage site. District and Local Centres. Greenwich is the borough’s largest District Centre. the Council will promote the movement of freight by more sustainable modes such as water and rail. Woolwich Rail Crossing and DLR (Woolwich) Extension. amenity and the environment within the Borough’s town centres for residents. access. employment service and residential centres for residents. a high frequency Metro style rail network of turn up and go services. cycling. and other important heritage features. To assist the local and London economy commensurate with safeguarding the environment. commercial viability and sustainability of the Borough’s Town Centres as retail. leisure. STC2 To support the Borough’s Town Centre hierarchy of Major. and linked trips.

SW2 The Council recognises and will seek to enhance the value of the River Thames and Deptford Creek as waterways rich in biodiversity and environmental quality. Implementation SIM1 To monitor and review the UDP regularly to ensure it remains up-to-date. To promote the provision of facilities for tourists in appropriate locations. SIM2 To attract the necessary resources to implement the plan. culture. iii. Waterfront SW1 The Council will facilitate the redevelopment and re-use of remaining redundant land and buildings in the Waterfront during the Plan period. bringing about the regeneration of the whole area and realising its economic. Ensure that tourism is managed to provide benefits for local communities and businesses. ST2 iv. social. the amenities of the local community and the environment of the Borough. recognising that it has a positive and significant role to play in securing the economic and environmental regeneration of the Borough particularly in the Waterfront areas. to secure the sustainable development of balanced waterfront communities. and That major tourist facilities are well served by public transport. as Open Spaces. continue to work in partnerships and consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents. 18 PART ONE . environmental. cultural and recreational potential. SIM3 To use relevant planning powers in the implementation of the plan. Diversify the tourism base of the Borough’s economy by seeking facilities which embrace a wide range of arts. subject to the need to: i. and an essential part of the Borough’s character and landscape in their own right. Protect the housing stock.Tourism ST1 The Council supports and promotes tourism. ii. sporting and entertainment activities for participation and enjoyment by all sections of the community.

PART TWO .

.

consolidate and retain community facilities within the area they serve. communities and neighbourhoods.4 COMMUNITY NEEDS. The strategic policy for opportunities for all is: To ensure that development policies reflect the needs of all the Borough’s residents.2 SC2 SC3 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 1. needs and services are: In order to secure the best use of land and a properly planned environment the council will seek to ensure. COMMUNITY NEEDS.3 Community Needs Community needs have been examined through identifying disadvantaged groups and areas of deprivation in the Borough. It is recognised that these needs have to be addressed in a comprehensive. To provide. sexuality or ethnic background. disability. income. especially the priority needs of the most disadvantaged individuals. through the use of conditions and planning obligations attached to planning permissions. facilities. Table C1 sets those groups out. integrated and multi-agency approach but that planning has a role to play within such approaches.1 The Council’s approach to social inclusion and equal opportunities applies to all the policy areas contained within the Plan. caring responsibilities. BENEFITS & SERVICES GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 1. gender. that new development provides for the infrastructure. BENEFITS & SERVICES 21 .The needs of groups facing discrimination and deprivation are examined and areas of deprivation and their specific community needs are identified. The chapter sets out the Council’s approach to community benefits and goes on to detail the broad needs for a wide range of community services ranging from local community facilities to health and educational establishments.The general policies for community benefits. It recognises the ways in which land use and transportation policies can affect some people more than others because of differences in personal mobility arising from factors such as age. 1. areas of deprivation and areas of new development. Disadvantaged Groups There are a number of groups in the Borough who are disadvantaged by the built environment. especially in areas of deficiency. health.1. SC1 1. amenities and other planning benefits which are necessary to support and serve it and to offset any consequential planning loss to the local area.This chapter contains the policy context. Particular issues are addressed by policies in this chapter and elsewhere in the Plan.

Transport: inaccessible. special requirements for larger and extended families. harassment.Training. demand for setting up/running small businesses. Accessible new buildings. Woolwich Riverside (36%) (2001 Census) 22 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Accessible/adapted housing. ill-health and in the Borough to provide reduced standards of living. Sympathetic policies for community buildings. Kidbrooke with Hornfair 20 %. Provision of facilities and conveniences. Policies/ Land Use Sheltered housing. Middle Park & Sutcliffe 20% (2001 Census). Employment: inaccessible places of work and lack of sheltered employment. Transport: dependence on public transport. shops. reliable public transport. Community facilities: places of worship for different religions. Encourage growth of service sector. Cheap. Affordable housing. meeting places.Translation of Council documents when possible and interpretation provisions. Allocate sites. particularly women and refugee communities. job opportunities. Disabled facilities at work. Glyndon (38%).TABLE C1: GROUPS MOST DISADVANTAGED BY THE BUILT ENVIRONMENT Disadvantaged Group DISABLED PEOPLE Numbers Affected 17% had a Limiting Long Term Illness (2001 Census) Distribution in the Borough Borough-wide. Accessible public transport and community transport. Issues Housing: Inaccessible. unsuitably designed. Maintain economic activity in Borough. particularly by women and older people. leisure facilities and open space. Housing: dependence on public sector. Building design and landscapes not always conducive to personal safety. Need for training. including unsafe elements. MINORITY ETHNIC COMMUNITIES 23% (2001 Census) Particularly Woolwich Common (41%). Language needs for some groups. Thamesmead Moorings 7% (2001 Census) Leads to poverty and Maintain economic activity deprivation. Problems of access to all health and other facilities. Employment: higher unemployment rate. Housing mix. Flexible policies on small businesses. accessible. UNEMPLOYED PEOPLE 5% (2001 Census) Woolwich Riverside 9%. Employment opportunities. BENEFITS & SERVICES . Encourage the provision of affordable public transport.

Hostels. many homeless. 2001 Census) Affordable.Training. Children’s Centres with integrated centres for under fives and their families. Reliable. Community nurseries. sick. LONE PARENTS 14%-13. accessible. Domiciliary services. reliable public transport. Welfare/ heath: low income group. (2001 Census) Northern Wards most affected Woolwich Common 16%. Eltham North and Eltham South (2001 Census) Sheltered housing and special needs housing. health clinics. (2001 Census) Southern Wards most affected such as Coldharbour & Eltham. problems of maintenance. Supported housing. Local shopping. people with disabilities and older people. Good public transport. Community facilities access to health and other facilities. Numbers rising. Employment opportunities. many part-time. Safety conscious design of built environment. OLDER PEOPLE 13% over pensionable age. Better access.Transport dependent on public transport. need for community care and facilities.Transport: few women with access to cars so dependent on public transport. Cheap. Shoppers’ crèches. Glyndon 15% (Lone parent households with dependent children. accessible housing. Affordable housing. Children’s Centres with integrated centres for under fives and their families. Accessible buildings including ramps and handrails. lack of childcare. Childcare facilities. COMMUNITY NEEDS. etc.133 households.Disadvantaged Group WOMEN Numbers Affected 52% (2001 Census) Distribution in the Borough Borough-wide Issues Employment: lower wages. Woolwich Riverside 15%. poorer conditions. Housing: dependent on public housing. Housing: dependent on public housing.5% over 75's. Poverty is a particular problem. Personal safety: rise in crime against the person disproportionately affects women.care centres. BENEFITS & SERVICES 23 . safe and accessible public transport. Community facilities accessible day care centres. 6. Majority are women. Accessible community facilities. Caring: are majority of carers of children. Day. hospitals and health centres. Shopping: lack of accessibility to shops for pushchairs and few childcare facilities. Policies/ Land Use Workplace nurseries. Access: many may be infirm and have similar needs to people with disabilities. Local shops. health problems increase need for health care and social service provision. Caring: lack of facilities contribute to restricted employment opportunities and adds to isolation. Housing: high dependence on public housing and rented sector. access and security.

Training housing. affordable housing. Protection of local shops. Transport: dependent on public transport. GAY 10% estimated MEN AND for all or some BISEXUAL PEOPLE part of lives Borough-wide Single unit housing. Housing: need for accessible and/or adapted housing. health clinics. Lack of training opportunities. 7.Disadvantaged Group HOMELESS PEOPLE Numbers Affected Distribution in the Borough Issues Policies/ Land Use In 2005-2006 Not Known Greenwich Council accepted responsibility for housing 971 homeless households. Safe walking routes are essential (including routes which are safe for those who use mobility aids such as scooters. Safer pedestrian environment and cycleway. Personal safety: for example. Supported housing. Transport: dependent on public transport. Shopping: local shops essential. accessible. accommodation and cheap single unit housing. Children’s Centres with integrated centres for under fives and their families. Reducing road traffic accidents and improving housing conditions CARERS 9% Borough-wide (2001 Census). Community facilities: need for day care centres and other temporary help. Community facilities: local health and other facilities essential. Housing: homelessness a major problem. Woolwich Common (51%). Thamesmead Moorings (9%) (2001 Census) Lack of temporary Hostels. need for single housing unit. hostels. 24 COMMUNITY NEEDS.2% (2001 Census) Northern Wards most affected such as Woolwich Common (10%). play space. opportunities for young homeless and young care leavers. Woolwich Riverside (9%). Accessible health services. living in poverty in a poor environment with little access to gardens or play space. reliable public transport. need for hostels for young lesbians and gay men excluded by parents. Community facilities. affordable housing. accessible reliable public transport. UNDER FIVES Many live in areas of stress in high-rise flats. Safety conscious design in built environment. wheelchairs and buggies). Access to schools. Discourage out of town shopping centres. Glyndon (48%) (2001 Census) Cheap.Totally inadequate nursery provision to meet growing demand. BENEFITS & SERVICES . Cheap. Need for health clinics and support services. High rates of injuries from road accidents due to poor road layout and/or environment and the priority given to road users. Work-place nurseries. Glyndon (9%). hospitals. need for purpose-built Lesbian and Gay Centre in safe environment. LESBIANS. community nurseries. NON-CAR OR VAN OWNERS 41% (2001 Census) Northern Wards most affected including Woolwich Riverside (55%).

women’s safe transport and existing community transport. Transport • Cheap. legal representation. safe and reliable public transport . advice and culturally sensitive services.Transport: access to special transport. • Choice of tenure to ensure that affordable. Increasing demand for supported housing. lack of properly serviced sites for temporary accommodation. Cultural and recreational provisions. sheltered employment.Varying numbers on unauthorised sites. Accessible Social Services and health services. safe and supported housing to meet different needs are available as part of any major new development. Employment training and retraining. • Transport schemes for the community. Accessible health facilities and Social Services support.to people with disabilities and geographically. accessible and safe. 1. Housing • A variety of homes.They may also encounter barriers in accessing other mainstream provision . COMMUNITY NEEDS.e. Employment: needed for retraining where wanted. accessible. PEOPLE WITH 12% Estimated LEARNING nationally DIFFICULTIES AND MENTAL HEALTH NEEDS TRAVELLERS AND ROMANY PEOPLE Approximately 50 families on Thistlebrook site. Access to health and social services. Education: irregularity a problem. affordable.5 The Disadvantaged Groups identified in Table C1 share many common experiences: they all face discrimination in obtaining access to employment and housing.Disadvantaged Group Numbers Affected Distribution in the Borough Borough-wide Issues Housing: often related to stress from living in unsuitable housing and/or environments. such as Dial-a-Ride. accessible. i. work and shop. Several key issues with implications for planning policies can be identified and are set out below.welfare benefits. Skills centre and training. Temporary and permanent sites needed London-wide. • A safe and accessible environment around homes with gardens and play space for children. often have low incomes and are disadvantaged by lack of transport and access to health and other facilities. hostels and sheltered housing. Sheltered employment integrated education. Housing: lack of permanent accommodation Londonwide. Education: integrated at local level. Policies/ Land Use Supported housing including hostels and sheltered housing. including special needs and hostels. BENEFITS & SERVICES 25 . Official site at Abbey Wood/ unauthorised sites vary. close to where people live.

baby feeding areas and play areas including crèches. attractive walking and cycling routes and pedestrian only areas. • Improving outdoor air quality and safety through measures to reduce car dependency. the proportion is much higher than this (55% and 51%.walking. etc. • User-friendly amenities and design. Shopping • Local Shopping areas and parades. day care and child care. • Personal safety should be an important consideration in the layout and design of the built environment and open spaces. • Access for disabled people. • Training to enable people to overcome disadvantage in the labour market and provide them with new skills to match job opportunities. older people. older people and people with disabilities. use of appropriate lighting. such as seating and rest areas. and parents and carers with young children. such as Woolwich Riverside and Woolwich Common. self-employment and Intermediate Labour Markets. contrast and surface textures. • Improving the environment for pedestrians. Community Services • Social support through the provision of accessible Health. wide doors and lifts.6 Table C2 provides a cross reference to the key policies for disadvantaged groups contained in other chapters of the Plan. through provision of toilets. particularly for children.• Prioritising environmentally friendly transport . • Facilities to meet the needs of people with disabilities. Social Services. • Meeting places for special cultural. and cyclists. • The importance of public transport for people who do not have access to a car: around 41% of households in Greenwich. contributing to the Department of Health Targets and reductions in traffic accidents. religious and social needs. children. to meet the needs of all. Encouraging walking and cycling through the creation of safe.and reducing car use will be essential to meeting air quality targets. 26 COMMUNITY NEEDS. • Childcare facilities such as workplace nurseries. Environment • Access for people with disabilities. 1. Jobs • Improving employment opportunities through encouraging a variety of employment including small businesses and initiatives such as community and social enterprise. • Facilities for children including separate baby changing areas. cycling and public transport . particularly elderly people and people with disabilities. In parts of Greenwich. and bring health benefits. etc. BENEFITS & SERVICES . respectively – 2001 Census). those with physical or learning needs.

SM2: SM3: SM4: M1: M4: Open Spaces Strategic Policy Public Open Space Deficiency Areas Community Benefits Park Facilities Recreational Footpaths & Cycleways Environmental Education Environmental Protection Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Traffic Restraint and Reduction Measures Design and Conservation Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Urban Design Environmental Improvements Parking and Access Arrangements Access for People with Disabilities Safety and Security in the Environment Environmental Improvements Movement Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Development and Transport . SD1: SD4: D1: D4: D5: D6: D7: D32: 7.TABLE C2: KEY POLICIES FOR DISADVANTAGED GROUPS 2. BENEFITS & SERVICES 27 .General Principles Extension of the Public Transport Network COMMUNITY NEEDS. SO3: O9: O10: O12: O15: O25: 5. SE1: SE2: E7: 6. Housing SH2: Strategic Policy SH5: Strategic Policy H7: Housing Design H12: Children’s Play Areas H13: Housing Improvement H14: Affordable Housing H15: Housing Mix H16: Non Self-Contained Accommodation H17: Lifetime Homes H18: Sheltered Housing H19/20: Wheelchair Standard Housing H21: Supported Housing H22: Travellers and Romany people 4. SJ5: J13: J14: J15: J16: Jobs and the Local Economy Strategic Policy Quality Jobs Training and Business Support Community Benefits Accessibility 3.

Studies carried out at enumeration. Some of these areas also experience environmental deprivation. in line with the London Plan. ODPM.The use of conditions and planning 1.Ten out of the Boroughs seventeen wards.There is considerable variation within the Borough. towards these areas. can make a valuable contribution to the effectiveness of the planning system. other public sector or private sector. Servicing and Parking Tourism Strategic Policy Location and Criteria Waterfront Thamesmead 1. this is also an area that contains an already disadvantaged community. ST2: T1: 10. One of the Plan’s major objectives. to help meet the specific needs of these areas. which contains relatively prosperous and less well off areas. Many of the Plan’s policies thus refer to these areas of deprivation. in conjunction with new development. Ward Poverty Profiles 1994. is to direct resources.M6: M11: M12: M28: M32: M33: M34: 8. DETR Indices of Deprivation 2004). BENEFITS & SERVICES . The use of planning conditions and obligations. contain areas within the most deprived 10% in England. Community Benefits The Borough continues to have many opportunities for major development especially along the Waterfront. including a lack of green space. Streetscape and Environmental Quality Protected Core.9 28 COMMUNITY NEEDS. leading to the need to improve social. W4: Accessible Public Transport Transport Interchanges Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities Community Benefits Cycling Pedestrians People with Disabilities . economic and environmental conditions and to facilitate neighbourhood renewal.These provide a geographical context for allocating resources in the Borough. Fringe and Local Shopping Frontages Essential Local Facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and Freestanding Premises Site Access. It is therefore vital that the Council ensures that new development is not at the cost of those communities and that regeneration is balanced to take into account their needs. ward and district level have identified geographic clusters of deprivation (Breadline Greenwich 1994. Such areas of deprivation suffer from a combination of economic and social problems.7 Areas of Deprivation Greenwich ranks as the 41st most deprived local authority in England and the 9th most deprived Borough in London in terms of ‘extent’ of deprivation (Indices of Deprivation. 2004). whether Council. primarily in the north of the Borough. however.8 1. STC2: STC3: STC5: TC5: TC9: TC12: TC15: TC17: TC19: TC25/ TC26: 9.Access in Public Areas Town Centres Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Woolwich Town Centre: Pedestrian and Cycle Access The Multi-Functional Role of Greenwich Town Centre Greenwich Town Centre:Traffic Management and Transport Links Eltham Town Centre:Traffic Management.

Amenity Space and Gardens. Barker recommended the introduction of a ‘Planning Gain Supplement’ whereby the developer would pay a financial sum.11 1. BENEFITS & SERVICES 29 . the Council will seek either through provision by the developer or through financial payment of all or part of the cost of provision. Children’s Play Areas.There are a wide range of planning benefits which the Council considers would be appropriate for planning obligations. It states that planning obligations should only be sought where they are: • • • • • 1. whereby a developer could choose to accept a standard charge instead of entering into a negotiated agreement. Circular 05/2005 ‘Planning Obligations’ provides more detailed guidance on the use of planning obligations and the type of “planning benefits” which are considered reasonable. appropriate planning benefits which meet the ‘tests’ set out above. facilities and amenities needed to support it. Community Benefits Riverside Footpath. Work/Live Units. fairly and reasonably related in scale and kind to the proposed developments. Affordable Housing. relevant to planning. When considering proposals for development which require planning permission. Industrial and Business Developments. reasonable in all other respects. or by means of financial payment to the local authority to make the necessary provision. A decision on the Optional Planning Charge will be made in the context of the Government’s response to the Barker Review of Housing Supply (March 2004). Circular 05/2005 sets out reforms relating to the negotiation of planning obligations. Unacceptable developments should not be permitted because of unrelated benefits offered by the applicant. Policy SC2 sets out the Part One policy whilst policies within the topic chapters identify community benefits that might be sought in relation to particular development proposals. 1. The Department for Local Communities and Government proposes to reform the operation of planning obligations. Section 106 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 empowers local authorities to seek such “planning benefits” from new development through agreement with developers. to contribute to wider community benefits. Further reforms could include the introduction of an ‘Optional Planning Charge’. They can ensure that the environment is safeguarded and the development provides for the infrastructure.obligations is guided by both legislation and government policy. Public Open Space Deficiency Areas.12 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Obligations can be provided either directly by the developer on or off site. measured from the uplift in land values resulting from a grant of planning permission. These include: Policy C3: Policy J6: Policy J12: Policy J14: Policy J15: Policy H11: Policy H12: Policy H14: Policy O9: Policy O10: Policy O16: Major Residential Developments.The Government will make a decision on the Planning Gain Supplement at the same time as that on the Optional Planning Charge.10 necessary. Training and Business Support Community Benefits. directly related to the proposed development. neither should acceptable development be refused permission simply because the applicant is unwilling or unable to offer unrelated benefits.

Transport Community Benefits.15 30 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Waste Recycling.Policy O17: Policy O23: Policy O24: Policy E6: Policy E12: Policy E15: Policy D4: Policy M1: Policy M3: Policy M4: Policy M6: Policy M10 Policy M19: Policy M20: Policy M27: Policy M28: Policy M32: Policy M33: Policy T1: Policy TC16: Policy W3: Cycleways along the riverfront and through open spaces Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites Management of Wildlife Sites.13 Community Services Services to support the community are provided by a variety of agencies to meet the health. it is concerned to see that the needs of the community and its disadvantaged groups are met. Travel Plans.General Principles. Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach Mixed Use Areas Policy D30/31: Archaelogy. lack of employment. Air Quality Assessments Site Servicing. which generally have a higher demand for health. working in partnership with them. Improvements to the Urban and Natural Environment. Development and Transport . Major Tourism Development.Traffic Calming Measures. Greenwich Waterfront Transit.14 1. These facilities provide an important resource to the whole community and to support particularly disadvantaged groups and areas of deprivation. educational. BENEFITS & SERVICES . Cycling. Pedestrians. welfare. and in some instances through the provision of voluntary sector grants to promote social inclusion. Although in many instances the Council is not directly responsible for providing a service. Poor housing. Car Parking. 1. New Housing Developments . social and religious needs of people living in the Borough. training and educational opportunities. which may result from a lack of open space and safe. social and welfare services. Specific Improvements.This will be through supporting and influencing the plans and proposals of the Health and other authorities. Health It is recognised increasingly that patterns of land-use and development can have a significant impact on the health of individuals and communities. Extension of the Public Transport Network Accessible Public Transport. 1. high traffic levels and consequent pollution and lack of opportunity to exercise. attractive pedestrian and cycle routes.

Education Through the Greenwich Strategy.18 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Since April 2004. but results in an improved environment for everyone. Improving Health and Cutting Inequalities. Local hospital services are commissioned from the Queen Elizabeth Hospital NHS Trust. BENEFITS & SERVICES 31 . and Mental Health and Learning Disability Services from Oxleas NHS Trust. Charlton. community awareness and involvement. The main hospital within the Borough is the Queen Elizabeth Hospital at Woolwich Common.The Council has an important role in providing community care under the National Health Service and Community Care Act 1990. By 2010. The Health Authority has to consult with the local authority when considering new development or closures. The main providers of higher and further education in the Borough are Greenwich University. which seeks to provide environments suitable for a 21st century education across secondary schools nationwide. and introduced the G Plus network to provide for Post 16 education across the Borough. 1. Programmes are underway that tackle the causes of ill health and the Borough is working towards meeting NHS targets.The former is primarily based at the Old Royal Naval 1. aims to increase equality as do the ‘CARE’ partnership and arts and sports initiatives. East Greenwich. While not all factors affecting health come within the remit of planning. this will be achieved by raising school pupil performances.17 1. the Greenwich Partnership aims to ensure the Borough is a place where people are successful learners throughout their lives. which also provides a number of community health services. the Greenwich Strategy aims to have provided high quality and accessible health and social care services for all the Borough’s residents.These emphasise prevention.all impact upon health and quality of life. Other services are provided at the Goldie Leigh and Memorial Hospital sites.16 Within the Borough there are significant health inequalities. a complementary and diverse pattern of secondary schools and post 16 provision delivered through the G Plus network. and by creating accessible lifelong learning opportunities.The partnership group.The Borough’s vision for education is for a network of early years centres. By 2010. Six Sure Start areas have also been designated in the Borough to support parents and carers with the task of bringing up children under five. the new children’s centres programme has built on the good practice within these Sure Start areas and will establish new and improved services within all the disadvantaged wards in the Borough. which has rebalanced the distribution of school places to reflect parental preferences and local needs. Greenwich is a Pathfinder Authority for the “Building for the Future” programme. a pattern of well resourced all-through primary schools.Trinity College of Music and Greenwich Community College. Close co-operation is required to ensure that Health facilities in the Borough are adequate to meet the needs of the community and the additional requirements of disadvantaged groups and areas of deprivation. This will provide a substantial investment into secondary schools throughout the Borough. The Council and the GTPCT are developing and integrating services for children through the Children’s Trust. Primary Health Care centres are being developed in the Borough to provide integrated health and social care services.The Council is also a pathfinder for the ‘Extended Schools’ initiative and aims to provide a range of Council and other community services through co-location or integration with schools. Centres exist in Kidbrooke. The Council will increase nursery provision through the Neighbourhood Nurseries initiative and alongside this will provide support for parents and carers through Sure Start services. Creekside. planning has an important role to play by ensuring that development does not exacerbate health inequalities.The Council’s Integrated Regeneration Strategy recognises the key contribution that raising education standards can make to the sustainable social and economic regeneration of the Borough. Woolwich Town Centre and the Millennium Village.The Council has completed a major schools reorganisation. Poor health is also linked to poverty and affects particular areas of the Borough. The commissioning of local health care services is the responsibility of Greenwich Teaching Primary Care Trust (GTPCT). retaining students in education beyond the age of 16. and the need for a multi-agency approach to addressing the causes of ill health.

32 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Proposals elsewhere must demonstrate a special need for the particular location which overrides the objective of supporting town and local centres. or (ii) it would enable the implementation of a strategy for the provision of a community service in the Borough. The Old Royal Naval College is also the home of Trinity College. cycle and public transport. particularly of people with higher order skills necessary for London to remain a globally competitive city”. (v) the location for such community facilities is in or on the edge of a town or local centre.The latter is based at a number of sites in the Borough. (v) Access for people with disabilities.The London Plan points out that higher education institutions “are also important feeders into the labour supply. cycle. Devonport and Dreadnought House in Greenwich Town centre and two sites in Avery Hill. (iii) The facilities should be easily accessible to those they are intended to serve by foot. Policies Community Services C1 The Council will support proposals for new or extended or enhanced community facilities particularly where they meet the needs of disadvantaged groups or areas of the Borough subject to the following criteria: (i) The location for such facilities is in or on the edge of a town or local centre. (vi) A high standard of design is achieved (See Policy D1) (vii) Appropriate car parking provision (See Policy M26 & M27) C2 Planning permission which would result in the loss of community facilities through change of use or redevelopment. as are the economic and other benefits they bring to the Borough.College. businesses are able to gain access to the skills they require and future employers will be attracted to the area. (ii) The scale of the development is appropriate to the location. ensuring that local people are able to benefit from these in terms of job opportunities. BENEFITS & SERVICES .The role of higher education in the Borough in this is acknowledged. and (vi) the needs of disadvantaged groups or areas of deprivation have been taken into account. (iv) There is no unacceptable impact on the amenity of neighbouring residents.19 A well-trained and educated resident workforce will be essential to the success of regeneration schemes in the Borough. or (iii) the site is either demonstrably unsuitable for continued use as a community facility or is vacant and no community use is forthcoming despite active site marketing on realistic terms Provided that: (iv) the alternative or remaining community facilities are easily accessible for those they are intended to serve by foot. public transport and people with disabilities. Proposals elsewhere must demonstrate a special need for the particular location which overrides the objective of supporting town and local centres. 1. will only be granted where: (i) alternative community facilities of a similar nature are provided locally in the area within which that facility serves.

for example where the proposal is for an extension of an existing facility which does not significantly change the nature of the facility. This can be satisfied where the proposal would lead to alternative provision of similar community facilities in the area. 1. Smaller scale facilities such as health centres. is going to face a significant increase in housing (see paragraph 3. children’s centres and primary schools should be encouraged in local centres. such as primary health care services. The policies also recognise that land and buildings used for community services are generally of low financial land value and need to be protected and promoted through the planning system.The pattern of delivering these community services does and will change and evolve in response to legislative and organisational changes. (iii) The size of the proposed practice is consistent with the size of the property and the character of the neighbourhood. The additional demands that this will place on the Borough’s services needs to be recognised. recreational . social. health and child care facilities. to meet any increased local demand for health.These changes will have consequences for the land and buildings through which the services are delivered. accessibility by foot. Proposals for the change of use of residential accommodation for use by doctors.Reason for C1 and C2 1. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) and PPG13: Transport (2001) encourage proposals for health.The Council is committed to ensuring that a range of community facilities . child care.The proposals will also need to be assessed to ensure that they satisfy other development control criteria set out in the Plan. it is essential that arrangements are put in place to secure additional and appropriate forms of provision so that the health and wellbeing of the local community does not suffer.22 The Borough. such as schools and colleges. Where developments increase demand for existing services. health. changes in the needs of the community and changes in methods of service delivery. including. walking and cycling. public transport and by mobility aids such as scooters. in the plan period.Therefore the loss of such land/buildings will need to be justified. Exceptions will only be allowed where there is special need for the facility to be located elsewhere. The policies seek to ensure that as these changes occur the principles of support for town/local centres. dentists. education and community facilities to maximise accessibility by public transport.5). COMMUNITY NEEDS. education.can be easily accessed by all the Borough’s residents. youth and religious facilities and public open space in accordance with Policy SC2.educational. Reason 1. exist to support and enable the community. community centres. including for people with disabilities. wheelchairs and buggies and their impact on disadvantaged groups/ areas of deprivation are taken into account. voluntary sector projects. physiotherapists and other medical practitioners must ensure that: (i) There is satisfactory access to public transport and adequate space exists for an appropriate level of car parking.21 C3 C4 (ii) There will be no detrimental effect on the environment. BENEFITS & SERVICES 33 . Major residential developments are defined as those incorporating over 25 units. In such locations these uses help to underpin the health of town centres and are well served by public transport. When considering major residential developments the Council will seek appropriate planning obligations. law and advice centres.20 It is important that a range of services. cultural and recreational. cycle.Alternatively it can form part of a wider strategy for the provision of a community service or if it can be demonstrated that the market has been unresponsive to the opportunity for a community use on the site. facilities for religious purposes and Council services with a high public use.

23 Although such uses provide a service to the community.Reason 1. (iv) The scale and intensity of use should be appropriate to the size of the building and should not adversely affect the character of the area. 34 COMMUNITY NEEDS. The following criteria should be met: (i) There is no detrimental effect on the amenities of neighbouring residents. Nursery Provision C5 The Council will support the provision and expansion of nursery facilities in the Borough where suitable sites can be identified and standards of accommodation are satisfied.24 Provision of nursery facilities is vital in the implementation of equal opportunities and access to employment. particularly due to noise and disturbance. (v) Adequate access by public transport and car parking space for Health and Education professionals must be provided and a limited amount of car parking for staff would be desirable with high quality landscaping to minimise the effects of off-street car parking. As part of the strategy to promote the expansion of nursery provision policy have been developed in an Advice Note (to be updated). this must be balanced against environmental considerations. Detailed guidelines for the development of surgery premises are set out in an Advice Note. BENEFITS & SERVICES . (vi) Adequate access by public transport and space for parents and guardians to drop off/pick up children. The Council is anxious that these are provided in locations and premises that are suitable for that use. (iii) The provision of internal and external usable space must satisfy the space standards guideline laid down by OFSTED. except in the case of nursery provision by the Local Education Authority where it must meet the Department for Education and Skills minimum space standards. Reason 1. (vii) A safe and secure internal and external environment for both children and staff must be provided. (ii) A proper sound insulation scheme is installed.

transport depots. and encourage the expansion of. These are complemented by a range of smaller commercial areas and premises that are more widely dispersed. builders yards. defined for the purposes of this Chapter as offices.1 The policies in this chapter are concerned with the locational aspects of employment uses. To resist the loss of employment land and premises that are in employment use. and specific guidance for other employment generators such as retail and leisure activities. recognized in both the Sustainable Communities Plan (ODPM 2003) and the London Plan as being one of two priority regeneration corridors in east London with the potential to accommodate a significant proportion of London’s projected population and employment growth. in particular Greenwich Peninsula (west).2 Background Greenwich forms part of the Thames Gateway. Consequently. and the needs of local businesses and industries. This chapter should be read in conjunction with relevant policies in the Town Centres chapter and the section on Mixed Use Areas in the Waterfront Chapter. 1987 and subsequent updates). To encourage training and the development of the skills of the Borough workforce. 172 hectares (net) of derelict. or that are well suited for continued employment use. SJ1 SJ2 SJ3 SJ4 SJ5 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 2. existing businesses. and ‘sui generis’ uses such as aggregates. and to ensure that the benefits of economic activity are shared by all sections of the community including those disadvantaged or facing discrimination in relation to the job market. which provide additional guidance for office uses. scrap and waste processing. To retain. JOBS & THE LOCAL ECONOMY GENERAL POLICY AND POLICY CONTEXT 2. MOT testing stations and wholesale/trade sales that exclude the visiting public. and by promoting efficient use of employment land and improvements to business infrastructure.2. and to redress the economic imbalance between east and west London. The collapse of the Borough’s traditional economic base between the 1960’s and the early 1990’s left a legacy of high and long-term unemployment and severe urban decay.4 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 35 . and by offices and small service industries primarily clustered around the Borough’s town centres. haulage yards. and to promote the provision of premises for small and growing firms. under-used or contaminated industrial land were released for other uses. The economic geography of Greenwich is dominated by substantial industrial areas in the north of the Borough. Charlton Riverside and West Thamesmead.The policies seek to address the long-term employment needs of the local population including the unemployed. between the early 1990’s and the end of 2004-05. wholesale warehousing and distribution (categories B1. industry and manufacturing. The general policies for employment uses and the local economy are: To expand and diversify the Borough’s economic base and employment opportunities by identifying good quality employment sites. principally through the Development Plan review 2. B2 and B8 of the Use Classes Order.3 2. To ensure that significant employment generators are accessible by public transport.

000 new dwellings and over 700.9 36 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . 182 hectares are identified as Strategic Employment Locations in the London Plan. hospitality and tourism and cultural and creative industries. small businesses typically have the greatest growth potential. After decades of contraction. There are 33 hectares of vacant industrial sites in the Borough. information and communication technology. From an earlier peak of 58. people with disabilities and long term health problems.000m2 (gross) of industrial and warehousing floorspace in the Borough. They are also more likely to experience difficulties moving into different types of employment in expanding sectors like business and financial services.5 As at the end of 2005-06 there are 241 hectares (net) of land in or last used for industry including warehousing and aggregates in Greenwich (224 ha. but have since rallied: total employment in the Borough stood at 62. The incidence of long-term unemployment (those registered unemployed for a year or more) has also fallen significantly. industrial. and 4% employ more than 100.000 jobs in 1991. Such groups tend to be less financially able to move to other areas where jobs suited to their existing skills may be available. which is being developed for industry and warehousing. 2. Flagship developments permitted on the Greenwich Peninsula. and this most vulnerable age group suffers an unemployment rate of 15. Almost half of the jobs filled by unemployed Greenwich residents have gone to people who live in the areas in Greenwich that suffer from the worst unemployment. suggesting that to date the Greenwich economy has been more stable but less dynamic than the London region as a whole. who remain concentrated in the Northern part of the Borough (although Middle Park. Over 70% of the current long-term unemployed are men. the Royal Arsenal and the White Hart Triangle alone propose to create in excess of 12. there has been a period of stabilisation and employment growth.600 in 1995.600 in 2003. Greenwich has historically suffered an unemployment rate at least 2% higher than the London average. 31% of the unemployed are aged between 16-24. Business formation and closure rates are lower than the London average. excluding land already re-allocated for other uses). inclusive of 21 hectares remaining on the White Hart Triangle. The Greenwich economy is dominated by small businesses: 85% employ less than 10 people. 2. young people. from 45% (about 7.4%.000m2 of new office.0% in September 2005. retail and leisure floorspace by 2021.200) in 2006.8% was recorded as vacant in the Greenwich Business Development Centre site marketing database. Mary’s. West and Ferrier Wards.9% in 1994 to 5.6 2. Parallel trends are reflected in other recent data. 6.000 jobs. job numbers fell to 52. remaining at around 6. total industrial employment has steadied.7% in 2006. However. but the gap had narrowed to 1.8 2.000) in 1994 to 19% (about 1. comprising three Defined Industrial Areas (Greenwich Peninsula West. However. Charlton Riverside and Plumstead/West Thamesmead).process. and Sherard Wards also have concentrations above Borough average). As at the end of 2005-06 there was approximately 853. Ferrier. Charlton Business Park and the Aggregates Zone. Economic trends Employment and business growth Following decades of persistent decline in the Borough’s employment base. unemployment rates still approach or exceed 10% in St. The decline in heavy industrial sectors disproportionately affected workers in semi and unskilled socio-economic groups.7 2. such as lone parents. Unemployment is also disproportionately suffered by other disadvantaged groups. Planning and Development There has been a significant upturn in development activity in northern wards and waterfront industrial areas in the late 1990’s. Unemployment in Greenwich has fallen from 21.

it is essential that training in the necessary work skills takes place.400m2.11 2. and a key mechanism in tackling social exclusion. and there has also been a substantial increase in industrial development activity over the previous Plan period (1994-2001). per annum. An estimated 25. ii.800 local people into employment. male unemployment still exceeds 14% in many wards. availability of a suitably skilled workforce is important both for local firms and to attract new businesses into the area.13 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 37 .000m2 gross only).2007. indicating an ongoing need to facilitate the provision of new opportunities for less skilled members of the workforce.growth. When set against the decline of preceding decades. Between 1997 and 2002 GLLaB helped 4. others are experiencing significant . A place where all residents will have the education.2. Training is also important to increase the employability of people to enable them to compete for jobs outside the Borough.This trend looks set to continue in the medium term. Similarly.7 ha. and helped local businesses win £3.This is indicative of the fact that ‘industry’ comprises a wide range of activities. construction phased to 2010 with the first units available in 2005-06). GLLaB’s service to local people includes the arrangement and procurement of identified training needs and efforts are underway to develop customised training programmes for local people so that they can access the jobs created through the major commercial developments in the Borough. an annual land take of 1. in terms of the need to train less-skilled groups to increase their access to jobs within and outside the Borough. Major new investment and development are creating unparalleled opportunities for Greenwich and East London. iii.000 new jobs will be created in Greenwich by 2010.8 ha. (Use Classes B1c. Greater London Authority and Council records for light industrial uses. as the London-wide labour market provides many job opportunities if training and transport factors allow the local labour force to compete for them. By contrast. Training The decline of traditional industries has important implications for the regeneration of the Borough as a whole. 1999-00 to 2004-05 annual industrial completions averaged 21. it also highlights the need to take a long-term view in managing the stock and availability of land for future employment use. or elsewhere in London.2 ha. 2. Despite the recent economic upturn. and whilst many are in decline in London or in the UK generally.The Greenwich Local Labour and Business Service (GLLaB) has been recognised by the Audit Commission as an exemplar of best practice in creating local employment. work and do business. An exciting thriving place to live.The strategy sets out the following Vision for Greenwich: i. If local people are to benefit from local job creation. In 2003 planning permission was granted for 106. manufacturing and distribution show that in the six years 1993-94 to 1998-99 annual industrial floorspace completions averaged 5. a four-fold increase.or localized .12 2. Economic Strategy and the Annual Economic Development Plan The Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich (2002) provides a framework for economic development from 2002 . Training is a gateway to accessing employment.10 Recent development trends underline the continuing importance of Greenwich in London’s industrial economy. B2 and B8. High quality developments are transforming vast areas of derelict land and creating business growth and new jobs.5 million worth of new contracts. skills and ability to get jobs in Greenwich. A first class business location.000m2 of industrial floorspace on the White Hart Triangle (25.200m2 and land take 4. developments exceeding 1. and thousands more across the Thames Gateway sub-region.

with European funding available for industrial renewal. physical and social transformation of waterfront areas blighted by the decline of heavy industry or port activity.000m2 of office and business space including a hotel. The development of major sites around Deptford Creek and the ongoing regeneration of the Woolwich Royal Arsenal will bring further opportunities and improvements Transport improvements Infrastructural investments have improved accessibility within and into the Borough. tourism and 2. Six of these wards have also been designated Objective 2 Area status.The Mayor’s 2001 Transport Strategy and the London Plan supports the Docklands Light Rail extension to Woolwich.19 38 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . committed and planned investment by the public and private sectors secured through successive regeneration programmes exceeds £2 billion. Mixed Use Areas Mixed Use Areas have been designated at Greenwich Peninsula. and will bring further opportunities for economic renewal and diversification. On Greenwich Peninsula the prospects for the long-term regeneration of the local economy received a massive boost when Meridian Delta Limited were granted outline planning permission for their proposals for 81 hectares to be phased over 20 years. An overall increase in business floorspace will be sought (see Waterfront Chapter Policy W3). Deptford Creekside (West Greenwich) and at Woolwich Royal Arsenal to facilitate the continuing economic. Potential Economic Growth Sectors: The Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich (2002) has identified a number of sectors with potential for growth. and for Borough residents to Greater and Central London. construction. opportunities and initiatives playing a key role in the transformation and modernisation of the local economy: Funding Initiatives Eight of the most deprived wards in the north of the Borough benefit from Assisted Area Status (as at 2003). infrastructural or workforce development.2.17 2. Cumulatively they enhance the Borough as a business location. Further transport investment is likely over the Plan period. Details include use of the Dome for a sports arena. Manufacturing companies seeking to expand or safeguard employment may be eligible for grants from the Department of Trade & Industry.16 2.010 new homes. The Riverside area east of Greenwich Peninsula also benefits from the award of £10 million funding between 2000 and 2007 under the Single Regeneration Budget to improve manufacturing opportunities.000 permanent jobs on site.The South Greenwich ‘Building New Links’ area also benefits from a further £22 million up to 2006. and open up new opportunities for residents.Their implementation is providing a wide range of new employment and training opportunities. Waterfront Transit and the provision of additional river crossings at Gallions Reach and Greenwich Peninsula (see Movement chapter).14 Economic opportunities and initiatives There are a range of significant events. In addition.These include health and social care. Major schemes completed include the Jubilee Line extension and station at North Greenwich. They contain many of the most significant waterfront redevelopment sites remaining in the Borough. manufacturing. The Borough is also likely to benefit from further funding and increased investment through the London Development Agency’s Single Programme and the ODPM’s Sustainable Communities Plan. Once completed it is estimated the development as permitted will provide over 23.18 2. housing.15 2. 400. representing a one-third increase in jobs located in the Borough. and the completion of the Woolwich Road Widening scheme. exhibition and leisure venue. 10. leisure and environmental improvements. the Docklands Light Railway extension to Greenwich.000m2 of retail and food and drink uses. plus over 50. employment.

The London Plan recognises the importance of industry. partially offset by a projected increase in warehousing employment. Other uses will not be permitted unless they are: i.hospitality. although office developments unless ancillary will be limited to locations with good public transport accessibility (see Policies J4. Slower but ongoing employment decline in industry in London is predicted. Mayoral advice on Industrial Capacity states that to 2016 approximately 30-50 hectares per annum of employment land across London should be released to other uses.16 and Policy W3). and seeks to ensure a sufficient ‘strategic reservoir’ of industrial capacity is retained to meet London’s future industrial requirements. Greenwich is a-typical of the East London sub-region as the amount of available vacant land remaining within the Defined Industrial Areas is relatively low. business and financial services and information and communication technologies.21 Employment Locations This section addresses the availability and suitability of sites for different types of business and industrial activities. a higher productivity than some service sectors. It is therefore 2.24 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 39 .4. This ‘managed release’ approach largely preceded. ‘Sui Generis’ uses that are industrial in character as defined in paragraph 2. Large tracts of the most persistently underused land have already been transferred to other uses.W3 & TC16).20 The Council working in partnership with others has been successful in securing investment and additional resources for the regeneration of the Borough.10).23 2. allowing industrial investment decisions to be made with confidence. subject to considerations under Policies J2. a requirement that takes on increased importance when set against pressures to release brownfield and riverside sites for housing. J7. particularly in the East London sub-region. ii. However.E3. 2. J10 and E1. Industry provides 7% of London’s jobs and 11% of its GDP.This is an essential aspect in safeguarding and enhancing the quality and range of employment opportunities in the Borough to address problems of social exclusion. sport and leisure. but is consistent with. PPG3 Housing and Mayoral recommendations that East London boroughs adopt a managed approach to the release of surplus and especially poorer industrial land.The policy gives industrial developers and local communities greater certainty about the types of development that will or will not be permitted in a given location.22 PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms states that Development Plans should ensure that there is sufficient land available to suit a variety of industrial and commercial requirements. Local service uses to predominantly serve businesses and employees within walking distance. which includes Greenwich. and B8 uses will be subject to the considerations in Policy J8.There is also significant local demand with new industrial/employment development on 57 hectares 1998-2003 including works in progress (see paragraph 2. Policies 2.The priority now is to capitalise on these new opportunities and maximise the benefits for local people and businesses.1. 2. Defined Industrial Areas J1 Defined Industrial Areas designated on the Proposals Map are particularly suited and safeguarded for activities within Use Classes B1. Reason 2. creative industries. principally by redesignation as Mixed Use Areas (see paragraphs 2. B2 and B8.

These include the award of £10 million under the Single Regeneration Budget to promote manufacturing in Greenwich and Bexley. Most of the Defined Industrial Areas are also Industrial Improvement Area under the Inner Urban Areas Act (1978). However.26 2. the Charlton Riverside Area. SELs include Preferred Industrial Locations (PILs). j5). These are historically industrial in nature. landscaping and cost requirements. Despite improvements. large-scale distribution and more sensitive surrounding land uses such as housing.29 40 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY .25 The London Plan outlines a locational framework of Strategic Employment Locations (SELs) of London-wide importance. Defined Industrial Areas have also traditionally accommodated a range of uses outside Group B of the Use Class Order (1987) that are essentially industrial in character and have similar locational requirements in terms of their impacts on surrounding activities. defined as medium to large-scale sites that should meet the needs of most industries in terms of their access. 2. Planned infrastructure proposals and the Borough’s enhanced profile are also likely to help. Proposals for such uses will be considered in relation to impact on the environment. and the extent to which existing or potential industrial occupiers in the vicinity might be adversely affected. layout.important that the remaining industrial sites. A number of factors increase the probability that industrial demand can be converted into new development over the Plan period.27 2. B1 office development is better located within town centres and other locations specified in Policy J7 (although it is not intended to prevent replacement of existing offices). is a barrier to inward investment and may hamper economic diversification. and the availability of grants or other assistance from the London Development Agency. Light industry can also usefully serve as a buffer between general industry. to serve as an amenity and service zone for the industrial area which encloses it. the Thames Barrier Approach offers scope for employment-based diversification including provision of ancillary local service facilities for both business and visitor markets. The policy allows flexibility between B1. Mayoral advice on Industrial Capacity is that managed industrial land release across London should take place outside SELs (see also Policy J5). 2. Residential use is not acceptable. B2 and B8 uses.The Council is working with the London Development Agency to improve the wider Charlton Riverside Industrial Area. These factors combined with relatively low vacancy rates (see paragraph 2. local environmental quality along Eastmoor Street is undermined by poor quality industrial buildings and ‘eyesore’ activities such as car dismantling.5) underpin the controlled policy approach resisting the ad hoc release of employments sites between Development Plan reviews. the Department of Trade and Industry and the European Union. and contain a range of industrial accommodation. whilst also supporting the Thames Barrier as a visitor attraction. and the Plumstead-Thamesmead Industrial Area are designated as PILs. it is essential that new uses support rather than fetter business occupants of the Defined Industrial Area that encloses the Thames Barrier.The lack of modern business units. Within the Borough 144 hectares (net) on Greenwich Peninsula west. are largely located away from environmentally sensitive areas. enabling the Council to apply its own resources where appropriate. and especially sites that are readily developable.28 2. Criterion (ii) and the site schedules provide further flexibility for business/ employment related diversification in specific locations. subject to more detailed policy guidance for office and B8 uses in the policies cited. as well as their relationship with other land uses. are made available to firms wishing to expand or locate in the Borough. particularly for small and medium-sized light industrial firms. All the Defined Industrial Areas benefit from Intermediate Assisted Area Status and those east of Greenwich Peninsula also benefit from Objective 2 Status. However. In particular. nor are destination retail or leisure activities (see Site Schedules j4. and form the basis of the Council’s Defined Industrial Areas. Redevelopment and diversification into compatible business uses will help to address these issues.

Site Schedule mu29 identifies an opportunity to reconfigure existing retail warehouse units to simultaneously meet a need for additional bulky goods floorspace and potentially to redress an imbalance in DIY provision identified in the Greenwich Retail Study (2002). temporary on-site processing facilities may also be acceptable on major development sites. It also accommodates retail warehouse units. The designation of a specific location with rail and river access is intended to minimise potential problems from aggregates or scrap operations in other parts of the Borough.The provision of an aggregate zone contributes to meeting the London wide need for aggregates. Charlton Business Park J3 Within Charlton Business Park the Council will permit development within Use Classes B1 (excluding non-ancillary offices) and B8. The zone also benefits from a railhead in current use. Open yard aggregates. It is a mixed business location and a preferred location for light industry. in accordance with the London Plan. The Council does not support any increase in retail floorspace in Charlton Business Park (nor the surrounding area) within the Plan period. Aggregate and scrap operations within the confines of a building will generally be treated as a B2 general industrial use. Reason 2. Subject to appropriate environmental and amenity safeguards. crushing and scrap uses. Redevelopment proposals that reconfigure existing retail units are also addressed in Policy TC16. unless in accordance with Policy TC16 (hybrid uses which combine wholesale use with retailing will be considered individually on merit against the most relevant parts of Polices TC16 and J8). and operations will not unacceptably compromise regeneration objectives or the amenity of adjoining areas.31 2. subject to the safeguarding of the Riverside Walk (Policy O16). Aggregate uses are likely to continue on three safeguarded wharves outside the defined zone: at Victoria Deep Water Terminal. 2. and/or on sites requiring frequent heavy truck access through residential streets. or an increase in retail floor space unless in accordance with Policy TC16. Problems typically arise on sites that are too close to residential areas or businesses that require a clean operating environment. Charlton Business Park contains a number of ‘first generation’ retail warehouses approaching the end of their useful life. crushing and scrap uses will normally be resisted elsewhere unless alternatives to road freight are utilised. In reconfigurations site access and servicing should be provided from Bugsby’s Way wherever possible. which will normally be acceptable in Defined Industrial Areas (see Policy J1).Aggregates and other ‘Open Yard’ Industries J2 The Aggregates Zone within the Charlton Riverside area shown on the Proposals Map is the Council’s preferred location for open yard aggregates. Riverside Wharf and at Brewery Wharf (see Policy W5 Safeguarded Wharves).33 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 41 .32 Charlton Business Park is within a Strategic Employment Location identified in the London Plan. Reason 2. while its wharf side location reduces road congestion and pollution by allowing aggregates to be moved as water freight.30 The availability of riverside wharves and the potential to develop greater commercial use of the Thames are important Borough assets. Such uses will also be acceptable on Safeguarded Wharves providing the significant majority of raw and part-processed materials are transported by river (see Policy W5).The Council will oppose any proposals leading to either a loss in land or premises in employment use. distributive and trade wholesale uses.

Reason 2. public transport. 2. Reason 2. and the maximum viable contribution to affordable housing will be sought. Employment use is only viable within a mixed-use scheme. Planning permission will be granted for an alternative employment use. providing proposals: i. The site is environmentally or physically unsuitable for any employment generating use. and can also offer employees convenient access to retail. This will help to safeguard locally accessible employment and services. Planning permission for non employment uses will be granted only if the site is vacant and evidence is submitted to clearly demonstrate at least one of the following: i. Offices can also stimulate demand for and investment in shopping and other town centre services. District and Local centres. leisure and other service facilities. and to protect cheaper ‘seedbed’ accommodation. services and jobs are close to residential areas. iii. Town centres are generally well served by public transport.36 There are a number of industrial and business sites of varying sizes dispersed throughout Greenwich. to the benefit of town centre vitality and viability. Eltham and Greenwich are preferred locations for office developments. Are conveniently related to.These centres and Greenwich are preferred locations for office development. iii. road safety or parking congestion.The Council’s objectives are to retain as many of these sites and businesses as is practicable.34 Woolwich and Eltham are the Borough’s main office locations. site schedules and other policies in the Plan. priority will be accorded to residential use wherever practicable.This is a sustainable pattern of economic development where business premises.35 Where development without employment use is justified. traffic levels. Employment Sites Outside Defined Employment Locations J5 The Council will seek to maximise the contribution to employment in the Borough from sites in existing or previous employment use outside designated employment areas. Guidance in PPS 6: Planning for Town Centres (2005) notes that in smaller town centres such development should be at a scale that is appropriate to the centre. by resisting premature change to higher value land uses (such as private housing). and Comply with approved planning briefs. Marketing on fair price and terms for at least 2 years indicates there is no realistic prospect of any form of employment use arising. ii. the environment. and the Council will seek to retain good quality office accommodation in these centres. nor the unacceptable loss of reasonable residential accommodation.Town Centres J4 Woolwich. which could help to lessen dependence on commuting to Central London (other suitable locations are identified in Policy J7). They are thus generally suitable for larger office developments. and existing office accommodation will be protected where office use is ongoing or likely. and to meet the requirements of PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms and the London Plan by ensuring the continued supply of 42 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . B1 development at an appropriate scale will be acceptable in all Major. and adequately served by. Other uses may be more appropriate for office sites in some circumstances – see Policy J5. ii. provided that it does not impact unacceptably on residential amenity. Do not result in the unacceptable loss of retail and leisure sites.

some are reaching the end of their economic life. Key local considerations are regeneration and job creation priorities in a relatively deprived Borough. It also seeks to ensure new premises are attractive to a broad range of industrial or commercial occupiers including technology and knowledge-based industries. For the purposes of this policy employment uses are as defined in Paragraph 2. The policy encourages new development. as recorded in either the Council’s Unitary Development Plan Annual Monitoring Report or the DCLG’s Commercial and Industrial Property Vacancy Statistics. In servicing new developments it should be ensured that they are connected to existing broadband infrastructure wherever possible. In either of these circumstances the marketing period will be halved if the supply of vacant premises in the Borough exceeds 10% of the total stock (excluding premises under construction). if this is demonstrably impractical. Connect premises to broadband information technology infrastructure (or. make provision for convenient connections to be made in the future). In the absence of any clear justification for employment land release other than apparent lack of demand.This meets the general policy thrust of PPG3 Housing and the London Plan (including Mayoral advice on Industrial Capacity) to make effective use of urban land and increase the supply of housing. ii. industry or business. 50% affordable housing will be sought. an established track record of managed and large scale release of surplus employment land through the Development Plan review process.38 iii. fair price. Section 106 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 43 .premises for start-ups and small firms that often cannot afford premises on purpose-built industrial estates. it must be demonstrated that an employment use is not forthcoming despite at least two years active site marketing on realistic terms (well advertised. Are designed and specified to enable convenient adaption to a range of business uses.This policy is not applicable to sites identified in the Site Schedule Proposals if the uses specified therein do not include employment. and large units can be readily subdivided. plus housing land allocations and planning permissions to meet and exceed strategic housing provision targets. and Address the need to provide business premises on flexible and affordable terms.37 Circumstances are identified in the policy where it will be more appropriate to redevelop former industrial and business sites for other uses. and are sufficiently flexible in design to be adaptable to changing business requirements. especially if the alternative uses proposed would significantly fetter or compromise the continuation of existing employment uses on adjoining sites. That said. In recognition of the potentially enhanced economics of provision for such developments engendered by the change of use. and to manage the supply of lower quality employment sites outside Strategic Employment Locations.39 The Borough’s industrial and business accommodation varies in age and quality. Up to five years marketing history will be needed for readily developable sites that form part of a wider area in predominately business use. Whilst older premises provide affordable workspace and generally remain in productive use. and.1. and occupier criteria). or for a mix of uses including employment-generating uses. subject to the considerations in Policy H14 and its Reasons. redevelopment or refurbishment to maintain an adequate stock and range of premises. Where sites are wholly released from employment use the priority alternative use is housing where it is suitable. and opportunities to upgrade servicing and telecommunications on surrounding sites are improved rather than reduced. Reason 2. 2. 2. the approach has been adapted to fit Greenwich circumstances. Industrial and Business Developments J6 The Council will seek to ensure that wherever possible industrial and business developments: i. lease length.

and Other sites allocated for employment use (see Site Schedules) or in current or former employment use (see Policy J5). iii. Mixed Use Areas (see Policy W3).contributions may be sought to improve IT infrastructure.40 The B1 use class encompasses offices. warehousing and trade wholesale activities (use class B8) will be permitted in Charlton Business Park and within Defined Industrial Areas. especially office uses. for example tenancy lengths and occupier terms. Reason 2. and providing speculative developments also offer opportunities for B1 and B2 uses including small businesses. will be considered where appropriate. which on average offers employment 2.42 The London Plan advises Boroughs to promote positive policies for distributive uses. B1 uses do not normally create significant environmental problems. Types of Employment Use B1 uses J7 Activities within Use Class B1 will normally be permitted in the locations below. can generate high levels of car traffic and road congestion. particularly where opportunities to transfer freight by rail and water are utilised (see also Policies W5 & M36-M39). Mechanisms to secure other forms of flexibility. Reason 2. v. Town Centres (see Policies J4 and TC16). iv. light industrial activities usually require access to a main road for heavy goods vehicles. meeting requirements set out in PPG13 Transport. These are also becoming increasingly important as businesses seek to retain the freedom to adapt to rapidly changing market conditions. research and development and light industry. In terms of transport implications. B8 Distributive Industries and Trade Wholesale uses J8 Distribution. further reducing congestion and road related pollution. providing they are appropriately scaled.41 44 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . and thus can often be incorporated into mixeduse schemes or within mainly residential areas. i. and are thus particularly suitable for office development (see Policy J4). Larger B1 developments.They can thus contribute to employment objectives without conflicting with existing activities. including identifying sites and assisting in making land available. ii. Distribution is an industrial sector with potential for employment growth across London over the Plan period. and the site is not allocated or safeguarded for another use elsewhere in the Plan. Office developments should be conveniently accessible by public transport. logisitics.Town centres are generally well served in this regard. providing proposals do not result in the closure of a viable and significant B1 or B2 use. Other environmentally acceptable locations with good trunk road access will be considered on merit. It advises sites within Preferred Industrial Locations can be suitable for B8 use. and therefore should be conveniently located for public transport. environmental and traffic impacts are within acceptable levels. Defined Industrial Areas (see Policy J1). Charlton Business Park (see Policy J3).This will ensure that the jobs created are accessible to people who do not have the use of a car whilst offering car users the opportunity to travel by public transport. providing development does not utilise land safeguarded in the Plan for other purposes.

The West Greenwich/Creekside area (straddling the borough boundary with Lewisham) is recognised to be an emerging node for cultural and creative industries.43 Use Class B8 also includes trade wholesalers and ‘trade counters’. Cultural and creative activities are the country’s fourth largest invisible earner. cultural and creative activities are based in London. Office-based activities will also be appropriate in any B1 location identified in Policy J7. The policy also identifies other suitable locations.To be acceptable on employment sites such proposals must be clearly distinguishable from A1 retailing by demonstration that a significant majority of their customers will be other businesses. The Cultural Strategy for Greenwich (2003) promotes the growth of these activities because they have the potential to play a key role in economic regeneration and expansion.4 million people nationally. and that sales to the general public would be minimal and ancillary. high-bay warehouses may cumulatively threaten existing businesses or constrain opportunities for other types of businesses seeking to relocate or expand. Reason 2. Uses which combine wholesale and retail use will be considered individually on merit against the most relevant parts of this policy and Policy TC16.45 Cultural and creative industries can be anything from a film and video production firm through to a small crafts workshop. which are generally convenient for public transport. a role promoted in the 2000 West Greenwich Development Framework. Whilst such activities generally fall within Class B1 of the Use Classes Order (1987) they can include a wide range of other land uses. It is also an important logistical complement to manufacturing and other commercial activities essential for the efficient operation of the London economy. as 80% of the nation’s artists. Where Defined Industrial Area sites not last or currently in B8 use are redeveloped to include B8 uses. to protect economic diversity. They are particularly important in the London context.44 2. Other sites will be considered against the relevant Plan policies for the use proposed. in recognition that West Greenwich/Creekside will not be appropriate or convenient for all cultural and creative industries. Developments to satisfy demand from the higher value distribution sector for large. planning conditions or legal agreements may be applied to ensure premises are also suitable and available for B1 and/or B2 use. This would not only widen the Borough’s economic base but would also increase the range of local job opportunities. employing more than 1. West Greenwich and Woolwich also offer a range of commercial floorspace. Conditions may be used where appropriate to ensure retailing to the public remains ancillary. Cultural and Creative Industries J9 Town Centres and Mixed Use Areas are preferred locations for Cultural and Creative industries. a theatre or the offices of a fashion designer. the most successful clusters tend to have access to a wider range of cultural resources including entertainment and leisure facilities. and workshop-based activities in any B1 or industrial location. meet the needs of small firms and provide a range of employment opportunities.This concentration of cultural activity in London provides the opportunity for the Borough to draw such activities into the area and to develop a cultural industrial base. while providing local people with access to cultural activities. In addition. 2. 2.46 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 45 . These are typically to be found in town centres.levels approaching that of manufacturing. The policy seeks to support this role as it is widely recognised that creative industries benefit from proximity to other creative industries.

will not be permitted where surrounding businesses or residential areas would be unacceptably affected. and to foster a healthy working environment.47 This section addresses the need to encourage the development of safe.49 Home working in part of a dwelling where it is incidental to the residential use is not normally ‘Development’ and thus would not require planning permission. planning permission should be required and may be refused. flexible and healthy working environments with high standards of layout. to the extent that it would demonstrably harm the amenity of nearby residents. and other environmentally acceptable sites not allocated for or occupied by an employment use as defined in paragraph 2. PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms recognises that where the business use becomes dominant or intrusive. Home workers are advised to seek a determination in writing as to whether or not a planning permission is required. ‘Bad Neighbour’ Industries J10 Proposals for ‘bad neighbour’ industries. Further guidance for Home workers on whether or not planning permission is required is set out in an Advice Note. Reason 2. which will be safeguarded from change to purely residential use. or where the activity proposed would fetter prospects for the occupation or redevelopment of underused industrial sites in the locality (see Policies E1 – E3). Work/live units must include at least 20m2 (net) of specifically designed business accommodation to standards suitable for B1 use. occupy not less than 25% of the total internal floor area.37).48 To ensure that new business contribute to rather than detract from the performance and prospects of the local economy.The Working Environment 2. Small scale processing or recycling of locally produced non-hazardous waste or to provide materials for use in the local area may be appropriate in environmentally acceptable locations (see Policy E14). in particular ‘open yard’ uses or activities generating significant emissions.50 Work/live units are a hybrid use incorporating both business and residential areas. It is a valuable source of employment for some Borough residents and is consistent in principle with the Council’s planning policies. traffic. vibration. Work/Live Units J12 Work/live units will normally be permitted in Mixed Use areas. noise. Business areas should comprise at least 20 m2 (net). Planning permission for change of use may be required if there is a significant intensification of business use. Home Working J11 Home working for business purposes will normally be supported.1. provided it does not cause a loss of housing accommodation or a loss of amenity to neighbouring occupiers. Providing these broad principles are adhered to. Reason 2. Reason 2. the use of equipment at home for business purposes can make a valuable contribution to sustainable development by reducing work-related travel. and 46 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . and the SELCHP facility meets Borough requirements for disposal of local non-hazardous waste (see paragraph 5. fumes or other impact significantly above levels that would be expected from residential use alone. and will be refused if the proposal would generate visitors. Significant provision has been made for large scale ‘bad neighbour’ uses in the defined Aggregates Zone (see Policy J2). However.

55 This section encompasses access to employment. Preventing the loss of JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 47 . Nor will they be permitted on other business/industrial sites except under conditions set out in Policy J5. and be constructed to commercial standards. waste and emissions. Work/live applications have also been used to attempt to circumvent restrictions on residential development in areas allocated for other uses.liveworknet. noise insulation and ventilation. work/live units will not be permitted in Defined Industrial Areas and Charlton Business Park. training for groups at a disadvantage in the labour market.com). is a Council objective. In line with PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms. In granting consent for work/live units. to prevent the premature loss of land for dedicated industrial and business use.53 2. Reason 2. the provision of affordable units for rent will be sought in developments exceeding 15 units or 0. and community benefits from development. The provision of rental work/live units. In effect. and residents should reasonably expect some amenity loss through business-related disturbance. Conditions may be applied to mitigate or avoid potential problems on surrounding residential areas that might arise from hours of operation.56 The historic decline in manufacturing and industry in general has resulted in a mismatch between job opportunities and local skills. to avoid the introduction of residential uses that may be incompatible with and fetter industrial operations. Quality Jobs J13 The Council will resist development proposals that result in the loss without qualitatively adequate replacement of jobs suited to the needs and skills of local people. traditionally employed in the industrial sector need to be both protected and promoted. the Council’s experience with work/live units suggests occupiers often perceive them as living space and may seek permission for purely residential use. 2. Suitable jobs for both the skilled and unskilled. including a definition of ‘true live-work’ (www. Business rates will be applicable to the commercial floor area. and vehicular movements. which is contrary to their purpose and this policy. It is expected that they will include elements such as high speed information technology connections. supported by the Office of the Deputy Prime Minister and the Housing Corporation. provide further useful advice.The ‘Live Work Network’. and enforcement action may follow where appropriate.54 Employment Opportunities 2.52 2. However. so as to be capable of accommodating a range of B1 uses and a level of business-related disturbance that would not normally be acceptable in the use of a room for work purposes in a traditional home. in particular for the most disadvantaged groups in the Borough workforce. either self contained or as part of a flexible work/live ‘complex’. 2. conditions or legal agreements will be used to prevent future residential use of the business accommodation.must be clearly separable from the residential element (preferably on a separate floor). The Council wishes to safeguard and encourage the provision of suitable accommodation for startup enterprises.51 Work-live units are not considered well suited for family use. Accordingly as work/live units have a residential element. and will seek to encourage employment development which provides good quality jobs. use of machinery or hazardous materials. work/live units are considered to be an intermediate step between home working and use of a separate small business unit. to includes elements such as service lifts. and it is recognised that work/live units can offer an affordable and flexible alternative to small business units.5 hectare (the threshold for affordable housing Policy H14). and to ensure that occupiers of selfcontained units use both the residential and business floorspace.

60 48 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . to train local people and help them secure employment. and those on low incomes from the high cost and inadequacy of public transport.The provision 2. minority ethnic groups and people with disabilities. the Council will encourage employment development that assists these groups and others such as school leavers and the longer term unemployed. Training is also an important element in eradicating this skills mismatch (Policy J12). the Council will use planning agreements to secure community and workplace benefits as appropriate. and on the other to avoid the problems that often result from new developments. in accordance with Policy SC2. Reason 2. and to help those facing disadvantage in the labour market.61 Most developments normally provide benefits of one kind or another be they leisure facilities or job opportunities. advise local firms of contract opportunities arising from the Borough’s extensive redevelopment and regeneration projects. to provide opportunities for local job seekers. Access to competent local firms and suppliers can assist in attracting new companies to the area. People with disabilities suffer from access problems. Lacking transferable skills or the means to retrain. 2. in particular groups who are often disadvantaged in the job market such as women.57 Other groups of workers or potential workers are also disadvantaged when competing for work and/or suffer difficulties at work. and raise their capacity to secure contacts and successfully deliver them. First. For regeneration policies to be effective. which are sought on all major development proposals. contractors and local businesses. minority ethnic groups from discrimination. Reason 2. women from the lack of childcare facilities. for example the intensification of pressure on existing facilities such as childcare services. As a typically low income group they are less able to move to find suitable work.58 Greenwich Local Labour and Business (GLLaB) plays a central role in improving the attractiveness of the Borough as a business location to existing and incoming firms. Community Benefits J15 In appraising employment development schemes. and allow residents to compete for jobs in new and growing sectors of the local economy. they are less able to take advantage of new opportunities. training workshops and other training provision to develop the skills of the Borough's resident workforce. The resulting availability of a well-trained local workforce is important in attracting new businesses. and with the constant pace of technological change the need for training is on going.The unskilled are becoming increasingly disadvantaged in the labour market. but these do not necessarily meet the needs of their host communities. the local workforce must be suitably trained to take advantage of new opportunities.Training opportunities supported by GLLaB reduce the mismatch between available skills and skills required. It was established with two primary objectives. and in providing employment and subcontracting opportunities for local businesses and residents. GLLaB is in part financed by Section 106 developer contributions. It is the Council’s aim to maximize and channel the benefits of development towards the community on the one hand. Training and Business Support J14 The Council will support the establishment of training centres. to create new business opportunities for local companies.land in active employment use will help to safeguard such employment that might otherwise be lost. Whilst possessing few powers of direct intervention. Second.59 2. In new developments the Council will seek to negotiate commitments or commitments and contributions to Greenwich Local Labour and Business.

Ensuring that the buildings are accessible and equipped to meet their needs will open up the range of employment opportunities available to people with disabilities. the provision of workplace creches will help employers to encourage women to re enter the workforce. Employment opportunities are often unnecessarily restricted by the physical design of buildings. For example. which can make access or use difficult or impossible. Reason 2. See Policy D6.62 People with disabilities suffer higher levels of unemployment than the Borough average. should be designed to meet the needs of visitors and employees with disabilities unless demonstrably impractical. Accessibility J16 All employment developments. including refurbishment and conversions.of community facilities also benefits the developer. JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 49 . Other benefits may be sought under Policies J6 (premises and infrastructure) and J14 (training and business support).

50 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY .

This increase is expected to continue with an estimated 103. There are people with mental health requirements and people with learning needs who wish to live independently with support in the community.85 to 2. by providing a suitable range of dwellings by type.3.3 HOUSING 51 .The number of lone parent households is expected to rise upto 2016. There are about 12. There is a significant growth in single person households such that they comprised 32% of households in 2001. (GLA 2003 Demographic Projections Scenario 8. To retain and improve the existing housing stock. However the most recent projections assume this will remain stable upto 2016.The increase in these households accounts for between 70% and 80% of the increase in the total number of households.The increase is largely made up of an increase in single person households between the ages of 30 and 64 who increase as a proportion of single person households from 35% in 1991 to 55% in 2016.45 persons. HOUSING GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 3. 3.400 by 2016. To ensure the development of balanced and mixed communities and to meet the varying needs of households.The general policies are: To provide sufficient land to allow for the completion of at least 16. (Source: GLA 2000 Demographic Projections).2 Households Between 1991 and 2004 the number of households in the Borough increased from 86. especially those with special needs. The Council will facilitate the regeneration and renewal of South Greenwich to alleviate the physical and social isolation of the area and to enable the development of mixed communities and sustainable neighbourhoods. size and affordability. estimated to rise to 34% in 2011 and to 36% in 2016.000 people with disabilities in the Borough. To provide a high quality sustainable residential environment and to ensure that new housing is built to a high quality design. SH3 SH4 SH5 SH6 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 3. The scale of housing need in the Borough for affordable housing is such that the Council will seek to ensure that at least 35% of the dwellings provided between 1997 and 2016 are affordable to those on low and lower incomes. reflecting the major housing developments in Thamesmead and on the Waterfront coupled with the continued rise in smaller households.100 net additional dwellings between 1997 and 2016.1.200.1).200 households by 2011 and 105. SH1 SH2 The Council recognises the major role housing plays in shaping the social. In contrast the number of one person households of pensionable age declines slightly but as a proportion of one person households falls from 52% in 1991 to 33% in 2016. The nature of these households is also changing. economic and physical character of the Borough. From 1971 to 1991 average household size fell from 2. whose housing needs require particular attention.500 to 93.

8 52 HOUSING . Owner occupation increased over the same period. people with learning difficulties. Housing Stock Between 1991 and 2001 the number of dwellings in the Borough increased by about 7%. a lack of a usable amenity open space.690 additional dwellings mainly from large sites (11. This will increase the demand for affordable housing. The Greenwich Strategy aims to offer a range of homes that meet the lifestyle needs of all sections of our communities. small sites (870 units). occupying roughly 35% of all land. minority ethnic groups.025 dwellings per annum this is 27% above the capacity estimate.The latter figure is included in the London Plan as the additional housing provision figure for the Borough.800 units at the Gallions Reach Urban Village and over 1. Residential completions between 1997 and 2004 totalled 8.non self-contained accommodation (1. Housing conditions in the Borough. In the 1980s the private rented sector declined but increased in the 1990s. and young and single people. size and affordability. If ‘non conventional capacity’ . particularly in the older properties. The planning permissions include 10. At 2. At 1.100 dwellings (800 per annum). people with disabilities. e.4 Housing needs are becoming more varied as a result of the changes in household and population structure shown above and in Part One.Add these to existing unmet need and there are formidable issues to be tackled in the next decade. and noise and air pollution. Between 1997 and 2004 planning permission has been granted for 20. and it is anticipated it will be further exceeded as planning permissions are implemented.is taken into account this potential increases to 16. It must be aimed at meeting not only general housing need but also the specific housing needs of the population. Nearly one-third of the stock was built before 1919 and a further one-third was built between 1919 and 1939. accessible housing which can meet the needs of people with mobility difficulties.440).010 units on Greenwich Peninsula (in addition to those being provided at Greenwich Millennium Village).g. and to 10% by 2001. Over 70% of these dwellings had planning permission at the time of the study. while Housing Association / Registered Social Landlord stock expanded to around 5% in 1991.200 units) and a reduction in vacant dwellings (200 units) . older people.5 3. as a consequence of right to buys and stock transfers to housing associations. New housing must also meet the varying needs of individual households. Poor housing conditions are often accompanied by a poor residential environment.000 units in the Royal Arsenal.7 3. over 1. and for types of housing which provide support. within one community.256 units).198 units (net).713 dwellings (net). conversions (1. 3.120 units) and windfalls (1. The tenure of housing has changed with the 1970s with the proportion of public sector housing rising to 47% in 1981 followed by a decline to 38% in 1991 and to 29% in 2001. The London Housing Capacity Study (GLA 2000) carried out for 1997 to 2016 shows potential for 14. are of serious concern with one in ten dwellings in the private sector either in serious disrepair or unfit. Developments should provide housing of different types. This is recognised in PPG3 and Circular 6/98 which encourage local planning authorities to develop such communities.589 dwellings per annum this significantly exceeds the annual capacity estimate. Mixed and Balanced Communities It is important that the large scale of new housing in the plan period provides mixed and balanced communities.6 3. Significant improvements are needed to the Council housing stock to bring it up to a good standard of repair with modern facilities. making housing the largest user of land in the Borough.3. The aim should be that individuals / households are able to pass through all phases of life. both visually and physically. if they so wish.

and where people feel proud and able to contribute to the life of their local community’. (Affordable Homes for London. LRC. unachievable and not the role of the planning system.12 3.The survey went on to identify affordable housing needs arising from the need to reduce the backlog of households in unsuitable accommodation (2.287 households per annum).H. The affordable housing needs identified in the Housing Needs Survey – for both 5 and 10 years – exceeds the housing capacity identified in the Borough (800 per annum).109 units per annum. Within the Mayor’s 50% target. The London Plan states that targets in UDPs should be based on realistic assessments of need and supply. London Pride Partnership 1998 / The Impact of High Cost Housing in Greenwich.3. to be met at a rate of 475 households per annum over 5 years). This reflected that whilst entry level prices for home ownership range from £74.5). safe.The analysis concluded that in terms of types of affordable housing.13 The Council’s Housing Strategy (2002-2007) vision for housing is ‘In 2010 we want Greenwich to be a place where everyone is able to afford a decent home of his or her choice.377 households.000 for a one-bedroomed home to £154. It would be inappropriate. secure. The target includes affordable housing from all sources and not just those secured through planning obligations. minus the supply of affordable housing (2. 3.This will also apply to greenfield sites in the Kidbrooke Development Area (See Policy H4 and reason) and the change of use of employment sites outside defined employment locations (See Policy J5 and reason).1 (see para 3.10 3.699 per annum. he proposes a split of 70% social rented and 30% intermediate housing.11 3.The Report of the Mayor’s Housing Commission 2000). taking into account strategic housing need and the strategic housing target set out in the London Plan. to seek 100% affordable housing. It is recognised that where the economics of housing provision permit. Lack of affordable housing has damaging consequences for both the Londonwide and local economy and local communities.346 units per annum. The London Plan sets out a strategic target that 50% of all additional dwellings should be affordable. from newly forming households (3.The Study also shows that over 10 years the annual requirement for affordable housing is 1.400 for a four bedroom property and minimum private rents were from £470 to £933 per month. By this is meant: Decent good quality homes: well designed and maintained. Over the 5 years to 2007 there is therefore a need to provide an additional 6. for example on readily developable windfall sites. warm and dry. the Council considers a 35% target justified.9 Housing Need and Affordability The Council’s Housing Needs Survey (2002) found that a significant proportion of households in the Borough could not afford to buy or rent on the open market. the priority need is for socially rented housing with a small element of shared ownership and that low cost market housing does not meet any housing need. Affordable homes: a range of housing options that are within people’s ability to pay. healthy. 1989. totalling 11. and part of a good quality urban environment.730 affordable dwellings. average earned household income was only £19.158 households per annum). It is anticipated that the capacity estimates will be exceeded but not at a sufficient scale to satisfy the affordable housing needs.This target is reasonably practicable given the Council’s extensive and successful experience of negotiating for affordable housing which contributes to strategic and Borough needs and is supported by the Three Dragons / Nottingham Trent University report ‘Affordable Housing in London’. HOUSING 53 . where a different approach to the levels of affordable housing is justified. Borough housing need and the fact that housing supply is on target to significantly exceed the dwelling provision figure in Policy S. This gives a net affordable housing requirement over the next 5 years of 1.090 additional affordable dwellings by 2011. In these circumstances. It recognises that such targets should be sensitive to the economic and social circumstances of different parts of London. 50% affordable housing will be sought subject to Policy H14.

5. size and tenure across the Borough. the re-use of previously developed land will be promoted to the extent that 90% of new dwellings will be provided on such land. In the development of sites sustainable residential quality principles will be applied consistent with the location of the sites to public transport. the rate of planning permission for new dwellings is on target to significantly exceed that figure and the rate of planning completions is anticipated to exceed it as planning permissions are implemented. (Policies H7 .H10). The two most significant areas are the continuing development of Thamesmead (Policy W4) and the residential part of the mixed-use development of the Greenwich Peninsula (Policy W3).100 dwellings between 1997 and 2016. New community services should accompany major residential developments. including the change of use of existing buildings. To enable the development of the allocated land the Council will grant planning permissions (the Schedules state where planning permissions have been granted already) and will use its powers and influence to overcome infrastructure problems constraining development. The Borough has set a target that over 90% dwellings are provided on previously developed land. Small-scale ancillary and supporting commercial uses may also be appropriate. 54 HOUSING . and where the residential use of the site would not conflict with other policies and proposals of the Plan. or because a suitable housing option is not available. Reason 3. As set out in paragraph 3. Developments of 15 units or more should provide a significant proportion of affordable housing (H14). Homes for all: an inclusive community from which no one is excluded because of discrimination. whether public or private.14 Quantity Of Housing Policies The two key areas of policy are to: • Provide new homes • Prevent the loss of existing homes and housing land New Housing H1 Residential development. The London Plan recommends a minimum provision of 16. Well managed homes: within a clean.Appropriate homes: a balance of the right type. for all types of households. including sites allocated on the Proposals Map and in the Site Schedules. Policies 3. Brownfield sites have been prioritised such that they comprise the vast majority of sites and significantly exceed the 60% target in PPG3.15 The increasing number of households and existing housing need combine to produce a requirement for additional dwellings in the Borough. car parking provision and the character of the area. diverse and well maintained environment. In the interests of achieving sustainable development. (Policy C3). will be acceptable on environmentally suitable sites.

In particular. as the need for housing remains. The Council’s Empty Homes Strategy sets out a coordinated approach to this issue. Change of use to another form of residential accommodation consistent with Policy H21 (Supported Housing). particularly in the redevelopment of large estates. iii. Where a reasonable standard of accommodation cannot be attained in the larger town centres in accordance with Policy TC21. Where residential land or buildings are redeveloped the Council will normally insist that existing residential floorspace and units be replaced.16 It is important to safeguard the existing residential stock. ii. that a net loss of housing may occur as a result of an improved residential environment being created. However it is also recognised. Effective Use Of Dwellings H3 The Council will seek to make good use of residential buildings and will particularly examine ways to encourage and assist empty residential accommodation back into housing use. The major problem is primarily with vacant properties in the private sector. The policy also sets out exceptions for changes of use to other forms of residential accommodation.Preventing The Loss Of Housing H2 Planning permission will not be granted for a change of use or redevelopment that would result in the net loss of residential accommodation except in the following circumstances: i. iv.17 The effective use of existing residential buildings will not only enable a better use of resources but will assist in meeting the housing requirements of the Borough. Reason 3. empty residential properties should be brought back into housing use. Where it is not possible to achieve the required quality of provision through redevelopment without a net loss of dwellings. Change of use to local community services in accordance with the criteria in Policies C4 and C5. notwithstanding the application of sustainable residential quality principles. HOUSING 55 . and to reduce the need to find replacement housing land. Change of use to guesthouses and bed and breakfast accommodation in accordance with the criteria in Policy T2. v. Reason 3.

regeneration area.900 homes on the Ferrier Estate Development of 4. vi. particularly to the north of the Borough • Development of new community.400 dwellings which will include the replacement of 1. integrated with the surrounding area. 3. as defined on the Proposals Map. (3) Transforming housing and local infrastructure.18 In 1999 the Council and its partners were successful in a Single Regeneration Bid for the South Greenwich Area. Kidbrooke is recognised as an Area of Intensification in the London Plan.900 affordable homes. Reason 3. workers and visitors. (2) Raising the level of safety. On these sites it is considered the economics of housing provision will allow for a target of 50% 56 HOUSING . Provision of a total of 4.400 new homes. Creating quality open spaces. iv. including 1. 50% affordable housing will be sought. The aim is to create a mixed neighbourhood. Development proposals will be expected to take account of the proposed masterplan which is to be the basis of a supplementary planning document. which provides a quality and sustainable environment for its residents. It is vital that all developments contribute in an integrated way to the regeneration of this area. ‘Building New Links’. On greenfield sites in the development area identified for housing development. commercial and retail facilities as part of a new local centre around a transport hub. iii. v. ii.Therefore development proposals which seek to anticipate the masterplan and where they will be detrimental to the coherent regeneration of the area will be resisted. The proposals provide for the: • • • • • • Demolition of 1.20 The masterplan will be progressed as the Kidbrooke Development Area Supplementary Planning Document.Kidbrooke Development Area H4 The Kidbrooke Development Area. Creating a mixed neighbourhood and community integrated with the surrounding area providing a sustainable environment.900 affordable homes Development of a more traditional street pattern providing a safer environment Creation of a new central park and better access to open space Increased access to employment and training opportunities Improvements to the road network and transport infrastructure. residential led. 3. The redevelopment and regeneration of this area will be required to deliver the following objectives: i. Any proposals which would be detrimental to the implementation of any aspect of the masterplan will be resisted. Providing a local shopping centre which acts as a commercial hub for the area.The reconfiguration of open spaces has led to proposals for the development of a limited number of greenfield sites. in recognition of the economics of housing provision.19 A key part of the third theme has been a land use reassessment of the land around Kidbrooke station including the Ferrier Estate.The bid has three strategic themes: (1) Tackling social exclusion and promoting opportunity. A masterplan that assumes redevelopment of the Kidbrooke Development Area has been prepared and has been subject to extensive consultation with both residents and landowners. An improved transport interchange and public transport to and from the area. is designated as a mixeduse.

car parking). Dwellings intended for families are provided on the ground floor or have direct access to a garden. and sound insulation and ventilation treatment against road and railway noise is installed on noise sensitive facades. impact of noise.400 sqft (130 sqm) (net floor area) where they form part of a terrace. the nature of accommodation provided. the sub division of residential property will not be permitted where there are any of the following circumstances: i. The Council has more detailed guidelines for standards of conversions in Advice Note No. vi.They can assist in balancing the type and size of dwellings to population needs. Car parking in the surrounding grounds meets the car parking standards and is dealt with sensitively (Policy M23). The sub division of residential property will be permitted if the following criteria are fulfilled: i. iii. ii. The policy is tighter for terraced properties in recognition of the need to retain medium sized terraced properties for family accommodation in areas of conversion pressure and the greater difficulty of providing an acceptable standard of conversion (e.22 HOUSING 57 . The character and appearance of the surrounding area and buildings is adversely affected. in all appropriate cases. iii. meet internal space and design standards and provide a suitable mix of dwellings.g. Each unit of accommodation is self contained. H6 The original premises are less than 1.16. viii. (Policies H7 and H16). On street parking problems aggravate the safety and free flow of traffic and pedestrians in the area (see Policy M27). vii. There is adequate space for and access to dustbins which. All conversions will be expected to be self contained. 3. Any extensions or additions are limited to an appropriate size and meet with the design Policies (D9 and D10). safe and secure access to all dwellings is provided. the existing stock of small and medium size family dwellings still have a vital and versatile role to play in meeting housing need and should be protected. particularly small households. Adequate. Changes of use to non self-contained accommodation are covered under Policy H. the impact on the environment and the character of the area.affordable housing to be pursued and this will be taken into account in applying Policy H14 in the Kidbrooke Development Area. Special consideration should be given to the division of the garden areas with the aim that all units have access to garden spaces. Reason for H5 and H6 3. For each application received reference will be made to existing conversions in each street.48 sqm) (net floor area) excluding any garages or less than 1. should be in suitably located and designed enclosures.200 sqft (111. Sound insulation is installed to alleviate the problems of noise both between the new residential units and between them and neighbouring dwellings. However. Internal space and design standards are acceptable. 3. v. Conversions H5 To protect small and medium sized family dwellings and the local environment. ii.21 A further way of providing more new homes will be to allow the sub division of dwellings. iv.

iii. 58 HOUSING . Housing Design H7 New residential development. redevelopment or conversions will be expected to achieve a high quality of housing design and environment. • focus on the quality of places and living environments being created and give priority to the needs of pedestrians rather than the movement and parking vehicles.3. Privacy of adjoining occupiers. traffic speeds and promote safer environments for pedestrians. ix. vii. Aspect and orientation. crime prevention and community safety considerations. car parking (Policies D5. In considering proposals the Council will take into account the key relationships between the character of the area. ii. site location and public transport accessibility. layout and in developments vulnerable to transportation noise and vibration. Achieve a high quality of housing design and environment. and • promote the energy efficiency of new housing were possible. (Policy E3). xi. (Policy E15) Developments over 25 units should be accompanied by a Design Statement (Policy D2). • avoid inflexible planning standards and reduce road widths.23 Quality Of Housing Policies The Council’s policies aim to: i. ii. have their own distinct identity but respect and enhance local character. Dwelling mix is consistent with Policy H15. It expects developments to: • create places and spaces for people which are attractive. M26 and M28) and housing densities (Policies H8 and H9) and give particular regard to: i. Safety and security of residents and public (see Policy D7). The achievement of the Building Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ excellent rating. An acceptable level of noise insulation being achieved by means of sensitive design. viii. The provision of new housing to Lifetime Homes standards.24 A key objective of PPG3 ‘Housing’ (2000) is to promote good design in new housing developments to create a high quality living environment where people will choose to live. x. vi. which addresses a wide variety of environmental issues (Policy D1) The design of the development is consistent with Policies D1 D3. • promote designs and layouts which are safe and take account of public health. iv. Landscaping the environment around the dwellings. Waste recycling. Reason 3. Secure the improvement of sub standard housing and improve residential environments. (Policy H17). Dwellings intended for families should normally have direct access to a private garden (see H11). v.

developers are encouraged to attain the excellent standard. iii. A post-construction validation report will be required by planning condition.bre.27 HOUSING 59 . protection against transportation noise and/or vibration and where appropriate other noise.250 HRH (60. The policies recognise that densities should be higher at places with good public transport accessibility. New housing development should incorporate in design and layout. on sites of high public transport accessibility. Subject to Policies H7 and H8. Residential developments on the Greenwich Peninsula and the Gallions Ecopark in Thamesmead are already being built to such a standard.26 The density policies seek to secure a sustainable use of housing land consistent with achieving a high quality environment. e. H9 iv The above ranges will be applied to mixed residential developments in proportion to category. This approach is consistent with the guidance contained in PPG3 and the London Plan which emphasise making the best sustainable use of land and achieving higher densities at places with good public transport accessibility. the Council will permit development at the following densities: i.182 HRA) for non-family dwellings on sites in the Borough’s Major and District Centres (See Table TC1) or with immediate access to a network of good public transport facilities.3. Extensions to residential properties are considered under Design Policies D9 and D10. single people. older people and families. car parking standards and the character of the surrounding area. Further details are available at www. The Building Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ rating is a flexible and independently verified environmental assessment method. Densities which will be considered appropriate are set out in Policy H9. 200 . M26 and M8) and housing densities (Policies H8 and H9) to create sustainable residential environments is acknowledged.To achieve sustainable development. All new housing developments should both provide a high quality of design and contribute positively to these surroundings. A distinction is made between different household types. to preserve the amenity of future residents. are suburban in character and have lower levels of public transport accessibility. Density H8 When considering proposals for housing developments the Council will give priority to securing a high quality environment for residents and making the best sustainable use of land.100 HRA) for dwellings for families. particularly in the south.g. where it can be demonstrated that the design is of exceptional quality. 150. Over 450 HRH (182 HRA) for non-family dwellings will be accepted in exceptional circumstances.300 HRH (70 . car parking standards (Policies D5.co. ii. with environmental performance expressed on a scale of pass to excellent. Larger developments because of their extent and impact are expected to be accompanied by a Design Statement which show how the proposals take into account urban design principles.The close interrelationship of these with the location of sites (Policy H1). principally the Borough town centres and in those areas of the Waterfront well linked 3. (Policy E3). to the individual characteristics of the site and the character of the surrounding area. Within that context the appropriate density on a site is based on the relationship between the location of the site. The policy sets out the factors the Council will take into account to ensure these are achieved.120 HRA) for non-family dwellings. as is demonstrated by the work on Sustainable Residential Quality commissioned by the former LPAC.25 The Borough has a number of contrasting residential environments. Reason for H8 and H9 3. public transport accessibility.450 HRH (80.uk/ecohomes. public transport accessibility. In applying this policy it is recognised that many areas of the Borough. 170. having regard to the location of the site.

habitable rooms include all separate living rooms. However. There is no unreasonable increase in noise and disturbance from traffic gaining access. The net residential area. In the Borough’s tight urban fabric the opportunities for an acceptable form of this development are increasingly limited as the number of available sites decreases. The character of the area is maintained with particular regard to the scale. for sites with high public transport accessibility. ii. There is no significant loss of wildlife habitats. 3. In addition. it is important to safeguard the interests of residents in surrounding houses by ensuring that residential amenity such as garden space. In contrast.The score for each site will need to be assessed on an individual basis. m. Sites with good public transport accessibility would have a PTAL of 4. the sensitive nature of these sites requires development only to be allowed where it will not adversely affect the local environment and where it will not lead to over development. halls and lobbies. For mixed-use schemes the calculation should be made by applying the same proportion of residential floorspace to total floorspace of the scheme to the site area of the scheme. There is no unreasonable loss of privacy from overlooking adjoining houses and/or their back gardens. Developments in the latter category will be expected to assess what these additional pressures are and demonstrate how they are to be met and / or mitigated. iii. privacy and the character of the area is maintained. where densities outside the ranges indicated may be justifiable. (See Policy C3) For the purpose of density calculation. especially for those in houses with the shared use of a garden. An example of such a site is the exceptional and unique circumstances on the northern Greenwich Peninsula. car parking standards should be lower enabling a higher density development where this would not exacerbate on street parking problems in areas of the Borough where such car parking is at capacity.28 Higher densities can play a role in sustaining local services and transport. including bedrooms. Such schemes must demonstrate exemplary urban design. (as defined in PPG3 Annex C). and sites of high public transport accessibility would have a PTAL of 5 or 6 (See Policy M13). particularly trees or shrubs which would adversely affect the appearance and character of the area.The Policy recognises that there may be exceptional circumstances. a lower density may be appropriate. but excluding bathrooms. iv. 60 HOUSING . it is also recognised that to preserve the residential character of some Conservation Areas. is of a significant scale and intensity.into public transport. v. landings. design and density of the development. should be used for density calculations. Kitchens will be counted as habitable where they have an overall floor area greater than 13 sq. 3. For sites with good / high public transport accessibility.29 Reason 3. either on its own or cumulatively.30 The pressure for land for new housing in the Borough means that infill and backland sites are increasingly considered for housing development. a key factor in assessing public transport accessibility will be ‘Public Transport Accessibility Level’ (PTAL). For the purposes of the policy. toilets. There is no unreasonable reduction in the amount of amenity space enjoyed by existing residents. They can also impose additional pressures on such services particularly where development. Backland and Infill Development H10 Residential development on backland and infill sites will only be favourably considered where all the following criteria are fulfilled: i.

0. Reason 3.2 . Each incorporates features designed to encourage use within an appropriate age group.5 – 2 a) per 1000 population.32 3. As a guide.37 HOUSING 61 .0. In areas where amenity provision is poor. and neighbourhood equipped area for play (NEAP). NPFA propose three types of play areas: local areas for play (LAP). Walking time is an important factor determining whether a play area will be used by a particular age group: very young children do not walk far. Play areas should be 3. in developments adjacent to public open space or on conversion schemes where site constraints may affect the ability to provide the desired level of amenity space. including proximity to main roads. suitably equipped and well designed children’s play areas should be provided. local equipped area for play (LEAP). The National Playing Fields Association (NPFA) recommends minimum standards for children’s outdoor play space of between 0. standards above the minimum will be needed.Amenity Space and Gardens H11 In new residential schemes and conversions developers will be expected to provide sufficient amenity space to meet the needs of residents. Sizes and layouts of gardens should take into account the character of the local area. though important function.8 ha (1.0.4 . sitting out. All children benefit from having access to safe. NEAPs can be incorporated in a park or area of open space. which gardens do not. Provision should cater for a range of ages: the size and type of facility taking into account existing provision and the population profile of families nearby. waterways and other potential hazards. Gardens have an important role to play in encouraging biodiversity and generally raising the environmental quality of an area.33 3. In flats a terrace. to put into place mechanisms and initial funding for future management and maintenance of communal amenity space. Dwellings with direct access to private gardens are the most appropriate form of provision for families with children. communal play space.3 ha for outdoor equipped playgrounds for children of all ages and 0. Design and siting of play areas should take into account accessibility. exercise and social contact. railways.This provides opportunities for recreation.This is in addition to any space occupied by front gardens.5 ha for casual or informal play space within housing areas.6 .34 3. a large development may require several LAPs. Reason 3. a minimum garden area of 50m2 in family housing should be provided. clothes drying and DIY are among the various activities for which a garden or some form of private outdoor space is essential. There may be scope for a lower level of private amenity in some locations. Family housing should normally have direct access to a private garden. less than a minutes walk away. New developments and conversions should aim to secure some usable private amenity space for all households. The Council will seek an agreement with developers in accordance with Policy SC2. children’s play. NPFA Standards apply regardless of whether people have access to good-sized gardens or not. Play space should be distinguished from open space. safety. and visibility. Children’s Play Areas H12 In residential developments that include over 50 units of family housing. Play areas offer opportunities for social development for adults and children.36 3. privacy and security.31 Gardening. a separate requirement dealt with elsewhere (Policy O9).This includes 0. which serves a different. for example.35 Children make up around 20% of the Borough’s population. good-sized balcony or enclosed communal gardens (not accessible to the general public) should be provided.

to put into place mechanisms and initial funding for future maintenance.This has and continues to be integrated with improvements taking place as part of wider regeneration programmes. in providing for special housing needs. 3. a programme of improvement is needed that recognises that disrepair is not only concentrated in some areas but is more widespread throughout the Borough.41 62 HOUSING . including special housing needs. in particular Plumstead. supported housing. other planning objectives and the scale of need for affordable housing as set out in Policy SH5. In response. Affordable Housing H14 Housing and mixed-use developments with 15 or more units or residential sites of 0. housing for minority ethnic groups.40 There is concern over the growing deterioration in the housing stock.42 The Council supports the contribution to housing variety that can be made by Registered Social Landlords and others which allocate dwellings on the basis of housing need.5 hectare or more are expected to provide a significant element of affordable dwellings on site. Sustainable development emphasises the renewal and continued use of such properties. particularly those which seek to meet the needs of disadvantaged groups. Reason 3. distribution and type of affordable housing will be determined by the particular circumstances and characteristics of the site and the development. Where the children’s play area is principally of benefit to the occupiers of the development itself. 2. Housing Improvement H13 The Council will encourage the improvement or refurbishment of the housing stock in areas where it is particularly needed along with upgrading the overall environment. Where area based initiatives are pursued they should be linked to environmental improvements (see Policy D32).38 In some locations. e. The Council’s Housing Strategy Statement sets out the targeted programme and resources needed for renewal of both Council stock and other property in the Borough. particularly the smaller specialist housing associations. It recognises the key role they play. 3. Provide a well-integrated mix of decent homes of different types and tenures to support a range of household sizes. a financial contribution towards enhancing existing. Further guidance can be found in The Six Acre Standard: Minimum Standards for Outdoor Playing Space published by The National Playing Fields Association (2001). the Council will seek to make legal agreements with developers in accordance with Policy SC2. 3. Variety Of Housing Policies To ensure a sufficient variety of housing is available for the different types of households and to provide mixed and balanced communities.39 3. the Council may accept the provision of a play area in a nearby area of public open space rather than within the development itself.The precise percentage. the Council’s policies will be to: 1. The Private Sector Improvement Areas In Greenwich’ report (LRC 1995) identifies such areas.g. ages and incomes. nearby provision may be acceptable. where more beneficial to the local community. the economics of housing provision. housing for single people. See also Policy H2 on the redevelopment of housing.located so as to minimise conflict and allow for a level of informal supervision. Provide appropriate forms of housing for people with special needs. Alternatively.

The site thresholds for affordable housing are consistent with the Housing Needs Survey and the guidance in the proposed changes to PPG3 published in July 2003.44 3. 50% affordable housing will be sought (See also para 3. but the proportion will relate to the need to achieve mixed and balanced communities. Where. The agreement will include an Affordable Housing Marketing Plan which will include the following objectives: a) in respect of intermediate units with Social Housing Grant priority is to be given initially in equal proportions to households in the following income bands: i. However the Housing Needs Survey concluded that shared ownership. In this context intermediate housing should form a component of the affordable housing. sub-market renting etc also forms part of the affordable housing. whilst conversely in other areas it will be lower.000 . the proportion will be 30%. developers are encouraged to involve a registered social landlord to own and/or manage the affordable housing. Circular 6/98 suggests that affordable housing encompasses both low-cost market and subsidised housing that will be available to people who cannot afford to rent or buy houses generally available on the open market. Circular 6/98 and the London Plan recognise that the precise proportion of affordable housing to be achieved is subject to negotiation on individual schemes taking into account the factors set out in the policy. In the Borough most people who do not yet have their own separate dwelling cannot afford to buy or rent at market prices a dwelling suited to their needs (see para 3. To secure the affordable housing effectively in the long term. for example on readily developable windfall sites.9).£30. and the Housing Needs Survey confirms. Lack of affordable housing has damaging consequences for the local economy and the local community.The affordable housing that is provided should be distributed across the site to help create mixed communities. 3. The London Plan recognises. In some instances. where the economics of housing provision permit.000. households with a gross income of between £18. The thresholds also apply to mixed use schemes including residential use where the 15 unit threshold is met. a registered social landlord is not involved the Council will use conditions and / or legal obligations as appropriate to secure the future occupancy for people in housing need.Therefore in areas with a large extent of social housing. with the greatest need being for social rented housing. In practice this is social rented housing and intermediate housing.12 and Policies H4 and J5). The policy. The provision of intermediate housing (including key worker housing) through shared ownership initiatives. (which is a key element of intermediate housing). Both PPG3 and Circular 6/98 state that it is for local authorities to define what is considered to be affordable based on local assessments.The Council therefore intends that at least 35% of all new homes should be affordable to meet the needs of people who cannot afford to rent or buy at market price. This will be confirmed through the use of appropriate conditions and/or legal agreements.46 3. it is proposed that the affordable housing.000. exceptionally. will only help a small number of households. that in the Borough low cost market housing does not meet any housing need.45 3.Reason 3. be provided as 70% social rented and 30% intermediate housing. ii. To accord with the London Plan.001 . households with a gross income of between £25. The intermediate housing will be secured through a legal agreement.£25.47 HOUSING 63 . Therefore for the purpose of this policy affordable housing is defined as housing to meet the needs of households whose incomes are not sufficient to allow them to access appropriate housing in the local housing market.43 PPG3 ‘Housing’ and Circular 6/98 ‘Planning and Affordable Housing’ recognise that the need for affordable housing is a material planning consideration to be taken into account in formulating development plan policies and in determining planning applications.

The Greenwich Council Housing Needs Survey (2002) identified that of the total housing need between 2002 and 2007. e. provided that the proportion of disposable income required to fund the purchase is no greater than 40% b) in respect of intermediate units without Social Housing Grant and in respect of affordable housing discount for sale units. There remains a need to provide for households with children. Firstly.The mix on each site will vary according to the location of the development and the character of the surrounding area. Smaller dwellings can also be provided by conversions. as far as is practicable.g. Housing Mix H15 A mix of housing types and sizes will be expected in all developments including conversions. play areas and amenities. particularly on developments over 25 dwellings.iii. priority is to be given to households where gross income is up to £40. Only in the following exceptional criteria will off site provision or financial contributions be acceptable.49 PPG3 ‘Housing’ recognises that planning policies should be used to secure an appropriate mix of dwelling size and type in new developments and conversions to meet the changing composition of households in the area.001 -£36. town centres. 5% of the units provided should be three bedrooms and 20% four or more bedrooms. Secondly.This will encourage the development of mixed and balanced communities. Rather the most satisfactory solution is for all new developments to have a proportion of small units and a mixture of dwellings for different household sizes. Factors such as schemes for special needs groups or where there is a poor external environment will affect the mix.000. should be of a good overall floorspace.48 There is a presumption in favour of the on site provision of affordable housing where it is viable to do so. should have a higher intensity of development which may lead to a greater proportion of flats. be related to the adequate provision of accessible nursery and primary schools. The mix will also be influenced by the location of development. Reason 3. Small units are defined for the purpose of this policy as one bedroom units and two bedroom units which include at least one single bedroom. 3.50 64 HOUSING . such as where affordable housing is already concentrated and where further affordable housing would not contribute to mixed and balanced communities. including family houses or ground floor flats with direct access to private gardens. 3. Areas of good public transport accessibility. including studio flats. It is recognised in particular that there is an increasing number of small households in the Borough but this does not justify new developments being overwhelmed by smaller dwellings. where the site / building configuration or layout makes the provision impractical. it would be desirable for developments to include a mix where 35% of the total residential floorspace is allocated to units containing three or more bedrooms. where it would contribute to the provision of mixed and balanced communities. households with a gross income of between £30. Any financial contribution will be reserved for the provision of affordable housing elsewhere in the Borough and secured through a legal agreement. The application of the financial figures above will be subject to RPI indexation through the plan period (February 2004 base). To create balanced and mixed communities including homes suitable for family use. Both large and small units should be included and dwellings for families should have direct access to a garden. Schemes with predominantly family housing should. Small units.000 provided that the proportion of disposable income required to fund the purchase is no greater than 50%. local shops.

H16

Conversions and new residential developments which provide non self contained or bedsitter accommodation for non-family use will only be considered where they are of a satisfactory internal layout, are registered with the Council's HMO Registration Scheme and meet or are capable of meeting its standards, except where; i In terms of conversion, the original dwelling house is less than 1,200 sqft (111.48 sqm) (net floor area) excluding any garages or less than 1,400 sqft (130 sqm) (net floor area) where they form part of a terrace; or The proposal will lead to an over concentration of non self contained or bedsitter accommodation which is considered detrimental to the character of an area; The arrangements for car parking are inadequate.

ii iii

Reason 3.51 The Council wish to set standards for the provision of shared home accommodation. It is important to have control over such forms of residential development yet, at the same time, help towards promoting the provision of a wide range of housing options. Conversion of non self contained units and bedsitting rooms (HMOs) does not increase the number of units available and may decrease it. It is important to retain a variety of accommodation for local needs and rented non self contained shared accommodation and bedsits provide a source of affordable housing for young people and for others who are “non priority” homeless. However, HMOs should not lead to the loss of small and medium sized family dwellings for which there is a continuing demand and they should provide a satisfactory and safe standard of accommodation. Registration with the Council’s scheme as operated by the Environmental Health Department achieves this. It is accepted that HMOs will have fewer car owning households but some level of provision is needed. Lifetime Homes H17 New housing should be built to Lifetime Homes standards. Conversions should aim to incorporate as many of the standards as practicable. Lifetime Home include the following access requirements: i. ii. iii. iv. v. Level or gently sloping approach and flush thresholds. Entrances illuminated.The main entrance should be covered. Distance from the car-parking space to the home to be kept to a minimum. Where car-parking is adjacent to the home, it should be capable of being enlarged to a width of 3.3 metres. Where homes are reached via a lift, this should be wheelchair accessible.

3.52

Reason 3.53 Lifetime Homes are ordinary homes designed to accommodate the changing needs of occupants throughout their lives. They incorporate 16 standards as set out in the Joseph Rowntree report Designing Lifetime Homes. Reduced versions of these standards are required under Part M of the Building Regulations. Because of their flexibility Lifetime Homes can meet a wider range of needs than other types of housing. Lifetime Homes are not ‘special needs’ housing: they offer greater convenience to everyone. At the same time, they enable people to stay in their homes if they become less mobile; enable people with disabilities to visit friends or relatives more easily; and expand people with disabilities’

3.54

HOUSING

65

housing options, whose choice is currently limited. An estimated 32% of households contain a member with a limiting long-term illness (2001 Census). Lifetime Homes also respond to other groups housing needs more effectively, in particular, families with young children. Add to this the increasing number of older people - as more of us are living longer - there is a need to ensure a corresponding increase in the amount of housing accessible to the community as a whole. 3.55 Lifetime Homes because of their adaptability do not require structural alterations to be made should adaptations be needed later on; and because accessibility is built in from the start, these are less likely to be needed in the first place. By making better use of limited resources, Lifetime Homes can contribute towards the aim of sustainable development. In addition to standards indicated above Lifetime Homes comprise: 1. Width of doorways and hallways in accordance with Access Committee for England standards 2. Space for turning for wheelchair users in kitchens, dining areas and sitting rooms; adequate circulation space elsewhere 3. Sitting room / family room at entrance level 4. Ground floor bed space 5. Wheelchair accessible downstairs toilet, with drainage and service provision to enable a shower to be fitted 6. Walls in bathrooms and toilets capable of taking adaptations, such as handrails 7. Provision for a future stairlift and space for through floor house lift 8. Bath / bedroom ceiling strong or capable of being made strong enough to take a hoist 9. Bathroom layout designed to incorporate ease of access 10. Living room window glazing to begin at 800mm or lower and windows to be easy to open/operate 11. Switches, sockets and service controls at a convenient height, between 600mm and 1200mm from the floor 3.56 Lifetime Homes are a way of enhancing the quality, safety and accessibility of housing at little or no extra cost.Viewed over time, they are highly cost-effective. As the standards become more widely adopted, costs will fall. On some steep sites it may not be possible to achieve all the standards, such as level thresholds.

66

HOUSING

Sheltered Housing H18 When considering proposals for sheltered housing for older people, the Council will have regard to the following criteria: i. Sheltered developments should normally be located in residential areas not more than 200 metres from a local parade of shops having all of the services set out in Policy TC19 and be within easy walking distance of local amenities such as public transport and community facilities; Such developments should have good vehicular access for residents, ambulances, health care professionals and visitors and should make provision for car parking at the Borough's standard of 1 space per 3 dwellings; Such developments should comply with residential density policies; There should generally be a minimum of 20 dwellings and a maximum of 40 in each development with a resident warden. In smaller schemes without a resident warden adequacy of services provided will be taken into account; A high quality of landscaping and sufficient amenity space is provided.

ii.

iii. iv.

v.

Reason 3.57 The provision of sheltered housing to meet the specific needs of older people is recognised. Recent years have seen an expansion in the range of such accommodation. However, provision should be well distributed to give older people the opportunity to be housed in their own local area. It is important that in the development of schemes, policy criteria are met so that schemes are appropriately located, designed and equipped. Wheelchair Standard Housing H19 In residential developments of 25 or more units at suitable sites and locations, the Council will seek to negotiate 10% of dwellings to be built to full wheelchair standard. In the case of private housing, the requirement may be provided as units capable of adaptation to full wheelchair standard without further structural alterations. Reason 3.58 PPS1 states that Development Plan policies should address accessibility (both in terms of location and physical access) for all members of the community. As PPG3 makes clear ‘developers should already be considering whether the internal design of housing, and access to it, can meet the needs of people with disabilities, whether as residents or visitors.’ Access arrangements are in part covered under Part M of the Building Regulations and the need for wheelchair housing should decline as more of the general housing stock becomes accessible. However, there will still be some need for Wheelchair Standard housing. In addition to the Lifetime Homes Standards described above, its main feature is the larger space standards and wider doors which enable greater ease of access for wheelchair users. People with disabilities’ housing options are currently restricted because the majority of the housing stock is not accessible.There is, therefore, a need to increase provision and extend choice across a whole range of housing types, sizes and tenures. A mix of units should be provided within the proportion indicated above, preferably distributed across the site as a whole, rather than grouped together; though siting should take into consideration ease of access. Suitable locations include those where the site is level and surrounding area relatively flat, with public transport, shops and a range of community facilities close by.

3.59

HOUSING

67

3.60

Because of the additional cost in providing the more generous than average space standards required, it is appropriate that wheelchair housing is provided in larger schemes. In practice, it is likely that most Wheelchair Standard Housing will be provided as affordable housing. The Greenwich Wheelchair Site Brief (2002) gives further guidance. Planning policies for residential extensions may be relaxed to enable a person with a disability to continue living in their own home. Reason

H20

3.61

A person may become disabled but not wish to undergo the disruption of moving house. Where possible the Council wishes to enable them to adapt their present home.The Council would wish to exercise reasonable discretion in allowing an extension, for instance a ground floor bathroom and bedroom, to be added to a dwelling for the use of a person with a disability. (See Policies D9 & D10) Supported Housing

H21

Proposals for residential care homes, hostels, cluster flats, refuges and other supported accommodation required by the local community will be given sympathetic consideration. In taking a decision the Council will have regard to all the following considerations: i. ii. Location in residential areas with good access to essential services, including public transport and shops. Impact upon the local environment and the character of the area, taking into account intensity and scale of use and whether the development would lead to an overconcentration of provision in the area. Extensions to existing properties should be consistent with Policies D9 and D10. Satisfactory vehicular access. Provision of adequate private amenity space for clients. Compliance with relevant car parking standards.

iii. iv. v. vi.

vii. An identified local need. viii. The size of the unit and the standard and suitability of the provision for the client group. ix. The particular locational needs of the client group.

Reason 3.62 Some people, for a part or exceptionally for all their lives, need supported housing or residential care. Such accommodation needs to be provided if the appropriate range is to be on offer. Groups who may need such provision at some time include: the very young, older people, single people living in large lodging houses, or through time spent in long stay hospitals for people with learning disabilities or those recovering from mental health problems, people with long term illnesses including AIDS and HIV, women escaping violence, lone parents, people with disabilities, young lesbians and gay men forced to leave home, young people leaving care and homeless people. Nationally, in response to these needs, small hostels, including cluster flats and supported flats, are beginning to be part of the range of accommodation provided, replacing institutions, long stay hospitals, the large traditional lodging houses and resettlement units. In spite of the possible apprehension of local residents, small hostels and shared houses are essentially needed as part of the drive to provide care in the community. In order to maximise full integration in the community it is essential that wherever possible the accommodation should be distributed throughout the

3.63

68

HOUSING

Borough, avoiding a concentration of schemes and preferably sited in residential areas. Overconcentration of any one type of provision can have a detrimental impact on an area, in terms of additional noise, visual intrusion and traffic generation and place additional stress on already overburdened services. It is not compatible with the aim of achieving socially mixed communities and may undermine any systems of informal support between vulnerable and less vulnerable members of the community that emerge. Smaller scale schemes are more likely to fit in with existing residential communities. Whether or not a particular scheme will lead to over-concentration will be determined by taking into account the number, scale and type of provision and levels of need, for the type of scheme proposed, that exist in the immediate area. Proposals should also respect the privacy of special needs groups and enhance the opportunities for full integration.There should be good access to family, when appropriate, and essential services including shops and transport. Proposals which result in the loss of supported housing will take into account the continued local need for such housing. 3.64 In providing this accommodation measures must be taken to ensure that adequate space, privacy, amenity and design standards for special needs groups are maintained. In particular some exclusive provision needs to be made for women who may be reluctant to use mixed facilities. Generally proposals should adhere to the Housing Corporation’s DoE approved “Design and Contract” criteria, and for residential care homes the 1984 Registered Homes Act, the associated regulations and the Greenwich Standards and Practice Guidance for Residential Care Homes (1993). Travellers and Romany People H22 The Council will seek to retain existing provision for travellers and romany people.Any proposal for a new site should include provision for basic amenities and services and will be assessed against the following criteria: i. ii. iii. iv. v. The local need for the provision. The suitability of the site for the proposed uses. Highway considerations. Access to local shops, services and facilities. Compatibility with other polices of the Plan particularly in terms of environmental amenity and the need to retain open spaces.

Reason 3.65 The London Plan and Circular 1/94 ‘Gypsy Sites and Planning’ advise that development plans should include policies and criteria for dealing with gypsy site provision. The Borough already has a dedicated permanent site for travellers at Thistlebrook which provides 40 pitches. The policy sets out the criteria by which the development of future permanent or temporary sites will be assessed.

HOUSING

69

70 HOUSING .

improve and enhance the character of existing public and private open space (Green Belt. iii. ii. especially in areas of public open space deficiency. Identifying and conserving sites of nature conservation importance and. employment opportunities and improving the quality of life. improved and made fuller use of. is one of the Borough’s major resources and needs to be protected. ii.They can therefore play an important role in sustaining and improving the amenity of residential districts. Metropolitan Open Land. Golf courses. including rivers and lakes. viii. biodiversity and open space features throughout the urban environment. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 4.2 The Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy recognises the important role that the Borough’s open spaces play in a sustainable community. woodlands and orchards. Community Open Space. vi. OPEN SPACES GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 4.4. Public and private open space. if its potential is to be realised. but as an integral part to our lives. Open space.’ The OPEN SPACES 71 .‘the environment should not be seen as an addition or as separate. Cemeteries and associated crematoria. Improving the environmental quality of open spaces. iv. Allotments. SO2 Maintaining and increasing suitable recreational facilities. Large grounds attached to educational facilities and institutions.The needs of disadvantaged communities and groups with special requirements will be given emphasis.’ The Strategy notes that through protecting and enhancing wildlife habitats and green spaces. iv. Nature conservation. residents and workers have adequate access to open space and the riverside. Agriculture. sportsgrounds and playing fields.The general policies are: To adopt a positive approach to the use and treatment of open space by: i. To ensure that all communities.1 Open spaces play a significant role in a civilised community contributing to a high quality environment. Open spaces of strategic importance (Metropolitan Open Land) will be maintained and their character safeguarded from built development and enhanced as appropriate. The only uses considered to be generally appropriate within MOL are: i. SO3 SO4 vii. small open spaces) that fulfil a specific function for the local and wider community and encourage full use of their facilities. the urban areas will be made more attractive and ‘livable. v. attracting new investment. iii. SO1 To safeguard. Open water features. Recognising the value of landscape.

ranging from local woodlands to large formal parks. Within the framework of these competing land uses the Council recognises that not all the Borough’s residents have adequate access to open space. and cultural and entertainment facilities which range from historical buildings. • promote social inclusion.The Green Chain stretches through the four South East London Boroughs of Bexley. It is important that the level of open space in the Borough is maintained.3 Open space constitutes almost a quarter of the Borough’s total land area. These open spaces provide a range of functions including recreational.Greenwich Strategy aims to promote the Borough’s and open spaces and the River Thames for recreation while protecting and enhancing the natural habitats they offer.The Council’s ‘Taking Leisure Forward’ (1998). As a result the immobile. Open space in the Borough is subject to pressures. leisure facilities. seeks to support initiatives of sporting excellence. community cohesion. which help to achieve a more balanced distribution of open space in the Borough. the Council will capitalise upon the roles that open space can play in the fulfillment of this Plan’s vision. open air theatres.7 72 OPEN SPACES . PPG17 ‘Sport. Bromley. which require specialist facilities such as football and cricket pitches. Sporting and general leisure activities have the potential to provide facilities for physical activity and hence to promote both physical and mental good health. Greenwich and Lewisham. Protecting Open Space To safeguard and improve existing public and private open land from built development. ranging from walking and sitting to informal play. the Green Chain and other open space designations. 4. 4. This approach is reflected in the division of the chapter into three broad themes. currently being updated as the ‘Fit for Sport’ Sport Strategy 2004-2008. younger and older people and parents with young children do not always have convenient access to recreational open space. ecological.5 4. and • support an urban renaissance and a rural renewal. by making our towns and cities more attractive places in which people will choose to live. amenity and structural breaks in the overall urban environment. eastern and southern parts of the Borough forming part of an area of Metropolitan Open Land known as the ‘Green Chain’. Open Space and Recreation’ (2002) states that the Government’s main planning objectives for sport and recreation are to: • promote more sustainable patterns of development by creating and maintaining networks of recreational facilities and open spaces. through Metropolitan Open Land. health and well-being by ensuring that everyone has easy access to good quality sport and recreation facilities and open space. providing opportunities for recreation in the countryside and regenerating the economies of rural areas.6 4. General leisure activities. new road and public transport developments. The Greenwich Strategy aims to promote and foster Greenwich as a centre of cultural excellence where sports and leisure facilities and activities are among the best in London. There are seven miles of Thames and Thameside. particularly within our urban areas. museums. for example development pressure for housing. There is a major swathe of open spaces stretching through the central. There are sites of historical and ecological importance. Despite the relatively large amount of open space in the Borough some areas are deficient in public open space. Open Space and Leisure Open space plays an essential role in providing the necessary facilities for the pursuit of a wide range of leisure and educational activities. These can be divided into three broad categories: Sporting activities.4 4. whilst recognising that new open spaces are being provided as part of the developments of Thamesmead and the Greenwich Peninsula. In order to realise the full potential of open space opportunities within the Borough. historical. whilst encouraging a positive approach to the use of open space. sites of sculpture and visual imagery to refreshment facilities.

massing. The proposal should not be visually intrusive and should have minimal impact upon the open nature of the area. In broad terms open spaces form a key part of the urban landscape. The design. c. Policies Protecting Open Space Metropolitan Open Land O1 In areas defined on the Proposals Map as Metropolitan Open Land: i. The proposal shall not result in a significant increase in vehicular traffic to the site and any provision for parking shall not dominate or fragment the site.8 Open Space and The Environment Open space plays an important role in protecting and enhancing the environment and fulfilling the Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy. Londonwide the Mayor published a Biodiversity Strategy in 2002. to those on adjoining sites and to the character of the surrounding open land. to a non ancillary use will not normally be permitted. OPEN SPACES 73 . which is in a use ancillary to that of the surrounding open space. The use of such a building for indoor sport or leisure use. iii. The proposal shall not result in an overall reduction of the provision of playing fields or sports pitches and associated facilities in the Borough. Small open areas. The proposal should not have unacceptable adverse effects on neighbouring residential areas and should not result in an unacceptable level of noise or other disturbance. d. The use of land for the open land uses stated in Policy SO4 will normally be permitted unless the use would result in an adverse change to the character of the open land. The proposal must not result in the enlargement or creation of an area of public open space deficiency (see Policy O9). smell and touch). which in turn exercises a profound influence on the Borough’s social and economic conditions. e. combined with an outdoor use. private gardens and wildlife features permeate and enrich the whole urban environment and such elements need to be considered during the development process and conserved. The proposal should not be within a defined site of nature conservation importance (see Policy O18) nor prejudice the ecological or amenity significance of the area. (See Policy D8). siting and landscaping of the proposal should relate sensitively to other buildings on the site. f. ii. making a contrast with built development through sensory perceptions (Sight. identify those of particular importance and set out a programme for their protection and enhancement. Small scale built development which has a primary function for a purpose ancillary and essential to an appropriate use as stated in Policy SO4 may be permitted provided that the following criteria are met: a. may be permitted subject to landscaping and the criteria above. scale. b.4. Proposals for a change of use of an existing building. Existing trees of significance should be protected and replacement trees provided. The Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan will provide an audit of existing species and habitats. sound. All proposals shall be landscaped and introduce diversity to the wildlife interest of the site. They also provide opportunities for nature development and conservation as well as the resources for educational play and studies.

vii. the Council intends to safeguard open land of metropolitan importance from built development and maintain their structural contribution in providing a visual break in the built up areas of London. The proposal shall not result in a significant increase in vehicular traffic to the site and any provision for parking shall not dominate or fragment the site. whether land or water. vi. Proposals for redevelopment.10 4. The proposal should not have any adverse effects on neighbouring residential areas and should not result in an unacceptable level of noise or other disturbance. Whilst there is a presumption against built development it is accepted that some limited built development. v. The proposal must not result in the enlargement or creation of an area of public open space deficiency (see Policy O9). serving both the local and wider communities of South East London and is already used/has potential for outdoor recreation.This open space. iii. MOL provides breaks in the built up area. iv. The proposal shall not result in an overall reduction of the provision of playing fields or sports pitches and associated facilities in the Borough. scale. siting and landscaping of the proposal should relate sensitively to other buildings on the site. It is also recognised that not all open space uses identified in Policy SO4 are appropriate on all MOL sites. privately or publicly owned and accessible to the public or not. For example some open space uses would be detrimental to the landscape and/or historic nature of the site and as a result would have an adverse impact on the character and quality of the MOL.11 O2 ii. ancillary and essential to an appropriate use may be needed for the effective operation of such uses. The policy sets out criteria by which such proposals are to be assessed.These areas are also of significant strategic value for wildlife. Changes of use of buildings from an ancillary to a non ancillary use will be resisted although it is recognised that exceptions could be made for indoor sport or leisure uses combined with an outdoor use. 4. The design. extension or change of use of existing built development within Metropolitan Open Land whose primary function is not ancillary to the use of adjoining open land will be controlled according to the following criteria: i. is needed both for active sport and informal leisure. In accordance with the London Plan. 74 OPEN SPACES . massing. Any replacement buildings should not exceed the ground floor area or height of those existing on the site. The open land comprises a variety of public and private open spaces. The proposal should not be within a defined site of nature conservation importance (see Policy O18) nor prejudice the ecological or amenity significance of the area.Reason 4. recreation and for the intrinsic qualities of ‘openness’ and ‘greenness’. In MOL the London Plan advises that there is a presumption against inappropriate development including development which would be harmful to the open character of the land. recreational and nature conservation interest all of which benefit the people of part or all of London. to those on adjoining sites and to the character of the surrounding open land.9 The London Plan defines Metropolitan Open Land as land of predominantly open character which has more than a Borough significance. provides open air facilities and contains features or landscape of historic. generally because of its size and catchment area. The proposal should not be visually intrusive and should have minimal impact upon the open nature of the area.

further development or intensification of use of such buildings could conflict with the objectives of maintaining and enhancing the character of MOL. O4 OPEN SPACES 75 . colleges. would not have an unreasonable effect on the surrounding environment and amenity of adjoining residents.viii. Whilst it is recognised that some limited development may be warranted to enable the proper functioning of these buildings to continue.500 sqm of that additional floorspace. historically (1994) planning permission was granted by the Secretary of State for the Environment for a substantial extension of the campus by 14. This reflects the guidance on such sites in PPG2 ‘Green Belts’ Annex C. Reason 4. Reason 4. would be well served by a variety of means of transport other than the private car. are identified as Major Developed Sites (MDS) on the Proposals Map and in the Site Proposals Schedule. v. and O3 vii.13 The University of Greenwich has identified a need in the plan period for a further 21. At the Southwood Site planning permission has already been granted in 2003 for 6. would not lead to an increase in the height of the existing development or previously approved schemes. would not have an unacceptable effect on traffic flow or safety and includes adequate parking and access arrangements. or creating new access points into or between open land areas will be pursued. form part of a comprehensively planned development for each site. vi. both sites are identified as Major Developed Sites in MOL (Site schedules o4 and o5).900 sqm. leaving 13. and their boundaries take into account these space needs. halls of residence and large houses all set in large grounds but whose primary function is not ancillary to the use of the open land. The University of Greenwich Avery Hill Campus.700 sqm to be provided. such as schools.700 sqm of additional teaching and associated floorspace at their Avery Hill Campus. Mansion Site and Southwood Site. interpreted for a site in MOL. have no greater impact than existing or previously permitted development on the open character of MOL. (See Policy D8). their nature and prominent or sensitive location is such that any significant extension. abutting or otherwise having a visual relationship with Metropolitan Open Land where development could be detrimental to its visual amenity.12 In some places Metropolitan Open Land includes substantial amounts of built form. Proposals for expansion are to meet the following criteria: i. ii. The Council will give special consideration to development proposals on land fringing. hospitals. not exceed 21. Existing trees of significance should be protected and replacement trees provided.To reflect this position. At the Mansion Site. iii. character or use. iv. All proposals shall be landscaped and introduce diversity to the wildlife interest of the site.700 sqm (gross) of additional floorspace. Possibilities for opening up visual links and green corridors. There will be a presumption against extensions to existing buildings unless it can be demonstrated that any such development would be modest in scale and not be visually intrusive or have any adverse effect on the character of the surrounding Metropolitan Open Land.

which extend in a virtually continuous arc through the Boroughs of Bexley. Green Chain O5 Areas of Metropolitan Open Land forming part of the "Green Chain".14 Development. To promote an overall identity for the area in order to increase public awareness of available recreational facilities. with an emphasis on those serving a wide area of South East London and/or requiring open land. largely in recreational use. which is defined on the Proposals Map. vi. To safeguard the open land from built development and maintain its positive contribution in providing a visual and physical break in the built up area of London. In particular there are many residential properties with large gardens abutting the MOL boundary which the Council would wish to see retained as a buffer between built development and open land and ensure views to and from are protected. Green Belt O6 The small area of land comprising the grounds of Stonefields.15 MOL. Any proposals for this area must comply with the guidance contained in Planning Policy Guidance Note 2: Greenbelts (PPG2).16 This small area of open land forms part of a larger continuous area of Green Belt.Reason 4. Reason 4. ii. owners. The six objectives for the Green Chain are: i. etc. will be promoted as a regional and local outdoor recreational resource and visual amenity in conjunction with other parts of the Green Chain in South East London. in the area to achieve the above objectives. v. comprises a number of public and private open spaces. Greenwich. and proposals need to be assessed accordingly. To conserve and enhance the visual amenity and ecological aspects of the landscape. character and use of the open spaces. A Management Plan for the future of the Green Chain (2003-2008) was published in 2004. These objectives have been jointly adopted by the four Boroughs and are pursued by the Green Chain Joint Committee and the Officers Working Party. To improve public access to and through the area.The London Plan urges Boroughs to consider the valuable role of Green Chains and to consult with neighbouring planning authorities as appropriate. forming the Green Chain. To encourage the collaboration and co operation of the various public and private agencies. organisations. Lewisham and Bromley. which straddles the Borough’s boundary with Bromley. redevelopment or extensions on land adjoining or relating visually to Metropolitan Open Land could have an impact on the appearance. iii. clubs. 76 OPEN SPACES . Reason 4. To improve and encourage the provision of suitable recreational facilities. is defined as Green Belt land and should be retained as open space. New Eltham. iv.

providing space for recreation for residents. either through the creation of new open space to which the public have access or by enabling convenient access for all to existing open space.The development of major new residential communities in areas deficient in open space should include a minimum public open space provision to the standards set out in Table O1. younger and older people and parents with young children do not always have adequate access to open spaces for the purpose of recreation. The open spaces comprise a variety of uses including local parks. amenity open spaces and play areas not allocated for other uses. sportsgrounds. contrasting with the overall built environment. The uneven distribution of public open space in the Borough of Greenwich and surrounding Boroughs means that less mobile people. and they do not all have general public access. subject to the criteria set out in Policy O1. whether public or private (too small to be defined on the Proposals Map).19 The London Plan advises that UDP’s should identify areas of public open space deficiency and seek to reduce deficiencies in open space. are limited in size and extent.Table 3D. However many of the Borough’s parks and public open spaces contain derelict or under used buildings which could be used to provide better recreational facilities and act as a catalyst for the improvement of the surrounding open spaces.. local nature conservation or amenity function will be safeguarded from built development and Policy O7 will apply. Reason 4. allotments. New buildings and extensions to existing buildings will only be permitted where they are ancillary to the existing land use.Community Open Space O7 Public and private open space areas defined as Community Open Space on the Proposals Map will be safeguarded from built development.18 Small open spaces play an important role in providing breaks in the built up area.20 OPEN SPACES 77 . and need to be safeguarded equally from built development pressures. Other Open Spaces O8 Other small open spaces. Changes of use of existing buildings in ancillary use will be considered in the light of Policy O1. etc. preventing over development.17 The numerous public and private open spaces within the built up areas of the Borough not defined as Metropolitan Open Land provide important functions for the local and wider community.Where existing built development within parks and public open spaces becomes surplus to demand. which fulfil an environmental. Reason 4. playing fields. Reason 4. Sites where new provision or improvements to open space can be made are identified 4. Map 5 identifies these areas. Public Open Space Deficiency Areas O9 The Council will seek to increase the provision of public open space and improve public access in areas of open space deficiency identified on Map 5. assisting nature conservation. sensitively sited.1 of the London Plan sets out London’s open space hierarchy and provides a benchmark for public open space provision across London. . and are compatible with neighbouring development. the Council may allow the sites to be redeveloped for specialist sporting development (which combine the use of outdoor and indoor space). In every case they fulfil specific functions for the local or wider community and constitute welcome open breaks within the built up area. recreational. providing visual contrast and areas for play and sitting out.

78 OPEN SPACES . The determination of development proposals will be subject to a more detailed assessment.Map 5: Public Open Space Deficiency Areas © Crown copyright Local and District Park Deficiency Area District Park Deficiency Area Local Park Deficiency Area NB This is a diagrammatic representation of Open Space Deficiency in the Borough.

and.23 There will be a significant increase in the number of households and the number of homes in the Borough during the plan period and the additional demands that this will place on existing facilities needs to be recognised.22 TABLE O1:TYPES OF PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACES Open Space Categorisation Regional Parks Metropolitan Parks District Parks Local Parks and Open Spaces Small Open Spaces Source:Table 3D.The development will deliver a network of open spaces that provide a variety of experiences and cater for different user groups. 4.4km Community Benefits O10 The Council will seek to secure improvement and enhancement of existing parks and public open spaces.2-8 km 60 hectares 3. The Council’s overall approach to community benefits and planning obligations is set out in Policy SC2.1 London Plan (2004) Size Guideline and Distance from Home 400 hectares 3.2 km 20 hectares 1. A further 6ha of open space are to be provided within the new development at Tripcock Point. equivalent to the provision of a District Park. especially in areas of deprivation. where major development places increased demand on existing areas. These parks and public open spaces should be reasonably related in location to the development proposed and should be of direct benefit to the occupiers of the new development. In excess of 25ha of public open space have (Central and Southern Parks) and are to be provided on the Greenwich Peninsula. where appropriate.Thamesmead.The Council will seek a legal agreement with developers in accordance with Policy SC2.Tripcock Park will address the District Park deficiency in the Thamesmead area.4km Under 2 hectares Less than 0. Reason 4. A detailed appraisal will be carried out in all cases where open space deficiencies need to be improved. through planning obligations and conditions on planning permissions in line with Policy SC2. major developments may also increase use of existing parks and public open spaces.21 In smaller new residential developments the priority will be on the provision of small local parks within easy walking distance of users. It is considered necessary to improve and enhance existing nearby public open space to cope with increased demand. 4. Minor extensions and improved access points to existing small local parks and open spaces can help alleviate deficiency.within the Site Schedules for open space. the creation of new parks and public open spaces in line with Policies O9 and C3.24 OPEN SPACES 79 . Policy O9 requires proposals in areas deficient in public open space to include new public open space provision. to put 4.2km 2 hectares 0. Policy H12 deals with the provision of children’s play areas in new residential developments. However.

26 4. or for other open spaces it is not of particular recreational or amenity value.There is a strong case. Open Space and Leisure Sportsgrounds and Playing Fields O11 The Council will resist granting planning permission for any development which would lead to the loss or would prejudice the use of a playing field or land last used as a playing field except where: A i. (See Table O1) or It would combine the use of indoor and outdoor sports. People should have access to a range of high quality sports facilities. a playing pitch.25 Recreational facilities provided on private sportsgrounds and educational playing fields and within parks provide opportunities for team games and outdoor sports. The trend in most sports and recreational activities is towards an increase in participation. PPG17 ‘Sport. or The proposed development affects only land incapable of forming. and ii. which provides a background and framework for sport in London and an approach to achieving the vision for the future. therefore. or not forming part of. iv. In addition there is the difficulty and expense of significantly improving the provision for outdoor sports and recreation within the built up areas of London. vii. Open Space and Recreation’ (2002) states that playing fields should not be lost to development unless there is an established surplus of all forms of open space and that if playing fields are no longer required for their original purpose consideration should first be given to their use for other recreational and open space needs. not just for the Borough. or An alternative site or facility of at least an equivalent quantity and quality is provided in a suitable location. Reason 4.which identifies the importance of supporting 4. v. This is recognised in the Council’s ‘Fit for Sport’ Sport Strategy 2004-2008 . It would have minimal adverse impact on the open character of Metropolitan Open Land (in accordance with Policy O1). B iii. and The site is suplus to requirements of all other open space functions.27 80 OPEN SPACES . Reference should also be made to The Sporting Capital: Regional Recreation Strategy for London (London Sport 1994).into place mechanisms and initial funding for improvements and enhancements of existing parks and public open spaces. (See also Policies C3 and D4). or It would meet an identified need for an alternative open space use. against any erosion in the provision of existing outdoor sports provision in the Borough. The London Plan requires Boroughs to realise the value of open space and protect its many benefits including those associated with sport and recreation. vi. Sportsgrounds and educational playing fields in the Borough are also an important element in the overall regional provision for sports and recreation in London. providing a facility for sporting excellence which justifies the loss of land. An appraisal of current and future needs for playing fields has demonstrated that there is an excess of playing field provision and the site has no special significance to the interests of sport or for school playing field(s) it would not result in the loss of playing fields below Department for Education and Skills standards.

and should provide for sporting excellence as validated by the appropriate sporting authority. Facilities should be of a high standard of design and quality and respect local nature conservation interests. discussed within the Town Centres Chapter. For the former.The Council would like to realise the full potential of open space as a leisure resource. however. such as open air performance spaces. 4. Department for Education and Skills standards are also to be met. Park Facilities O12 The Council will seek to enhance open space by the provision and encouragement of appropriate park facilities (e. Many of these initiatives combine indoor and outdoor facilities. Open spaces can be visually enhanced and used to a greater and more varied extent through appropriate outdoor uses. but it is recognised that the availability of large town centre sites for such facilities is limited. seating. adversely affect wildlife and be visually intrusive by day. enables cultural and artistic expression. Outside such locations. cause unacceptable night time nuisance in residential areas. outdoor tennis courts. Floodlighting O13 The Council will permit the floodlighting of sports facilities where they do not cause unacceptable nuisance or visual intrusion. refreshment facilities. Such facilities should be safe to use and accessible to all.30 Many public open spaces contain few facilities. Indoor ACE facilities are encouraged in appropriate locations.The Council has published a Playing Fields and Allotments Study of the Borough. In some cases their hours of use may be restricted. D6 and D7). sports pitches and changing facilities and Arts. sculpture and visual imagery and areas for cultural exhibition and study) within suitable parks and public open spaces. In both cases the other criteria would also need to be met. 4.initiatives for sporting excellence in the Borough. Reason 4. (See also policies O1 and O7). Encouraging outdoor arts and cultural activities where they do not conflict with the appropriate uses of the open space for performance and exhibitions for example.g. Local Authorities are required to consult with Sport England where development proposals may affect a playing field or land used as a playing field in the last 5 years.The Study will be taken into account in the application of this policy. sites for sports facilities must take into account public transport accessibility. children’s play equipment. incorporating an appraisal of future need in 2004. making them less attractive places to visit. Their use can. Any such outdoor sports facilities should be combined with outdoor facilities. pitch and putt. (See Policy E5: Light Pollution). (See Policies D5. In both cases an excess of playing fields will need to be demonstrated – based on the methodology detailed in ‘Towards a level playing field: a guide to the production of playing pitch strategies’ (February 2003) before alternative proposals will be considered.31 The hours during which sports pitches can be used may be greatly increased by the use of floodlighting.28 The policy distinguishes between school playing fields and other playing fields.The Local Planning Authority is required to notify the Department for Communities and Local Government where they are minded to grant planning permission for the proposed development of a local authority owned playing field or used by an educational institution and Sport England have objected.29 OPEN SPACES 81 . benefiting the wider community. Reason 4. Culture and Entertainment facilities. Indoor sports facilities are subject to the sequential approach (See Policy TC16).

34 82 OPEN SPACES .000 people in the Borough (1997 mid year population estimate) compared with 0.13 hectares of allotment land per 1. The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) identifies the Green Chain Walk as one of six Strategic Walks in London. which runs through the Green Chain Open Spaces. The Study will be taken into account in the application of this policy. where they do not adversely affect nature conservation. will be encouraged on suitable sites. Development proposals for riverside sites will be required to incorporate provision for a riverside walkway along the river frontage or contribute to improvements where the existing footpath needs it. In these areas it is to be provided on the redevelopment of adjacent riverside sites.32 There is a continuing interest in allotment gardening and allotments constitute one of the more intensely used forms of recreational open land.The demand generally exceeds the supply of plots. In some areas it needs improvement. The precise route of the riverside path may vary according to the operational requirements of other river users. provision of information and publicising of suitable routes will encourage the use of open spaces and visits to places of interest.Amenity open space areas will be created at strategic locations en route and the possibility of creating open-air performance areas will be pursued with developers where appropriate. Reason for O15 and O16 4.The West Greenwich Development Framework recognises the opportunity to improve pedestrian linkages along and across the Creek.33 Walking is an important pursuit that combines both journeys of recreation and necessity for residents and visitors alike.000 nationally).The provision of additional allotments. The latter has benefited from the restored Ha’penny Hatch footbridge adjacent to the railway bridge. incorporating an appraisal of future need. and the identification. also forms part of the Capital Ring which is a 72 mile orbital path in London.There are only 0. Reason 4.Allotments O14 The loss or change of use of existing allotment sites will be resisted. Footpaths and associated areas should be safe to use and accessible to all.The Council will examine the potential to extend the riverside footpath along Deptford Creek. Allotment gardening is generally a localised activity with plotholders living within easy walking distance of their plots. particularly in the northern part of the Borough or where demand exceeds supply. In particular the ‘Green Chain Walk’ footpath network will be improved and extended and new links created wherever possible.The Thameside footpath now extends along most of the riverside apart from a couple of sections on the Charlton / Woolwich riverside. Recreational Footpaths and Cycleways O15 Existing footpaths will be safeguarded and new footpaths created to and through open spaces and places of interest. signposting.The Green Chain Walk.The Council will endeavour to create a signposted network of continuous and circular routes. 4. Contributions to footpath provision will be sought in accordance with Policy SC2. O16 The existing riverside footpath will be safeguarded and improved so that a continuous signposted walk from Deptford to Thamesmead is created. The Council supports the inclusion of the riverside walkway in the Countryside Agency’s Thames Path National Trail. Many of the Borough’s best attractions can be approached on foot. The Council published a Playing Fields and Allotments Study of the Borough. particularly in the northern part of the Borough. in 2004. D6 and D7). (See Policies D5.41 hectare per 1.

through Policy D3.35 Cycling is a popular leisure activity. Conservation and enhancement of important scientific features will be sought by appropriate management.They are defined on the Proposals Map and listed in Table O2 as sites of Metropolitan. It is considered appropriate to make available suitable segregated cycle routes within and through the Borough’s major open spaces and along the riverside. All development proposals are expected to have regard to the biodiversity of sites which are not within designated areas.38 O19 Where development is proposed on sites adjacent to protected sites of nature conservation importance. In general development of these sites or areas.37 4. but the level of protection accorded to a site will be commensurate with its designation. Wildlife and Nature Conservation The Identification and Protection of Wildlife Habitats O18 A network of Sites of Nature Conservation Importance (SNCI) throughout the Borough have been identified for protection. Sites are categorised as of Metropolitan. other than for minor ancillary works. These include Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) and sites declared as Local Nature Reserves (LNR). Reason 4. in conjunction with non leisure cycleways (see Policy M32). OPEN SPACES 83 . and within and through the major open spaces. One of the key principles of PPS 9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) is to maintain and enhance. restore or add to biodiversity and geological conservation interests. Consideration will be given to problems of nuisance and safety to other users. including groups representing walkers and pedestrians and draw up proposals in due course. Plans should be based upon up-to-date information about the environmental characteristics of their areas and should indicate the location of designated sites of importance. 4. and Oxleas Wood) and the Local Nature Reserves declared by the Council (Maryon Wilson Park & Gilberts Pit and the Oxleas Woodlands complex). Reason 4. applicants must demonstrate that habitats will not be adversely affected. particularly in the Green Chain Area. Many natural features and habitats cannot easily be recreated elsewhere and must be conserved where they can still be found.O17 The Council will use its planning and other powers to secure the provision of cycleways along the riverside. Suitable routes will be safeguarded and provided as resources allow and through the use of planning agreements/conditions on planning permissions. A re-survey commissioned by the GLA Biodiversity Unit: ‘Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation in Greenwich (September 2004)’ updates the previous list of sites. Local Authorities are required to consult with English Nature where development proposals may affect a SSSI. The Council will consult interested groups. Plans should also consider the restoration or creation of new priority habitats. Borough or Local importance for nature conservation or geology. would be prejudicial to their nature conservation interest. where the distances involved make cycling particularly appropriate. Borough (Grade I or II).36 It is important to retain a full range of natural habitats and features within easy reach of residential areas. Contributions to cycle-way provision will be sought in accordance with Policy SC2. or Local Importance. There will be a presumption against the development of these sites: the level of protection accorded to a site will be commensurate with its designation.The sites identified include SSSIs designated by English Nature (Gilberts Pit.

and adversely affects nature conservation interests. ii. during and after any development that may affect 84 OPEN SPACES . Green Corridors O20 The network of main Green Corridors will be protected and enhanced. canals and lakes will be protected and enhanced. The Plumstead Railway cutting iii. The railway line between Blackheath and Falconwood which links with the open spaces of Blackheath and Greenwich Park. Species Protection O22 The Council. Development will not normally be permitted where it would damage the continuity of wildlife habitat within the corridor. will take into account the presence of any protected or priority species and their habitats which are likely to be harmed. Ravensbourne and Quaggy. The ridgeway in Abbey Wood/Thamesmead iv. Reason 4.Reason 4. Development will not normally be permitted where it would damage the continuity of wildlife habitat within the corridor. Reason for O20 and O21 4. Applicants must demonstrate that advice has been sought from professionals with suitable expertise and qualifications. The culverting or building over of watercourses should be resisted as it results in a break of continuity in river corridors. River Corridors O21 The ecological and wildlife value of the Borough’s rivers. protected and priority species should be protected before. The railway line between Lee and New Eltham which connects to the Green Chain network of open spaces. and are shown on the Proposals Map and listed in Table O2 as appropriate. due to disturbance such as that from noise. shrubs and open land that often straddle road.42 National and international legislation protects certain species of flora and fauna. together with the Thamesmead canal network and a number of lakes form a corridor for aquatic species and bird migration. The green corridors are: i. These corridors can help form a network necessary to ensure the maintenance of the current range and diversity of flora and fauna.39 Some developments can have significant detrimental effects on the wildlife of adjacent sites. Such works will require the consent of the Environment Agency. the habitats of badgers. movement.Where possible. shade. when considering planning applications. rail and river networks can form corridors that link one habitat with another. PPS9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) states that Local Authorities should take measures to protect the habitats of these species from further decline. 4.The Green Chain also acts as a green corridor through Woolwich Cemetery.41 The River Thames. The above are also Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation. atmospheric pollution and the effects on drainage and ground water.40 Extensive contiguous areas of trees. Plumstead Common and Bostall Woods into Bexley.

particularly for those with mobility impairments and where this does not conflict with protecting wildlife habitats from disturbance.45 The Council will seek to increase the ecological interest of areas currently deficient in accessible wildlife sites. English Nature will be contacted. especially with the help of local people.Where necessary the Council will seek to enter into agreements to achieve these aims.The new ecology park that forms part of the Millennium Village is an example of this. 4. Vacant sites can also be used. and in the case of badgers. encourage the creation and maintenance of wildlife habitats within school grounds and support the setting up of urban / nature study centres. PPS9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) states that enhancing biodiversity in green spaces will contribute to urban renaissance. replacing or creating features of nature conservation interest. conditions and agreements will be used to facilitate the survival of individual members of the species. verges and unused corners of playing fields and recreation grounds. Development and management proposals should have a particular regard to the value of retaining. In particular the development of ecological management plans will be encouraged to ensure the maximum degree of biodiversity. Protected and priority species are listed in Part One. Management of Wildlife Sites O24 The Council will encourage landowners and managers to consider forms of management that will aid the conservation of natural features within their sites. In the long term it may reduce maintenance costs and would give a positive role to such marginal areas as embankments. OPEN SPACES 85 .43 Where development is permitted which may affect protected species. Schedules 2 and 4 of the Conservation (Natural Habitats &c) Regulations. London and proposed Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plans. 5 and 8 of the 1981 Wildlife and Countryside Act. Access to and within these sites will be encouraged. The opportunity sometimes occurs on redevelopment to secure open space and in some cases this could appropriately be managed for ecological interest. In cases where habitats of these species may be affected by development. either temporarily or permanently. Schedules 1. Priority will be given to schemes benefiting areas of deprivation. 4. and the UK.44 O25 The Council will encourage the use of wildlife sites to promote ecological awareness and appreciation by providing nature trails and guided walks.46 Management plays a crucial role in the retention of many valued habitats and species. Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites O23 In or near areas of wildlife deficiency (generally areas more than 1 kilometre from a Site of Metropolitan or Borough Importance for nature conservation to which the public has access) the Council will take opportunities to secure the provision of areas to be managed as wildlife habitats and seek to maximise opportunities for access to suitable sites within areas of wildlife deficiency where this does not conflict with protecting wildlife habitats from disturbance (See Map 6). Reason 4. a licence will be required prior to permitting interference with a sett. Reason 4.them. Careful management can help to reduce the loss of wildlife and can also contribute to the increase in biodiversity. Appropriate surveys of sites will help to identify if the species are present (See Policy D3). as wildlife refuges. reduce disturbance to a minimum and provide alternative habitats to sustain at least the existing levels of populations.

Map 6: Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites © Crown copyright Areas more than one kilometre from a publically accessible Site of Metropolitan of Borough Importance for Nature Conservation 86 OPEN SPACES .

There is also a new environmental interpretation centre on Deptford Creek.The nine acre site provides a diverse range of habitats to study and enjoy.Reason 4. OPEN SPACES 87 . The Council wishes not only to protect wildlife but also to increase the opportunity for residents (particularly of school age) and visitors to increase and enhance their environmental knowledge.47 Ecological awareness and education is an important factor in the Borough’s Agenda 21 strategy and the emerging Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan.The Greenwich Environmental Curriculum Centre in Eltham promotes environmental and outdoor education and is extensively used by local schools.

A large area of open land with fine old hedgerows. Some neutral grassland. and forms one of London’s most extensive areas of ancient woodland. Also forms a river corridor. grasshoppers and other invertebrates. NC2 Shooters Hill Woodlands (112) NC3 Bostall Wood and Heath (159. including great crested newt (specially protected UK BAP species) and the palmate newt (the rarest amphibian in London). Supports a wide range of plants and animal life.9) Mostly acidic grassland. Comprises Oxleas.3) Avery Hill Fields (36. NC9 NC10 NC11 88 OPEN SPACES . Important for wildfowl and wading birds. Mosaic of small meadows and pastures divided by hedgerows. Wetter areas. scrub and acidic grassland. Grade 1 NC8 Woolwich Common (45) Eltham Warren Golf Course. Some hedgerows. small woodlands managed as bird sanctuaries. Largest area of green open space in central south-east London. a lake and several ponds.. Ancient and secondary woodland with areas of heathland and acid grassland.4) NC4 NC5 NC6 NC7 Kidbrooke Green and Birdbrook Road Nature Reserves (2. including rare species.Table O2: SITE OF NATURE CONSERVATION IMPORTANCE Sites of Metropolitan Importance No. a pond and an interesting area of wet natural grassland. Site is manages as a meadow. add to the habitat diversity of the site.22) Blackheath and Greenwich Park (161.4) Eltham Palace Fields (34. encouraging butterflies. Nature Study Centre contains a range of habitats and is an important educational site. NC1 Site (area in hectares) The River Thames and tidal tributaries (2295) Description Valuable habitat supporting many plant and animal species. Contains ancient parkland trees. Jack and Shepherdleas woods. Range of grassland communities. Site may be important for bats. scrub and woodland. Series of ponds supporting a variety of amphibians.Terraces have been created on the Greenwich peninsula to provide opportunities for saltmarsh communities to establish.The river walls provide a feeding habitat for the nationally rare black redstart (London BAP species). including an interesting area of wet natural grassland. Acid grassland and semi-improved natural grassland. and the Environmental Curriculum Centre (21. Contains some of the oldest hedgerows in the Borough.1) Royal Blackheath Golf Course (24) Pippenhall Meadows (6. Gravel Pit Lane. Local Nature Reserve and part SSSI. Part SSSI Habitat for great crested newt (specially protected UK BAP species) bordered by woodland. Under consideration by English Nature for SSSI status. The area has potential for further improvement through management. (ponds and the moat in the grounds of the palace). Many regionally uncommon species. a variety of grasses and wild flowers.39) Sites of Borough Importance.

NC22 NC23 Greenwich Ecology Park and Southern Park (5) OPEN SPACES 89 .74) Maryon Park. Southern Park is amenity grassland with contains extensive plantings of native trees and wildflower meadows around the edges. Series of wetlands providing a range of wetland habitats from reed beds to deep water. Acid and wet neutral grassland and secondary woodland. tall herbs and brackish flora on surrounding land. Large waterbodies of Thamemere support common waterfowl.16) Tump 53 Nature Park (1. An extensive mosaic of habitats. Semi-improved neutral and acid grassland. NC12 Site (area in hectares) Sidcup Road Grassland and Harmony Wood (9. Recently created lake with good marginal vegetation.5) Twin Tumps and Thamesmere (10) NC17 NC18 NC19 NC20 NC21 Closely mown acid grassland with some scarce species of clover. secondary woodland through scrub to rough grassland and wetland. managed for environmental education.78) Oxleas Meadow (10. Two tumps and adjoining moats fringed with reeds. Gilbert’s Pit and Maryon Wilson Park (25) Greenwich Cemetery (9. Woodlands Farm is a working farm. Extensive reed beds. Gilberts’s Pit is a geological SSSI. Bleak Hill and the Slade) (29.4) Thamesmead Historic Area and Wetlands (2. Grass snakes occur. Natural banks of the Little Quaggy stream support wetland vegetation. Several springs.5) Plumstead Common (Winn’s Common.5) Birchmere (5.82) Description Neutral grassland with small areas of acid grassland to the north of the A20. used also for environmental education. Diversity of aquatic and marginal plants. ranging from ancient woodland. Extensive areas of acid grassland and secondary woodland. Dothill Allotments and Woodlands Farm (90. Supports variety of wildfowl and dragonflies. Ecology Park is recent habitat creation scheme containing a range of habitats. Open areas of water containing diverse aquatic flora and aquatic invertebrates. Water voles present (priority species in UK and London BAPs). Shooters Hill Golf Course. Part Local Nature Reserve Neutral grassland containing a range of grasses and wild flowers. Part of the Millennium Village development. educational purposes.5) Charlton House Lawn (0. Scrub. Water voles to be re-introduced following decontamination work. Site well used for environmental.No. NC13 NC14 NC15 NC16 Shrewsbury Park.

butterflies and other animals. with some rare species of grass. Secondary woodland. bramble scrub and rough grassland.Sites of Borough Importance. Part of an important green corridor. Proposed Environment Agency river enhancements will increase the value of this site. Emergent vegetation in ditches. Sizeable area of undisturbed habitats.16) Plumstead Railway Cutting (2. scrub and rough grassland providing habitats for a wide range of common birds and other animals. NC25 NC26 NC27 NC28 NC29 Eastmoor Street Park (1. Supports good populations of common birds. Grade II No. Wide variety of grasses and common wild flowers. Small lake supporting common waterfowl.43) Eltham Park North (6. Numerous mature trees. ponds and ditches. Nesting site for song thrush (UK BAP priority species).97) Deansfield (2. lake and ponds.9) Quaggy River at Blackheath Park (3. Secondary woodland. tall herbs and scattered scrub. with some uncommon species. small pond and native shrubs and trees. Variety of grassland. Some neutral and acid grassland. Rockliffe Gardens contains dense shrubberies and a small pond. Some scrub and secondary woodland. butterflies and invertebrates.6) Gallions Reach Park (3. Close mown acidic grassland. areas of developing woodland.28) Westcombe Park Railsides (6. scrub and wetlands. scrub and grassland. NC24 Site (area in hectares) Repository Wood and Charlton Cemetery (14.33) Woolwich Cemeteries and Rockliffe Gardens (15.71) Belmarsh Ditches (1. including linnets (a UK BAP priority species). Valuable habitat for common birds. neutral grassland and associated scrub. Recently landscaped park with range of habitats including flower rich grassland.3) NC36 NC37 NC38 90 OPEN SPACES . Secondary woodland with small areas of rough grassland and bracken. An important green corridor Recently created park with a range of habitats.Young trees colonising from adjacent woodland (Shepherdleas Woods NC2) Meadow grassland with common wild flowers. A valuable green corridor. Support a range of common birds and animals. Diverse rough grassland with scattered scrub. Hedgerows.4) Blackheath to Falconwood Railsides (16. Water voles present (priority species in UK and London BAPs). Deptford (0.2) St Nicholas Churchyard.31) The Ridgeway (10) Description Comprises secondary woodland with areas of possibly ancient woodland. Mosaic of rough grassland.1) Plumstead Cemetery (12. Diverse grassland. Section of river with natural banks but little aquatic vegetation.95) NC30 NC31 NC32 NC33 NC34 NC35 Royal Blackheath Golf Course South (21. One of the best sites in the Borough for ferns.

as well as temporary wetlands.7) Southwood Recreation Ground. rough grassland and pond. Well used for environmental education. but is still of importance for fish. Eltham (1. A sizeable lake with extensive reed beds and other marginal and emergent vegetation. Future strategy and management under review. seats and interpretative signs. A valuable green corridor. marshy area.3) River Ravensbourne (0.08) The Oaks. Woodland. School nature garden contains a range of habitats including pond. and several smaller. permanent ponds.57) Anglesea Road Open Space and School Wildlife Area (0. Grassland with common wild flowers and mature trees.02) NB Site is too small to be visible on the Proposals Map Sutcliffe Park Flood Alleviation Scheme (6. including eels. NC40 NC41 Sites of Local Importance No. outdoor classroom. Used for environmental education by adjacent school. Small stream and area of damp grassland. Secondary woodland set aside as a bird sanctuary.No. Large pond with good marginal vegetation. possible ancient. Sportsfield surrounded by tall grassland and scrub. NC39 Site (area in hectares) Mottingham and New Eltham Railsides (11. wildflower meadow and scrub.06) Description Secondary woodland. Secondary woodland with dense shrub layer.6) The Westcombe Woodlands (1. gravestones support numerous lichens. Several large trees. Plumstead (0. Small secondary woodland with dense shrub layer. The river here is in a vertical concrete channel. flowing through a flood plain with a mosaic of damp grassland and wetlands. scrub and rough grassland providing habitats for a wide range of common birds and other animals. Small secondary woodland.16) The Tarn (3. meandering channel. Vegetated walls support scarce ferns.The Quaggy has been restored to the surface in a natural-looking. NC43 NC44 NC45 NC46 NC47 NC48 NC49 OPEN SPACES 91 . flounders and sand gobies.37) Eaglesfield Wood (2. Facilities include a boardwalk and pond-dipping platform. New Eltham (2. Kingfishers are regularly seen. NC42 Site (area in hectares) St John the Baptist Churchyard.88) Description Diverse grassland between the graves. which pass through between the Creek and the naturalised river channel just upstream in Brookmill Park. Environment Agency flood alleviation scheme. Woolwich (1.53) St Marys Churchyard.

Neutral grassland and old hedge. NC54 NC55 For further information see ‘Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation in Greenwich’ – ’ September 2004 92 OPEN SPACES . dense shrubberies and grassland. East Wickham Open Space (0. rough grassland and nettles which may be of value to breeding butterflies. mostly in Bexley.6) invertebrate. Wild area of grassland. A boardwalk surrounds the pond. Small park with very attractive pond with good marginal vegetation. NC52 NC53 Plumstead Common Nature Reserve Small woodland. Recently restored Victorian garden with mature trees.75) Mycenae House Gardens (1.09) NB Site is too small to be visible on the Proposals Map Well Hall Pleaseaunce (4. NC50 NC51 Site (area in hectares) Academy Place Orchard (1.0) Twinkle Park (0.17) Informal open space. Bats may also be present. Supports common birds and (0. shrubbery and herbaceous borders. A moat. on a covered reservoir. Mature poplars.3) Description Recently planted orchard with a wide variety of fruit treed. Mature garden with large trees. stream and several ponds provide additional habitats. facilitating its use for pond-dipping by school groups. possibly ancient. Managed as a nature reserve.Sites of Local Importance No. Diversity of habitats for common birds and other animals.

To reduce the generation of waste and to encourage re-use and recycling of waste. air and water • Implement a waste minimisation and recycling strategy to meet and exceed government recycling targets • Continue to implement energy and water conservation in council properties and promote these issues in the community • Promote the development and implementation of renewable energy sources and purchase renewable energy for council property when possible • Reduce emissions that are recognised to contribute to climate change • Promote sustainable construction practices within the development industry • Practice environmentally responsible ‘Green’ procurement The Council Sustainable Development Policy will be addressed. the conservation of the water environment. protection from flooding. energy conservation. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 5. in part. They deal with those aspects of planning which make people’s surroundings safe. and land pollution.3 The Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy seeks to forge direct links into the planning system and local regeneration through the introduction of pilot sustainability indicators.The general policies on environmental protection are: To encourage environmentally sustainable forms of development. which states that the Council will: • Promote sustainable development through all Council strategies • Act and campaign against pollution of land. water. 5. (Policies H7 and D1). comfortable and compatible with the natural environment.1 Concern for the quality of the environment underlies most of the Council’s planning policies. It calls upon developments to ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 93 . noise. and reduce the impact of pollution. through the application of the UDP Policies. Specific policies on wildlife conservation are in the open space chapter. The policies within this chapter are concerned with land use and the planning implications of the need to care for the environment and the provision of safe public services. To protect and improve the environment in terms of air and water quality. the reclamation of contaminated land. To protect areas liable to river or tidal flooding.2 The Council’s concern for the environment is reflected in its Sustainable Development Policy (2003). and the disposal of waste. especially from transport and industrial processes. noise. is reflected in the Greenwich Strategy (2003) and the Council’s Sustainable Development Policy (2003). smell and toxic materials.5. SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 5. They specifically deal with air. The Council will encourage developers to use the BREEAM (Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method) independent rating system to demonstrate how their proposals achieve sustainable development objectives. and the protection of the amenities of sensitive residential and working environments.

it aims to create a clean and well cared for environment and ensures the best use of natural resources. and especially where proposals would be likely to result in the unacceptable emission of odours. including water pollution control and flood defence. E2 E3 94 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION .address the thirteen themes which embrace social. The Environment Agency functions of safeguarding the water environment.4 The Borough is a statutory Waste Disposal Authority (WDA) and forms part of a voluntary grouping of authorities (South East London Waste Disposal Group: SELWDG) which co-ordinates their duties under the Environmental Protection Act 1990.They seek to protect and enhance the local environment of the area. 5. The indicators form a useful checklist for developments. Local Environment Agency Plans (LEAP’s). 5.7 Policies 5. especially residential areas. and views disposal as a last resort.6 5. economic. water and soil pollutants or grit. The Borough is wholly within the operational area of Thames Water. are exercised over most of the Borough by the Environment Agency Thames Region. produced by the Environment Agency are a series of 5 year Action Plans for river catchment areas.5 5. It sets out advice on the relationship between controls over development under planning and pollution control legislation.The Ravensbourne and Marsh Dykes LEAP was published in 1998.The approach seeks waste minimisation. in consultation with the Environment Agency. Housing or other sensitive uses will not normally be permitted on sites adjacent to existing problem uses. fumes. which is addressed within the detailed policies in this chapter.The Greenwich Strategy recognises the importance of the environmental well being of Greenwich. A small area within New Eltham and Avery Hill Wards drains into the River Cray system and is in the Environment Agency Southern Region’s area.8 Control of Pollution PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (2004) sets out the Government’s planning policies relating to pollution control. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy: ‘Rethinking Rubbish in London’ was published in September 2003. Pollution E1 Planning permission will normally not be granted where a proposed development or change of use would generally have a significant adverse effect on the amenities of adjacent occupiers or users. the Thames Tideway LEAP in 1999 and the Darent LEAP in 2000. Government guidance has established a hierarchical approach to waste management. ecological concerns. which is responsible for water supply. unless ameliorating measures can reasonably be taken and which can be sought through the imposition of conditions. Many of the environmental issues discussed in this chapter are also the subject of the Building Regulations (1991) and compliance with these is mandatory. Planning permission will not normally be granted for new developments or extensions of existing industrial. dust. sewerage and sewage treatment. leisure or other uses that produce significant and unacceptable levels of noise and/or vibration at site boundaries or within adjacent sensitive areas. commercial.

Planning applications for major developments may need to be accompanied by an Environmental Impact Assessment subject to Circular 02/99: Environmental Impact Assessment and the Town and Country Planning (EIA) Regulations (England and Wales) 1999. fumes. E2 and E3 5. It guides the consideration of planning applications for residential development near transport and mixed sources of noise. Taking enforcement action where appropriate.10 5. smells.12 5. window details including insulation and boundary treatment. fumes. Policy E6 deals with air pollution.15 To improve the amenities of occupiers and users of adjoining sites adversely affected by existing operations. Minimising the adverse effects of noise and/or vibration of proposed development can be sought by imposing conditions requiring the inclusion of noise and/or vibration attenuation measures in any planning permission where development or a change of use is proposed on sites or in buildings adjacent to a permanent significant noise and/or vibration source. Conditions imposed will be appropriate to the development and thus may vary from restricting hours of use or operation of machinery to specific periods. dust. where the applicant can demonstrate that the proposals are designed to minimise light pollution. Encouraging relocation where appropriate. 5. odours. designated locations for noise generating activities. Negotiating reduction of activity or installation of ameliorating measures. water and soil pollutants. Policies on the location of commercial and industrial uses which may cause such problems are set out in the Jobs and Local Economy chapter. Problem uses are defined as those which would result in the unacceptable emission of noise.11 5. Refusing planning permission for consolidation or expansion of problem uses. sites of nature conservation value and protected or priority species and their habitats will be regarded as unacceptable. grit. Planning and Noise introduces the concept of Noise Exposure categories [NEC’s] ranging from A-D. For most developments arrangements can be made to mitigate the effects of noise. The Council will seek to reduce nuisance caused by existing uses from the emission of noise.These categories will be applied where appropriate. such as the position of the buildings on site. or imposing conditions on planning permissions. The London Plan states that Boroughs should reduce noise by promoting sustainable design and construction and well managed. iv. PPG24. or vibration by: i. Assessment of all the environmental impacts in one Environmental Statement will assist the determination of applications. light. grit or vibration. Applicants are advised to approach the Council at an early stage in the development process to determine whether an Environmental Statement is required to be submitted with the application. dust. Excessive noise and/or vibration can be intrusive to future occupants or users of development. Light Pollution E5 Planning permission will be granted for developments for new outdoor lights. iii. Encouraging such measures as the use of sound insulation materials on noise sensitive facades facing classified roads can reduce noise from traffic schemes. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 95 .9 To protect the amenities of areas where people live and work the Council will seek to separate them from problem uses.Reason for E1.13 5.14 E4 Reason 5. Lighting proposals which would adversely affect residential dwellings. ii. internal layout of buildings.

and their amenity should be protected. Reason 5. in fulfilment of the requirement of the Environment Act 1995. causing visual intrusion for neighbouring uses. was published in September 2002. Proposals for such development should show how ameliorating measures have been taken into account in the design of the scheme. Some uses.19 E7 96 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . grit and dust controls of the Clean Air Act 1993.16 The impact of lighting on residential amenity and on the environment are material considerations in the decision making process. and locationally by the linking of development to public transport (See Policy M3).17 E6 5. such as residential. Air quality assessments accompanying planning applications should be based on the Technical Guidance Note for developers and consultants issued jointly by London local authorities (ALG 2001) and should indicate impact both with and without minimisation measures. most recently through the National Air Quality Strategy. such as setting dwellings back from the road and the use of ventilation systems. Greenwich designated the whole of the Borough as a AQMA in 2001 and the Air Quality Action Plan was published in 2002.The Mayor’s Air Quality Strategy: Cleaning London’s Air. It is important that development proposals do not prejudice the implementation of the Air Quality Action Plan to reduce the specified pollutants.The Council will examine the potential to create further LEZs through the use of Section 106 agreements.The Council also has responsibility for enforcing Local Authority Air Pollution Controls [LAAPC] introduced under Part l of the Environmental Protection Act 1990. Lighting can adversely affect species such as bats. proposals for development which may be sensitive to air pollution will be required to demonstrate appropriate mitigating design solutions. Nitrogen Dioxide and Sulphur Dioxide). Development proposals with the potential to result in a significant deterioration in air quality will be resisted unless measures to minimise the impact of air pollutants are included. and Local Authorities are required to carry out periodic reviews of air quality and to assess present and likely future air quality against the air quality standards and objectives prescribed by the Air Quality Regulations. This Act outlines a new system of local air quality management. Such planning applications should be accompanied by an assessment of the likely impact of the development on air quality. In areas of poor air quality. Greenwich Peninsula has been designated as the first Low Emission Zone (LEZ) in the UK. may be particularly susceptible to air pollution. 5. (Particulates. operationally through encouraging ‘Green Transport Plans’.Where the objectives are not likely to be achieved an Air Quality Management Area [AQMA] must be designated.Reason 5. Floodlights and outdoor lighting of developments can illuminate an area much wider than the area of immediate activity.18 The declaration of the whole Borough as an Air Quality Management Area indicates the seriousness of air pollution in the Borough. Residential areas are particularly prone to this. Areas of poor air quality are identified in the Air Quality Action Plan. traffic reduction and other measures to reduce vehicle emissions including promoting the availability of less polluting alternative fuels. Air Pollution The Government has displayed a strong commitment towards improving air quality. Policy O13 deals with the control of floodlighting of sports facilities. Thus when considering development proposals a minimisation in airborne pollutants will be sought. and the smoke. In addition it will seek the co-operation of developers: technically in providing systems capable of operating efficiently on ‘cleaner’ fuel sources.The impact of air pollution can be reduced through design measures. The Council will pursue traffic restraint.

22 5. Green Transport Plans allow organisations. noise pollution and reducing energy use. policies within the Plan’s Movement Chapter aim to promote fuel efficiency and reduce the need to travel. the sponsors of the regional study (Government Office for London. Achieving these reductions will also require transport emissions to be cut and increased energy efficiency and conservation within the domestic. 5. design and use of materials where these do not conflict with other policies of the Plan. iii. Greater London Authority and the Association of London Government) are disappointed that the target is so low. unleaded petrol.Reason 5. incorporate measures for water conservation. Traffic restraint and reduction measures will also seek to develop more sustainable travel patterns.14%. orientation and energy consumption of the construction and use of buildings.The London Regional study recommends the adoption of a target for London of 2.23 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 97 . The use and burning of fossil fuels causes air pollution. The Mayor’s Energy Strategy: ‘Green light to clean power’ was published in 2004. relieving congestion. Increasing the proportion of electricity derived from renewable sources is part of a wider national strategy to reduce consumption of conventional fossil fuels and associated production of greenhouse gas emissions. to address their current transport impacts and put in place initiatives to reduce commuter and work related travel and minimise the environmental impacts of necessary transport needs. LPG and CNG and other means of reducing atmospheric and air pollution from vehicles. Energy Efficiency E8 The Council will encourage development that is energy efficient by influencing layout and orientation. ii. In addition. design. of estimated electricity demand by 2010. taking into account the existing character of the area. be environmentally and resource efficient to build and to operate (see Policy D1). access to and the use of fuels with low sulphur content. However. layout. Regional studies were commissioned to consider how these targets could be met. iv. Land use planning affects transport.The Council’s Energy Strategy was published in April 2002. including the re-use of materials. especially those with many staff. commercial and industrial sectors. v.as detailed in Design and Conservation Policy D1. and be subject to an assessment of the impact on the amenity of the local environment. Energy Conservation is also a key principle of design . use materials from local sustainable sources wherever possible. including new technologies will be encouraged. Energy Conservation The Government has established a target that 10% of UK electricity requirements should be met from renewable sources by 2010.All developments should: i. and their extraction and transport causes further environmental harm.21 5.20 To contribute to a reduction in air pollution and the emission of ‘greenhouse’ gases. (including energy from waste). incorporate a waste segregation system (see Policy E15). and are looking for new and innovative ideas to exceed the target.

Renewable Energy E9 The Council will expect all new developments with a floorspace greater than 1000 sqm or residential developments of 10 or more units to incorporate renewable energy production equipment to provide at least 10% of the predicted energy requirements where there is no conflict with other policies in the Plan. The Council will encourage the development of renewable energy projects and developments which include renewable energy facilities and energy saving technologies where there is no conflict with other policies in the Plan. Reasons for E.8 and E9 5.24 To help reduce energy consumption, protect natural sources of material [especially tropical forests], and to aid recycling of waste products in accordance with the Council’s Sustainable Development Policy (2003). The London Plan states that Boroughs should include policies to improve energy efficiency and increase the proportion of energy generated from renewable sources. Government Policy is to stimulate the use of renewable energy sources wherever they are economically attractive and environmentally acceptable. Buildings in use account for a significant proportion of energy use: the planning system can help to reduce energy requirements, by ensuring the provision of renewable energy production equipment in new development or refurbishment / conversion of existing buildings. Encouraging energy efficiency by promoting improved design, form, layout and orientation of development and use of appropriate materials can lead to reduced consumption of energy and environmental cost of running the building.This could include the use of passive solar design principles and developers are referred to ‘Planning for Passive Solar Design’. (BRESCU 1999). Savings of energy for heating, lighting, cooling and ventilation can all be achieved depending on the building type, although passive solar design principles are best suited to newly built buildings. This approach will also contribute to national efforts to reverse the damaging effects of energy consumption on climate change. 65% of the electricity used in the Council’s administration buildings, is ‘green electricity’ from low carbon fuels. The Council will introduce measures to improve thermal insulation in its own properties to the standard set by the Building Regulations and wherever possible aims to exceed this standard. Developers will be encouraged to do likewise. Water conservation measures may include where appropriate; water efficient toilet and shower facilities, grey water recycling systems, compostable toilets and/or garden water conservation systems. When assessing applications particular regard will be paid to the existing character of the area and the appropriateness of the design. Planning Policy Statement 22 (PPS22): Renewable Energy, states that Local Authorities may include policies which require a percentage of the energy used in new residential, commercial or industrial development to come from on-site renewable energy developments. Proposal 12 of the Mayor’s Energy Strategy requests that Local Authorities set targets for renewable energy generation. Proposal 13 states that applications referable to the Mayor would be expected to generate at least 10% of their energy needs from renewable energy on site where feasible. There are various types of renewable energy and regard also needs to be paid to technologies which may emerge in the future. Within Greenwich, the most promising sources of renewable energy generation are likely to be solar heated hot water, photovoltaic cells and combined heat and power.The various renewable energy technologies will have different environmental impacts, and it has to be recognised that some technologies may not be suitable in Greenwich. This requirement may be relaxed where the applicant can demonstrate that the installation of renewable energy production equipment is not viable given the location, design and type of development. Combined Heat and Power (CHP), on it own and in conjunction with Community Heating systems, can provide

5.25

5.26

5.27

5.28

98

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

cost effective, reliable energy and heating at high levels of efficiency and relatively low levels of pollution. CHP engines are already used at a number of Council-sponsored and private sector buildings in the Borough, including the Waterfront Leisure Centre, Woolwich, the Glyndon Road Estate and Amylum UK Ltd, Tunnel Avenue. Community Heating is in use in the Greenwich Millennium Village. 5.29 Applications should include an energy assessment which sets out the predicted energy requirements of the development, and how it is proposed to supply at least 10% of this requirement from renewable resources.Alternatively, a full and complete explanation would be required of the reasons why this target could not be met. London Renewables publication Integrating renewable energy into new developments; Toolkit for planners, developers, and consultants provides guidance on assessing energy requirements and the cost and feasibility of different technologies. (http://www.london.gov.uk/mayor/environment/energy/docs/renewables_toolkit.pdf) Proposals of a scale or nature likely to have a significant environmental impact should be supported by an environmental assessment, as required by Circular 02/99: Environmental Impact Assessment and the Town and Country Planning (EIA) Regulations (England and Wales) 1999. Hazardous Materials E10 Proposals which concern the storage, handling, production and disposal of hazardous materials will only be permitted subject to conditions to safeguard public health and if safety and the ecology of the natural environment can be maintained. The Council will seek to control the location of new establishments where hazardous substances are present and the development of land within the vicinity of such establishments. Reason 5.30 Hazardous materials can compromise the fragility of the natural environment and present a risk to public health and safety. Proposals involving such materials on development sites will be subject to conditions including a safety audit and survey for hazardous materials and the advice contained in Circular 04/00: Planning Controls for Hazardous Substances. Contaminated Land E11 A preliminary site investigation, prior to the determination of a planning application, will normally be required if a site is known or is likely to have been in contaminative uses. Where contamination is found, the council will need to be assured that the development can be built and occupied safely without any adverse environmental or health impacts, otherwise conditions requiring full remedial action will be imposed to deal with: i. ii. iii. the particular type or types of contamination; the problems of the ground exhalation of gases; and the restoration of land to beneficial use.

Reason 5.31 To avoid the health and safety hazards associated with polluted land and to protect the community and to comply with PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (2004). Contaminated land and potentially contaminated land is defined as: “land that has substances in or under it, thereby posing a real or possible risk to humans and their environment, or causing or likely to cause pollution of controlled waters”. Contaminated land is often found on sites which have a history of landfill, or which have previously accommodated a polluting industrial use. Once these sites, or sites adjacent to these areas become available for redevelopment it is essential that a full technical investigation is

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

99

carried out. Guidelines, as published by the former Department for the Environment,Transport and the Regions concerning contaminated land and the Borough’s Land Use Registry of Contaminated Sites place a requirement upon Local Planning Authorities to prepare a strategy detailing how the sites identified in the registry will be dealt with. The Council’s Contaminated Land Strategy was published in 2002. The strategy also provides advice on investigation and remediation measures, including defining levels of pollutants that constitute land as being contaminated and what levels could result in significant harm. Contaminated sites may have archaeological value; this should be taken into consideration when conducting investigation / remediation works, in accordance with Policies D30 and D31 and PPG16 (Archaeology and Planning). Site Servicing E12 The Council will seek to ensure the provision of satisfactory services to areas where new communities are being established. New development should take place where it can take maximum advantage of spare capacity in existing infrastructure. Where this is not possible development will be phased to give sufficient time for new infrastructure to be provided. The Council will insist on the provision of adequate services before giving permission for development or redevelopment and may require developers to contribute to off-site and on-site works so that sites can be properly serviced. Reason 5.32 To ensure that community need for up-to-date services is met. While in general development, sites can be adequately serviced there may be cases where development should be phased or developers should contribute to service provision. Prospective developers should ascertain the adequacy of services at an early date, in particular the electricity suppliers should be contacted about development in Thamesmead, and in the area between the Woolwich Road and the Thames. Electromagnetic Fields E13 The Council will have regard to the current advice as given by the National Radiological Protection Board concerning the electromagnetic effects from radio frequency and power frequency electromagnetic fields when deciding applications for housing or other sensitive land uses on adjacent sites. Reason 5.33 The Council and the public are concerned that there may be a risk to the health of residents in close proximity to electromagnetic fields.The National Radiological Protection Board has a statutory duty to advise on such risks. Telecommunications Development is covered by Policy D11 and Satellite Antennae by Policy D12. Waste Disposal PPS10: Planning for Sustainable Waste Management (2005) and the Government’s national waste strategy ‘Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000’ set out the Government’s planning policies relating to waste management.They set out a policy framework for sustainable waste management within which stakeholders can plan and take waste management decisions, which reduces the amount of waste we produce, and, where waste is produced, deals with it in a way that contributes to the economic, social and environmental goals of sustainable development.The ‘Waste Hierarchy’ outlined within the Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000 is a step towards tackling waste disposal within the principles of sustainable development. Policies regarding waste should place an emphasis on those options at the top of the hierarchy.The waste management options are:

5.34

100

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

• • • • 5.35

Reduction Re-use Recovery, including recycling, composting and energy recovery Disposal.

The Council will apply the principle of The Best Practicable Environmental Option (BPEO) when considering waste management options. This procedure establishes the option that provides the most benefits or least damage to the environment, in both the long and short terms. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy: Rethinking Rubbish in London was published in September 2003, and will also be a consideration when making planning decisions on Waste Management facilities. The Mayor published ‘Recycling and recovery facilities: sites investigation in London’ in July 2005 as part of a London-wide review of waste sites. It is expected that this will inform the proposed Sub Regional Development Framework for East London, to be published in 2006.The Borough is part of the South East London Waste Disposal Group (SELWDG). SELWDG maintains close liaison with other WDAs. The development of South East London Combined Heat and Power (SELCHP), at Deptford, as part of the Borough’s association with the SELWDG has provided the Borough with a facility that both processes non-hazardous waste and reduces reliance upon landfill sites. This is a preferable option to landfill disposal, as the waste hierarchy in the Government’s Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000 indicates. In addition, SELCHP contributes towards energy recovery, with energy generated through incineration, being sold onto the National Grid, and some materials are also recycled.The Council is contractually committed to using the SELCHP Waste Disposal Facility until 2024, which has sufficient capacity for the predicted level of non-recycled waste in the Borough. No further incineration capacity or landfill capacity is required during the Plan period; other sites for waste disposal either within, or outside of the Borough, will not be sought. The Council have contractual arrangements to process 105,000 mt of waste a year at SELCHP until 2024, and to process up to 30,000 mt of mixed dry recyclate a year at the Materials Recycling Facility (MRF). The Council are allocated permits to consign waste to landfill under the Landfill Allowance Trading System (LATS); the annual LATS allocation varies over the Plan period from 35,000 mt to 53,000 mt.The proportion of the Borough’s municipal waste sent to landfill is about 30% compared with the London-wide rate of 73% (London Plan Table 4A.). The forecasted yearly municipal waste arisings for 2003/4 are 124,000 mt, rising to 159,000 in 2010/11. The Council have sufficient capacity for the forecasted yearly municipal waste arisings for the Plan period and will have unused LATS permits which can be sold to other Boroughs. The Council are investigating the possibility of developing an anaerobic digestion facility in the Borough, which will enable a greater proportion of green and kitchen waste to be processed.The existing and proposed waste facilities have sufficient capacity for the Plan period. It is therefore not considered necessary to identify new sites in the UDP. However the Council will also, through the review of its Waste Disposal Plan and Recycling Plan, seek to increase the use of the more sustainable options of waste reduction, reuse and recycling. The land use policies in this Plan seek to ensure that the Borough’s land resources are managed so that the Waste Disposal and Recycling Plans can be implemented.

5.36

5.37

5.38

5.39

5.40

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

101

Waste Reduction, Reuse, Recovery and Disposal E14 The Council will encourage waste reduction, reuse, recycling, energy recovery - with waste disposal as a final option. In addition, the Council will apply the ‘proximity principle’ and seek to minimise the effect of developments on the surrounding area; encouraging rail and river movement and optimising location to minimise environmental impact.This will apply in particular when considering applications for: i. ii. iii. iv. Recycling facilities; Waste transfer facilities; Developments involving the handling, transport treatment, storage, recovery and disposal of hazardous wastes; Waste transportation.

Reason 5.41 5.42 The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy proposes that waste authorities should apply the proximity principle and the hierarchy of waste management. An increased emphasis is now placed upon the minimisation of waste production, the reuse and recycling of waste materials, and that waste disposal is environmentally responsible. The Environmental Protection Act 1990 sets out a framework and targets for waste management policies and planning policies. The Government aims to have 30% of household waste recycled or composted by 2010 (Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000). Statutory Borough targets are to recycle 10% of household waste by 2003/4 and 18% by 2005/6 (Guidance on Municipal Waste Management 2001).The London Plan targets are to exceed 25% by 2005, 30% by 2010 and 33% by 2025.The Public Service Agreement target is to recycle 19% of household waste by 2004/5.The Council is on course to achieve these targets; in June 2004, the proportion of household waste recycled was 16% There is an existing Licensed Waste Transfer Station at Nathan Way, Thamesmead. A Materials Recycling Facility (MRF) opened on the adjacent site in November 2004. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy proposes that waste authorities should make household recycling collections of at least three materials; the MRF will enable the kerb-side collection of 5 mixed dry recyclables (glass, cans, plastic, paper and cardboard) from every property in the Borough.The MRF will also serve neighbouring Boroughs and will enable residents of this Borough and the sub-region to recycle more materials more easily.A re-use and recycling centre, which will enable the processing and re-use of discarded electrical goods and furniture, is due to open in August 2006.This will assist manufacturers and retailers to comply with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive. The provision of handling plants close to the source of waste (‘the proximity principle’) is desirable. However this needs to be balanced against the need to ensure compatibility with surrounding land uses and that the proposal does not have a detrimental effect on the environment from processes producing noise, dust or fumes. Major developers on riparian sites should first consider the use of river transportation for the removal of demolition spoil and import of materials. Alternatively, sites should have good access to rail or river transport. Minimise Waste at Source E15 The Council will encourage on site provision for the reduction of waste and the separation of recyclable materials when considering large-scale commercial, industrial, health and major residential applications.

5.43

5.44

102

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

Reason 5.49 To avoid the risk of flooding. Such land shall be sensitively sited in relation to local communities and businesses. Surface water should not be allowed to enter the foul system. Where large-scale development takes place land should be set aside for the duration of the construction period to facilitate the sorting and storing of waste inert material. the Environment Agency and the London Plan promote the use of “soft” sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) as the most sustainable form of surface water drainage for new developments. There are a wide range of techniques. permeable / porous surfaces. Reason 5. grassed swales and balancing ponds. including water butts. which requires that waste be treated as close to source as possible.48 5. Surface water should be disposed of as close to source as possible. Reason 5. SuDS control surface water run-off as close to its origin as possible before it is discharged to a watercourse or to the ground. All new residential developments should provide refuse bins and recycling boxes.46 E16 5. This involves moving away from traditional piped drainage systems to engineering solutions that mimic natural drainage processes.5 hectares. Without careful consideration the siting and design of development can increase the likelihood of flooding in areas downstream.45 The London Plan states that Boroughs should work to minimise the level of waste generated and should apply the principles of the Best Practical Environmental Option. groundwater or aquifer pollution. The Environment Agency can advise on site specific requirements for developments on sites larger than 0. This is particularly important in catchment areas (Map 7) and on riverside sites. The Government through PPG25’ Development and Flood Risk’. Residential schemes should incorporate measures for community recycling that minimises waste disposal. or the separation at source for recycling in terms of storage spaces and access for specialised vehicles will help to reduce damage to the environment.47 Such facilities will allow material suitable for recycling to be separated and leachate and methane producing material to be deposited in less environmentally sensitive land fill sites. 5. pollution and other detrimental impacts on the environment. Greenwich Environmental Management Services [GEMS] operates a Waste Exchange database for businesses wishing to trade rather than dispose of waste arisings. to protect public health and to safeguard sources of extractable water. Drainage and Flood Protection E17 All development will be controlled so as not to give rise to flooding or surface. that aim to reduce problems of river pollution and flooding caused by conventional urban drainage systems.50 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 103 . or attenuated before discharge to a watercourse or surface water sewer. Proposals which include provision for the reduction of waste. To implement these techniques effectively developers need to consider their use at the earliest possible stage.

51 Development within an area at risk from fluvial flooding can have two adverse effects. flooding is predicted to occur at least once every 100 years (i. tourism. Reason 5. Development in undeveloped areas at risk from fluvial flooding will only be permitted in exceptional circumstances. but protected by existing flood defences.1-1% probability).Areas at risk from tidal flooding. In developed areas at risk from fluvial flooding.e. and the protection afforded by the existing defences. in consultation with the Environment Agency. are shown on Map 7. Government Advice is contained in PPG25: Development and Flood Risk (2001).54 104 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . The Council will consult the Environment Agency on planning applications for development in flood risk areas. the level of flood risk.The tidal flood risk areas are protected by existing defences to a 1:1000 level (i. Where development is proposed in a flood risk area. Not only can the development itself be put at direct risk but through a reduction in the storage capacity of the flood plain and an impeding of the flow of water. Reason 5. Where development relating to the tidal defences is permitted the Council may use this opportunity to extend the public access to the waterside in support of its policy to promote opportunities for leisure. other areas can be subjected to an increased risk of flooding.The areas at risk from fluvial flooding are shown on the Proposals Map and the areas at risk from tidal flooding are shown on Map 7. the guidance requires a flood risk assessment appropriate to the scale and nature of the development.53 The tidal and fluvial defences are an essential means of protecting low-lying areas from flooding.E18 Areas within Zones 2 and 3 at risk from fluvial flooding are identified on the Proposals Map. ensure that new developments safeguard existing tidal and fluvial flood defences. Generally consideration will be given to maintaining and/or improving the existing ecological features. biodiversity and visual connections with the river (See Policy W2). In light of anticipated sea level rise and climate change the Council will encourage riverside development proposals to examine the opportunity to retreat flood defences to increase flood storage. In Flood Zone 3. It should be noted that as flood alleviation works are carried out the areas at risk will change. 0. flooding is predicted to occur at least once every 1000 years but not more than once every 100 years (i. >1% probability). Planning applications for development on sites of more than 1 hectare within these areas must be accompanied by a flood risk assessment appropriate to the scale of and nature of the development. 0. A sequential test should be carried out where development is proposed on an unallocated site within a flood risk area.52 E19 5.This must demonstrate that there are no reasonable options available in lower flood risk areas.e. and the protection afforded by the existing defences to be carried out.This information is taken from the Flood Zones Map produced by the Environment Agency. development will only be permitted where appropriate flood defence measures are taken. the level of flood risk. The relevant flood defence levels are:Bugsby’s Reach (upstream of the Thames Barrier): 5. the existing flood defences and access to flood defence facilities for operational and maintenance purposes.18m ODN 5. The Council will.1% probability of flooding). riverside walks and cycle ways along the Thames.e.Where works are being carried out in proximity to a tidal or fluvial flood defence the Council will seek to safeguard and where possible extend public access to the waterfront and protect and enhance existing ecological features.This sets out the responsibilities of all parties. and it can be demonstrated that there is no increased risk of flooding to other sites. In Flood Zone 2.

000 years’ event (until 2030.Map 7: Flooding and Attenuation Areas © Crown copyright Area in Ravensbourne Catchment in which additional run-off must be attenuated Area draining to Marsh Dykes in which additional run-off must be attenuated and/or stored Areas at risk from a o nce-in-a-hundred years’ tidal flooding event. works ongoing to extend protection to 2100). ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 105 . but protected by existing defences against a ‘once-in-a-1.

23 ODN These flood defence levels are likely to increase in the light of anticipated sea level rise. maintenance and emergency purposes.1m ODN. 5.Woolwich Reach and Gallions Reach (Downstream of Thames Barrier): 7. for operational. must be retained. Existing tidal flood defences are designed to protect London at a 1:1000 flood risk level until 2030. 106 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION .55 Adequate access to flood defence facilities such as embankments. and where appropriate improved. Blackwall Reach: 5. tidal sluices and pumping stations. Greenwich Reach.2m ODN Barking Reach: 7. the Environment Agency is working to ensure protection until 2100.

wetlands and wildflower meadows.The general policies on design and conservation are: The Council will encourage a high quality of design in all new developments and alterations to existing developments which positively contribute to the improvement of their accessibility. DESIGN & CONSERVATION GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 6. 6. This sustainable approach will 6. It has an impact on the Borough’s image. the external appearance of buildings. It is also concerned with conservation and heritage issues. Higher standards of environmental quality and design are important in assisting the regeneration of the Borough and contributing to the quality of life. and to protect Listed Buildings of architectural or historic interest and their settings.6. and the longest waterfront of any London Borough. almost 1000 statutory Listed Buildings. and older industrial and commercial areas with environmental problems. To preserve or enhance areas of recognised and valued character. to ensure the creation of a safe and accessible environment. to preserve and enhance the existing character. for the Borough.3 The Borough contains areas of unrivalled townscape quality and buildings of national importance.4 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 107 . and the way the Borough is seen by the outside world as well as by those who live here. safety and wellbeing of all communities and aims to make the most of Borough’s historic heritage.2 SD1 SD2 SD3 SD4 SD5 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 6.1 The quality of the external environment affects residents. including historic landscapes. and those who work in and travel through the Borough. This chapter is concerned with environmental quality in terms of urban design. safety and the built and natural environment. wildlife habitats. areas of deprivation. and contains policies designed to promote a high standard of design. To improve areas of poor quality environment. appearance and usefulness of urban space and the quality of the townscape. a royal heritage stretching back several centuries. Maritime Greenwich is an inscribed World Heritage Site. visitors.The control of development has to be seen in the context of the need to conserve this heritage whilst encouraging appropriate new development. trees. woodland. and to ensure that the natural environment is not adversely affected. and London as a whole.The Greenwich Strategy recognises how the role of a high quality environment contributes to the health. to promote environmental improvements. New development should be seen as contributing towards a better quality environment as part of a coherent urban design framework which looks at how the urban environment is used and how it has an impact on the way development is planned. the design. To preserve or enhance Conservation Areas. Specific policies on the natural environment and its protection and conservation are included in the Environmental Protection and Open Space Chapters. sites of ancient monuments and areas of special character. It also contains areas of poor environment. fine views. open land. there are 20 Conservation Areas. To promote the use of previously developed land and to ensure new developments make efficient and appropriate use of land. its economy. historic gardens and parks.

The northern part of the Borough has seen developments along the Waterfront in particular. Design advice is available for specific Conservation Areas. A high quality of development will assist in the regeneration of the Borough by making it more attractive to investment as well as to residents and workers. and concern for the needs of local residents. also. The World Heritage Site Management Plan (2004) considers sympathetic design and conservation for the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site. and by helping to provide safe and secure environments for all. Secondly. style and ability to create a new environment worthy of the historic context.The character of the Borough and the guidelines for design should not be used to prevent good imaginative design. high quality buildings in a modern idiom will be welcomed. context and scale. but interrelated categories. including respect for the locality. It is important on this context to promote. the pressures may be less intense.7 6. Sites including the Peninsula and Royal Arsenal have provided the Borough with the unprecedented opportunity to incorporate quality design with integrated transport links and new developments. 6. the creation of a legible environment.6 6.facilitate economic and social development that also safeguards the environment in which we live. the Borough can offer opportunities where the very best modern designs can rival their historic counterparts in their imagination. New development in particular should take note of urban design principles and specific guidelines set out in the policies. by carrying out environmental improvements. The detailed policies are set out below in a number of distinct. but no less important for residents who value their surroundings and wish for a pleasant and safe environment.5 Changes to the existing environment should help meet the needs of local people and should help to promote good living and working conditions generally. and redevelopment on a scale unrivalled in the Region.The target is that over 90% development will be on brownfield sites. in line with Government guidance. The Borough has and continues to undergo. local materials. by preserving the best of the past. by achieving high standards of design in new developments. there are policies relating to urban design.8 108 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . for in appropriate locations. areas of poor environment and deprivation where not only does good design need to be encouraged but where environmental improvements need to be targeted and promoted. Firstly.The Council attaches great importance to the need to encourage and promote a higher quality environment through design and conservation policies. in an Urban Design Strategy for Woolwich Town Centre and a Streetscape Manual for Greenwich Town Centre. a process endorsed by the Council’s Local Agenda 21 Strategy. and topography. 6.The Council has produced design guidelines to provide more detailed guidance for achieving a coherent and coordinated urban fabric. a proper relationship with the street. character of adjoining buildings. the reuse of previously developed land and the efficient and appropriate use of land. Environmental Quality policies cover heritage issues including Conservation Areas and Listed Buildings. Elsewhere. With its 13 kilometre waterfront. significant change resulting from inward investment and regeneration. and thirdly Environmental Improvement policies conclude this chapter. There are.

the implications of the development for urban sustainability. vi. Achieve the Building Research Establishment’s BREEAM excellent rating which addresses a wide variety of environmental issues D2 Major development proposals and new build developments proposed for sensitive locations should be accompanied by a Design Statement setting out: . historical. . ii.the cultural diversity of the area. . Integrate with existing path and circulation networks and patterns of activity.the architecture of surrounding buildings.the potential for a mix of uses.how the design relates to and enhances its urban context. and skylines. bulk and massing of adjacent townscape.the effective use of land.an analysis of the site and its environs.topography.established layout and spatial character. ridges and natural features.the principles behind the architectural and landscape design. height. movement and circulation. orientation. iii.the quality and nature of materials. . .features of architectural. archaeological. Demonstrate through proposed land uses. through effective layout. vii. including disabled people. . ix. . . local landmarks. iv. views. . . Promote local distinctiveness by providing a site-specific design solution. . .existing townscape. Maintain adequate daylight and sunlight to adjoining buildings and land. (Policy D7) Achieve accessible and inclusive environments for all. DESIGN & CONSERVATION 109 . viii. Maximise energy conservation. both traditional and modern.patterns of activity. manageable well-functioning spaces within the site. . Provide a positive relationship between the proposed and existing urban context by taking account of: . use of appropriate materials. .Policies Urban Design D1 Development proposals should be of a high quality of design and will be expected to: i. biodiversity and their setting. .the scale. landscape setting. v. detailing and landscape design. Create attractive. layout and design that the development contributes to a safe and secure environment for users and the public.how the development would relate to established patterns of movement and activity in the wider area.

within the setting of a listed building or scheduled ancient monument. 2000).developments of more than 5. .within the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site. or which fails to take the opportunities available for improving the character and quality of an area and the way it functions.within or adjacent to conservation areas. . 6. should not be accepted. with environmental performance expressed on a scale of pass to excellent.The particular requirements for residential extensions are set out in Policies D9 and D10 and Advice Note 2.within or affecting historic landscapes.The London Plan acknowledges that good design is central to all the objectives of the plan. materials. .11 110 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . .000 sqm. accessibility and treatment of spaces between buildings. massing.developments of more than 25 dwelling units. From 10 August 2006.The above policies are a basis for achieving good urban design and provide a benchmark from which development proposals can be assessed. listed building consent applications (except for internal works) and planning applications (except for changes of use and most minor householder developments) must be accompanied by a design and access statement. relationship of buildings to each other and their surroundings. under the Planning & Compulsory Purchase Act (2004).‘By Design: Urban Design in the Planning System – Towards Better Practice’ provides advice on implementing the Government’s commitment to good design. safety. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that high quality and inclusive design should be the aim of all those involved in the development process. Reason for D1 and D2 6. that there has been an appropriately qualified and experienced design input.9 The Council attaches great importance to the achievement of high quality design that adds to the high quality of the Borough’s environment and to Greenwich distinctiveness. (DETR/CABE. Design which is inappropriate. Good and imaginative design for individual schemes can make a direct contribution to upgrading overall townscape quality.sites fronting the River Thames.The Borough is not of uniform character but is made up of areas with distinct identities and developments should reflect this. and account has been taken of creating a sustainable environment. . developers are encouraged to attain the excellent standard. . The statement should include sufficient material to fully illustrate the design and impact of the proposal.within an area of special character. A high quality environment can be produced by careful design of townscape elements layout.Developments and sensitive locations requiring a Design Statement include: . . Good design should contribute positively to making places better for people. To achieve sustainable development. that the development reacts to its urban context.10 6. The Building Research Establishments Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) is a flexible and independently verified environment assessment method. Design Statements are intended to explicitly demonstrate that a range of design issues have been taken into account in key locations and circumstances. They seek to ensure that new development is designed individually for the specific site and urban context in question.

v.g. Reason 6. A survey of flora and fauna on sites of defined ecological importance and on sites over 1 hectare to enable decisions to be made regarding their conservation. Development decisions will be based on the requirement: a. This policy recognises that there may be developments where it will be relevant for improvements to the urban and natural environment to be included. d. Examples of such improvements are given in the policy and would be secured by legal agreements where appropriate. footways. Reason 6. creation and possible management of ecological habitat and interpretation projects.12 Development sites that pay insufficient regard to existing ecological and natural landscape features can lead to an incoherent urban form and the unnecessary destruction of existing nature conservation interest. signs. e. c. The Council will consult the Environment Agency on development proposals that directly affect the Boroughs rivers and watercourses. iii. D4 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 111 . (See Policy O21) ii. To protect trees and their root systems from damage as a result of the development both during and after building operations.The emphasis will be to soften the impact of the development in its setting and provide visual interest in the street scene and to contribute to nature conservation. Layouts need to be designed around existing vegetation and landscaping proposals should be an integral part of the application. These features should be respected and the area’s natural character enhanced. wildlife habitats. That landscaping schemes should include environmentally appropriate planting using locally native species and demonstrate appropriate irrigation plans for landscaping. The protection and enhancement of natural river features and corridors by appropriate landscaping and design. coverage and species where it is agreed that existing trees can be felled. street trees. including protected species (See Policy O22).13 The Council’s overall approach to community benefits and planning obligations is set out in Policy SC2. boundary walls. To ensure that planting design does not impact negatively on personal safety and accessibility. The regard for the biodiversity and geological features of the site and the surrounding area. The Council will seek to achieve improvements to both the urban and natural environment in line with Policy SC2. iv. The retention of trees and the protection and enhancement of natural and ecological features. green corridors. b. To achieve an appropriate replacement of trees taking account of size. tree ridge lines. An appropriate level of survey to enable decisions to be made about the existing trees on the site. in particular paying attention to the needs for: i.D3: Development proposals will be expected to take account of ecological factors as well as display a high standard of landscaping. provision of public art. surface materials. hedges and other features where these will contribute to the development.

Access for People with Disabilities D6 Applications for development (including the alteration. Advice on the colour used for cyclepaths should be sought from the Council to ensure conformity with cycle networks’ standards.Parking and Access Arrangements D5 The design and layout of access roads. convenient and appropriate to the type and scale of the development. or as visitors or customers. Safety and Security in the Environment 112 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . Parking can cause considerable problems in terms of noise. particularly for people with disabilities. safe.14 The success of a development depends to a considerable extent upon the ease of access for pedestrians and vehicles. cyclepaths. well lit environment. footpaths. Proposed developments must comply with the guidelines on access for the disabled ‘Designing for Accessibility’ (published by the Centre for Accessible Environments and available from the Council’s Access Officer). provide suitable access for disabled people. The Disability Discrimination Act 1995 contains provisions to improve access to services for disabled people. Parking and service arrangements should work effectively and be designed to minimise their visual impact. Developers and other agencies should consider the needs of disabled people who might use the building or outdoor spaces as a place of work. (See Policies H5 and H6 and Advice Note 3: Planning Standards for Conversions). extension or change of use) of buildings and land to which the public have access should. Reason 6. Reason 6. ensuring that the amenity of neighbouring properties would not be unduly affected. Commercial developments should also incorporate significant landscaping within their design to ensure the parking provision does not dominate the site. older people and people with young children. particularly in residential areas.The conversion of large residential dwellings should regard parking provision as an important consideration. where practical and reasonable.15 Many buildings and open spaces are inaccessible to disabled people. Parking should be provided in accordance with the parking standards set out in the Movement Chapter (Policies M23 to M27). parking and service areas should be attractive. In residential areas. emphasis will be placed on providing for the safe and convenient movement of pedestrians in an attractive. pollution and loss of amenity.

It is not the intention of this policy to promote development in the form of ‘defended enclaves’ protected by security gates. Trees D8 The Council will seek to maintain tree coverage. Ensuring the development is well integrated into the existing pattern of pedestrian and vehicular movement and extends links with existing public routes. play areas and open spaces are overlooked by inhabited buildings. Entrances for example should be clearly visible. Ensuring that paths. Reason 6. Tree preservation orders will be used to protect trees of environmental importance and visual amenity where their health or amenity is threatened. minority ethnic communities.Traditional street patterns rather than cul-de-sac designs for example. particularly as part of new developments and townscape improvement schemes and particularly of native species.This is particularly so for disadvantaged groups. and will encourage tree planting in appropriate places. or fear of crime. vi. while maintaining the privacy of the inhabitants of these buildings.32: Residential Roads and Footpaths.16 People’s use of their environment is restricted by both the reality of danger to personal safety and their fears of insecurity. Good design will help people find their way around. iv. Ensuring that community safety measures such as CCTV are provided where it is practical and appropriate. Ensuring that landscaping. notably ‘Places. older people and people with disabilities. planting and building does not create dark or secluded areas. Streets and Movement’ (1998) and Design Bulletin no.This advice is supported by guidance from the Department for Transport. Design that enables a building and its surrounding space to function and be used effectively is important. 6. path networks to link buildings and spaces should follow natural desire lines that people expect to take. The planting of trees. Secure ‘enclave’ developments are not considered to generally reduce crime and the fear of crime because such developments do not address the public realm and do not provide lively frontages. lesbians and gay men. especially in areas of deficiency. and contribute towards natural surveillance.Safety and Security in the Environment D7 The Council will require all development to be designed to provide and improve personal safety and security in the environment particularly for women. v. children. ii.17 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 113 . accessible only to residents. Avoiding the creation of spaces with ill defined ownership and ensuring there is a clear distinction between public and private space. Buildings and spaces around them should contribute towards developing public perception of the environment and their use of the spaces within it. Generally security is better promoted by ensuring that developments are permeable and overlooked as much as possible. It is therefore both desirable and important that new developments should both provide a safe environment and improve it in areas where it is poor. iii. and Ensuring that good quality lighting is provided for streets and paths. PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) advises that development plan design policies should aim to create safe and accessible environments where crime and disorder. does not undermine the quality of life or community cohesion.The design of new developments can contribute to personal safety by: i. is encouraged. An Advice Note ‘Designing for Personal Safety’ gives further guidance. and the care of existing trees. enforce this.

such as valuable grasslands.They will need to meet the following criteria: i. iii. privacy and outlook. ii. Rear extensions will not be permitted where these could cause an unacceptable loss of amenity to adjoining occupiers by reducing the amount of daylight. and erecting antennae on existing buildings or other structures has been fully explored and demonstrated. technologies to camouflage telecommunications apparatus have been fully explored. side and other additions should be limited to a scale and design appropriate to the building and locality. v. Reason 6. coloured and landscaped so as to minimise visual impact on its setting and local environment. vi. masts. the street scene and the surrounding area and respect the amenities of adjoining occupiers.20 Inappropriately designed extensions can adversely affect residential amenity. any proposal is sited. the possibility of sharing facilities. D10 iii. interfere with a pleasant outlook or result in an increased sense of enclosure. In Conservation Areas work to or the felling of trees requires consent. Two storey extensions to the side of semi detached houses will not be permitted unless they are designed to avoid a ‘terracing effect’ in conjunction with adjacent extensions. and any proposal meets International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for public exposure.Reason 6. designed. sunlight or privacy they enjoy. Reason 6. Residential Extensions D9 All new roof extensions should be designed to respect the scale and character of the host building. ii. 114 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . Detailed guidance for extensions are set out in Advice Note 2. Telecommunications Development D11 Planning permission will normally be granted for telecommunications development provided that: i.Tree planting will not be encouraged in places where this would be detrimental to existing nature conservation interests. the special character and appearance of the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site. listed buildings.18 The Borough’s trees are important elements of the landscape and contribute to its visual and ecological character. In most cases a pitched roof will be required on side or rear extensions when they would be visible from the public highway. consideration has been given to locating a site which causes minimal visual impact subject to operational needs.19 To ensure that roof extensions do not have an adverse effect on the appearance of the building or street scene and do not detrimentally affect residential amenity. Proposals for rear. iv. Detailed guidance for extensions are set out in Advice Note 2. conservation areas and historic landscapes are preserved or enhanced. such as site.

Such procedures allow the local planning authority to consider. It concluded that “the balance of evidence does not suggest that mobile phone technologies put the health of the general population at risk. the group did recommend tightening planning control over mast erection.Reason 6. to buildings where they will be open to public view.22 6. and the Government. Much minor telecommunications development is covered by permitted development rights and therefore does not require planning permission.21 Modern telecommunications are an essential and beneficial element in the life of Greenwich’s residents and workforce. 6. the siting and appearance of the proposed development.” However. In Conservation Areas satellite antennae are not normally acceptable when located on front or side walls or on chimneys. It recommended compliance with International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for public exposure. the Council.They are not considered acceptable on Listed Buildings where the character of the building is adversely affected. where the cumulative effect can be particularly severe. are concerned about the impact of telecommunications on the environment and the Council will seek to ensure that the townscape will not suffer an unnecessary proliferation of telecommunications structures and the lowering of environmental quality. while finding that the balance of evidence suggested no health risk. PPG8: Telecommunications (2001) confirms that emissions from mobile phone base stations should meet ICNIRP guidelines for public exposure. The Council realises that there are concerns about the health risks telecommunications masts may pose. The report also states that the possibility of harm cannot be ruled out with confidence and that the gaps in knowledge are sufficient to justify a precautionary approach to mobile phone technologies. PPG8 encourages planning authorities to include policies on telecommunications development in their development plans.23 6. base stations and transmitters. thus reducing the need to travel. New development should examine methods of reducing the need for satellite antennae by introducing centralised facilities. Conservation Areas. and on blocks of flats. Telecommunications have the potential to contribute to sustainable development by enabling more people to work and carry out other functions from home. traffic levels and pollution. However. Detailed guidance regarding the siting and appearance of mast and ancillary apparatus is given in PPG8. particularly in residential areas.The benefits that these developments bring are recognised and the policy seeks to allow such developments subject to criteria which aim to minimise their visual and environmental impact and to encourage the shared use of facilities. The Stewart Report (2000). as a result of the Stewart Report and PPG8. considered concerns about the health effects from the use of mobile phones. there are no grounds for additional planning controls on telecommunications masts on health grounds.25 The installation of satellite antennae can have an adverse visual impact on the facades of individual buildings and the overall townscape. Proposals for telecommunications masts will be required to demonstrate compliance with these guidelines.24 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 115 . Satellite Antennae D12 Satellite antennae must be sensitively positioned on buildings in order to minimise their impact on the environment. Reason 6. within 56 days. However. although is subject to prior notification procedures.

v. Reason 6. Where the proposed replacement of traditional shopfronts is concerned this objective will be pursued where it is practicable. iv. Solid metal grilles over shopfronts are particularly inappropriate as they are perceived to make a street appear more dangerous. New shopfronts including fascias and signs should be designed to respect established proportions in the immediate area. 116 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . “Design Guidance for Shopfronts in Greenwich Town centre” and “Design Guidance for Shop Signs. Street Furniture D14 The Council will encourage street furniture to be of a good quality. Reason 6. Advertisements and Illumination in Greenwich Town Centre”. these should be given due regard.The Council has produced an Advice Note “Design Guidance for Shopfronts”. Externally located grilles or security shutters will not normally be acceptable on traditional and historic shopfronts. Modern materials may be acceptable where the appearance of a traditional shopfront can be created. security grilles should be of the open mesh variety. or in Conservation Areas.27 Street furniture plays an important role in our built and natural environment. vi. Where traditional shopfronts contribute to the character or appearance of an area. which provides additional guidance for shopfronts within the borough. particularly for those with mobility restrictions. The Council will also seek to influence the design and siting of street furniture provided by other authorities i. Where design guidelines have been prepared for such areas. Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual. i. especially a conservation area. their retention and repair will be encouraged. public utility boxes. through normal consultation procedures.Shopfronts and Signs D13 The Council will require applications for planning permission for shopfronts and express consent for signs to take into account the following criteria: i. iii. New shopfronts should not adversely affect highway and pedestrian safety. sited to minimise visual clutter and obstruction. however it is important that it is designed and sited to be both functional and visually attractive. For shopfronts and signs within Greenwich Town Centre the Council has produced two design guidelines. Illuminated fascias and external lighting will not be permitted where they affect the character of the building or the amenities of the adjacent area. Particular areas within the Borough may also advocate a style of street furniture relating to their historic connection or tourism function. ii. using traditional materials as far as possible. Street furniture should be purposeful. The proposed replacement of traditional shopfronts should respect the features and proportions of the original shopfront.e. All new shopfronts must be accessible to people with disabilities.e. telephone boxes. vii. consistent and attractive in design that is sensitive to the local character of the area. Where proposed.26 Well designed shopfronts and signs can contribute towards the overall environmental enhancement of an area. creating problems and fears about personal safety.

Where outline applications are appropriate they will normally be required to provide details of siting. design and the means of access. Progress Estate. PPG19: Outdoor Advertisement Control (1992) emphasises outdoor advertising is essential to commercial activity but can be prominent and unsuitable in some locations.g. The Borough’s Conservation Areas have special qualities and character which could be adversely affected by inappropriate development (see Map 8 and Proposals Map).29 National policy on Conservation Areas and Listed Buildings is found in PPG15: ‘Planning and the Historic Environment’’. Rectory Field.. PPG15 and the Circular direct the designation of Conservation Areas in recognition of the area’s “special architectural or historic interest.Advertisements D15 The Council will normally give express consent for large poster or other advertisement displays provided they: i.Article 4 Directions have been issued for West Greenwich (Randall Place & Churchfields). should respect the setting of that area.30 6. iii. In any instance where it is decided that an application ought not to be considered separately from all or any of the reserved matters. Applications for the erection of buildings within Conservation Areas should in most cases be submitted in full. Conservation Areas or Areas of Special Character and are not in a position where they would have an adverse effect on the setting of a Listed Building.31 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 117 . Trenchard Street and Greenwich Town 6. window replacement. Development on sites in the vicinity of a Conservation Area and which would have a visual effect on its character or appearance. open spaces. building form and materials. Circular 14/97 also places a requirement on Local Planning Authorities to pay special attention to preserving or enhancing the historic environment. Do not adversely affect public safety including pedestrians and drivers. Ashburnham Triangle. taking into account local scale. Conservation Areas D16 Planning permission will only be granted for proposals which preserve or enhance the character or appearance of Conservation Areas. Harmonise with the scale and character of the surrounding area and are not fixed to flank walls where they would be unduly dominant. the procedure specified by Article 3(2) of the General Development Procedure Order (1995) will be invoked. detract from the character of an environment and have an adverse effect on the amenity of the area. and which might cumulatively harm the character or appearance of the area e. East Greenwich. Do not adversely affect the amenity of residential areas. Their size can often look out of place with their surroundings and they are sometimes located where they are likely to create a road safety hazard. ii.28 Advertisement displays can often be unsightly. the character or appearance of which it is desirable to preserve or enhance”. the established pattern of development and landscape. Article 4 Directions will be used to control changes to the appearance of buildings and their settings that would otherwise not require planning permission.Where the character or appearance of a Conservation Area is threatened by inappropriate development the Council will seek to control these through the use of Article 4 Directions. particularly the sensitive locations identified in the policy. TfL will be consulted where they are the designated Highway Authority. Shrewsbury Park Estate. Reason 6. Reason 6.

can jeopardise the architectural integrity of the building. The policy also enables the Council to assess the comparative quality of existing and proposed development and ensure that new development will enhance the character and appearance of the Conservation Area. Reason 6. and harmonise with their special architectural or historic character.32 Conservation Areas will contain a number of buildings which are not listed but do contribute to the character and appearance of the area and are worthy of retention.The Council will also promote the enhancement of conservation areas by the preparation of character appraisals and statements. D17 Demolition of buildings and structures that positively contribute to the character or appearance of a conservation area will be resisted. Reason 6. including elevational drawings where appropriate. Listed Building Consent will only be granted for demolition or partial demolition in exceptional circumstances.Centre.19) applicants for listed building consent must be able to fully justify their proposals and will need to demonstrate why works which affect the character of an existing building are desirable or necessary. Where consent is required for internal alterations. features of interest should be respected and left in-situ wherever possible. Listed Buildings D18 There will be a presumption in favour of the preservation of Listed Buildings. When demolition is permitted it will be subject to the building remaining until a contract for redevelopment is let. D19 D20 118 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .33 Listed Buildings make an important contribution to the townscape of the Borough and the Council attaches great importance to their protection and preservation. iii. indicating all the proposals in detail.34 Repairs and alterations. The adequacy of efforts made to return the building in use. Any application for substantial demolition will be required to produce convincing evidence to demonstrate that every effort has been made to sustain existing uses or find new ones. Reason 6. to clearly show the development in the context of the street scene. Proposals for external or internal alterations or additions to Listed Buildings should respect the integrity of the buildings. Applications for Listed Building consent should be accompanied by plans to scale. The merits of alternative proposals for the site. In line with the guidance in PPG15 (paras 3. and will be assessed against the following criteria: i.163. The Council will resist proposals for development which would detract from the setting and proportions of a Listed Building or group. The Council will need to be satisfied that any such works will not lead to this result. ii. Conservation Area consent for the demolition of buildings will normally be given only when planning permission has been granted for redevelopment which complies with the requirements of Policy D16. even on a small scale. The condition of the building and the cost of repairs relative to its importance.

Map 8: Conservation Areas 13 17 11 20 12 4 1 2 18 16 7 8 15 10 14 3 5 9 19 6 © Crown copyright 1 2 3 4 5 West Greenwich Blackheath Blackheath Park Greenwich Park Progress Estate 6 7 8 9 10 Eltham Palace Charlton Village Woolwich Common Eltham Green Deptford High Street 11 12 13 14 15 Plumstead Common Ashburnham Triangle Royal Arsenal. Woolwich Goldie Leigh Hospital Shrewsbury Park Estate 16 17 18 19 20 Rectory Field East Greenwich Sun in Sands Well Hall Pleasaunce Westcombe Park DESIGN & CONSERVATION 119 .

where appropriate.Reason 6. substantial weight will be given to protecting and conserving the particular characteristics that account for their designation. In order to secure their continued beneficial use other plan policies may be applied more flexibly should the individual circumstances dictate. proposals for the demolition or unsympathetic alteration of Locally Listed Buildings will be discouraged. in conjunction with the Boroughs maintains a Register of Listed Buildings at risk from neglect and decay. Reason 6. Reason 6.35 D21 The setting of a Listed Building can be fundamental to its character and appearance and often forms part of its original design and layout. World Heritage Site The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site was inscribed in 1997. Reason 6. The Council will promote action. Historic Landscapes D24 Proposals which would adversely affect the character or appearance of historic landscapes will not be permitted. If buildings in this situation are left empty there is a danger they will fall into disrepair.Where these buildings are located within a Conservation Area. Grants from English Heritage may be available for this purpose.38 Whilst not benefiting from the same degree of protection afforded to statutory listed buildings.39 120 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . including the use of building repair notices and urgent works notices.36 The use for which some Listed Buildings were originally designed is sometimes no longer tenable. a Register of Listed Buildings at risk from neglect and decay.The Local List will be updated on a regular basis.The Council will assist English Heritage in revising the Register and in promoting appropriate action to bring about their repair and reuse. locally listed buildings are an important part of the Borough’s built heritage and consequently every effort will be made to ensure their long term retention. It was the 16th such site in the UK. (Policy TC7).The policy for the Site is included in the Greenwich section of the town centre chapter. D22 D23 6. maintenance and use. Consequently. Policies D16 and D17 apply. In considering proposals affecting buildings on the Local List of Buildings of Architectural or Historic Interest.37 English Heritage in London. The Council will assist English Heritage to maintain and revise regularly. Such a change of use should not conflict with other policies in the Plan. Proposals for changes of use of Listed Buildings will only be granted planning permission if it is no longer in its original or other established historic use and the new use is beneficial to the building and is compatible with its character and features of historic interest. to bring about the reuse and repair of buildings on the register.

D. Reason 6. Development within the wider setting consultation area. gardens and their settings.O. Paul’s Cathedral seen from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point. Paul’s Cathedral. In the London Plan it is proposed to replace these views with a London Protection Framework which will include the strategic views as ‘London Panoramas’ and also include ‘River Prospects’ and ‘Townscape and Linear Views’. including Deptford Creek. Paul’s Cathedral in relation to both the skyline and the foreground of views from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point will be protected and enhanced. The strategic views of St. ii.Well Hall Pleasaunce and Eltham Palace. which would exceed the height thresholds and which would seriously detract from the views of St. By the careful consideration of proposals which could infringe on the development plane from Blackheath Point. D26 6. The setting of the Cathedral in the skyline will be maintained by ensuring that the height.The three sites in Greenwich. whilst the development plane from Blackheath Point will be applicable in considering the impact of the proposal on these areas. will not normally be permitted. location and materials of proposed buildings within the defined wider setting and backdrop consultation areas do not adversely affect its prominence. Strategic Views D25 Strategic views of St. in the protected areas. Paul’s Cathedral from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point shown on the Proposal Map will be protected from the intrusion of new developments: i.) will be applied.45 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 121 . are an essential part of the Borough’s heritage too. It is characterised by the sharp change in levels from the Blackheath plateau down to the low-lying riverside areas. Paul’s Cathedral from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point cross the West Greenwich conservation area. In order to preserve the integrity of existing views but allow sufficient scope for redevelopment it will be necessary to control the height of new buildings or structures within reasonable parameters. In the case of the Greenwich Park view a height threshold of 30 metres (A. From there they traverse the Boroughs of Lewisham.40 Historic landscapes.44 6. and the development plane in the case of the Blackheath Point view. By limiting all proposed developments within the viewing corridor from Greenwich Park to a height of 30 metres A. The Council will consult other local authorities when a planning application is submitted for a development that exceeds the 30 metres (A.Reason 6. are Greenwich Park. English Heritage has prepared a register of parks and gardens of special historic interest.41 Government directions require the Council to protect the designated strategic views and wider setting of St.The Framework is to be published as Supplementary Planning Guidance to the London Plan incorporating Management Plans for each of the views. Their unique character should be protected from the adverse effects of development. even if not directly obstructing the views will be resisted.) threshold from the Greenwich Park view. which are listed on the register. Southwark. which include parks.O. and development that would adversely affect this.42 The foreground of the view(s) is important to the setting of the Cathedral.D.The foreground of views from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point consist of the historic areas of Greenwich Town Centre and Deptford. (Above Ordnance Datum).43 6. Careful consideration of building materials and tone can make a proposal more sympathetic in long distance views.D. The setting of St. Reason 6.O.

H.Map 9: Local Views k g h f i b a c d e j © Crown copyright a Shooters Hill to Central London Shrewsbury Park to the lower Thames Castlewood towards SE London Eaglesfield Recreation Ground towards Bexley and the lower Thames Eltham Park North to Central London f g h i j k Winns Common to the lower Thames Thames-side panorama from the Thames Barrier open space St. forecourt) Local View Zone b c d e 122 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . Marys Churchyard towards Mast Pond Wharf and beyond Docklands panorama from the Wolfe Monument Eltham Palace to Central London Millennium Dome from Central Park (from Pilot P.

Inappropriately designed or sited buildings or structures within the views can have an adverse impact on the quality of the view. k. Docklands panorama from the Wolfe Monument.The London Plan encourages Boroughs to designate and manage local views. Thames side panorama from the Thames Barrier open space. Millennium Dome from Central Park. Shrewsbury Park towards the lower Thames. London. f. i. Winns Common to the lower Thames. Consultation between these authorities and the Mayor of London is essential to secure the objectives of this policy. Eltham Palace to Central London. vistas and other views of landmarks and water-space recognised for their contribution to the local built and natural environment. e. g. particularly where these provide views of the River Thames and its banks (see also Thames Policy Area W2). c. Castlewood towards S. DESIGN & CONSERVATION 123 . St.Camden.46 These views are an important element in the character of the Borough. Reason 6. Eltham Park (North) to Central London. Eaglesfield Recreation Ground towards Bexley and the Lower Thames. b. h. Mary’s Churchyard towards Mast Pond Wharf and beyond. d.Tower Hamlets and the City of Westminster and the Corporation of London.E. Shooter’s Hill to Central London. All these views are from publicly accessible spaces and offer panoramas. j. Local Views D27 Planning permission will be given for development which would not have a seriously adverse effect on the overall perspective and essential quality of the Local Views as listed below and as identified on Map 9: a.

b. Blackheath. Proposals should relate positively to topographical features and other high buildings and contribute positively to the image and built environment of London. Other areas also particularly sensitive to the presence of high structures and buildings are set out below. h. ii. including hard and soft landscaping. f. Proposals should be of outstanding architectural and urban design quality and act as a landmark. Guidance on tall buildings (2001) published by English Heritage and CABE gives further advice. Royal Artillery Barracks). metropolitan open land and other open spaces. the world heritage site. Proposals should take account of proximity to public transport facilities/interchanges. World Heritage Site and buffer zone and Conservation Areas). local views. Proposals should secure a complete and well-designed setting. to facilitate interaction at street level. iv. strategic views. Areas considered to be particularly inappropriate for high buildings are: i. Thamesmead Town Centre and at key locations in the Waterfront area.g. Areas with a visual relationship to important and famous buildings (e. Old Royal Naval College/ National Maritime Museum. Planning applications for high buildings will be assessed using the following criteria: i. Proposals should be set in a Borough (or wider) urban design analysis. iii. both locally and in relation to the local and wider area from which it will be visible. Greenwich Park. Areas within or with a visual relationship to areas of special character (e. Proposals should take account of visual impact on: a. the Green Chain) 124 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . conservation areas. assessed in particular on their standard of urban design. However. listed buildings and their settings. v. Reason 6. or major open landscape (e. Charlton House.g.High Buildings D28 Planning permission for high buildings will be granted within Woolwich Town Centre. historic parks and gardens. their settings and views from them. ii. and g. vii.47 High buildings and structures are inappropriate in most areas of the Borough due to being out of scale and character with their surroundings. architecture and the need to meet functional considerations and can make a positive contribution to the environment. the River Thames and other waterways vi. c. viii. high environmental quality. in certain locations high buildings may be considered appropriate. Proposals should emphasise or contribute to a point of civic or visual significance or a centre of urban activity or regeneration.g. e. d. The Borough’s character comprises extensive areas of low-rise townscape including suburban residential areas and large areas of green open land. Proposals should enhance the skyline by ensuring that the roof top design is of high quality.

iii. In certain instances preliminary archaeological site investigations may be required before proposals are considered. there will be a presumption in favour of the physical preservation of the remains in situ and to allow for public access and display and to preserve their settings.49 D31 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 125 . Potential 6.The Borough’s archaeological heritage represents a local community asset that is desirable to preserve and utilise both as an educational and recreational resource. Major high points.Avery Hill and sports-ground). Castle Wood.50 Archaeological remains are a finite and fragile resource vulnerable to modern developments. In Greenwich these include the Blackheath/Greenwich Park open spaces. Eltham Common. Shooters Hill. D26 & D27) iv. ancient countryside. Areas where high buildings would spoil traditional. Areas of Special Character D29 Within Areas of Special Character defined on the Proposals Map. Oxleas Wood. The Countryside Commission in its document “Strategic Guidance for Heritage Land in London” has identified the Shooters Hill Ridge area as Heritage Land due to its high landscape value. The Thameside area is covered by the Thames Policy Area designation (See Policy W2) Archaeology D30 The Council will expect applicants to properly assess and plan for the impact of proposed developments on archaeological remains where they fall within ‘Areas of Archaeological Potential’ as defined on the constraints Map 10. A landscape strategy for the improvement of the Blackheath open space has been prepared (2004). restoration and enhancement of character. It recommends that UDPs should include policies for the protection. Reason 6. recording and publication of archaeological finds before development takes place by use of planning conditions/legal agreements as appropriate. PPG16 gives guidance on how archaeological remains should be preserved or recorded. or to remove and record such remains. scale and quality of open spaces and associated buildings. Reason 6. Eltham Ridge). but where this is not feasible the remains should either be investigated. They are defined on the Proposals Map and the policy seeks to ensure development proposals do not adversely affect their character. special consideration will be given to the safeguarding. excavated and recorded before destruction. Shooter’s Hill. Eltham Park. Shooters Hill Golf Course.g.The Council will seek to secure the co operation of developers in the excavation.The objectives of new development can often conflict with the need to preserve. or investigated. Appropriate conditions/legal agreements may be used to ensure this is satisfied. Skylines and distant views both to and from the Areas of Special Character will be protected. At identified sites of known archaeological remains of national importance. including scheduled monuments. excavated and removed from the site. Bostall Ridge. Abbey Ridge and Bostall Woods areas (Bostall Woods.Woolwich Common. historic parks. as well as a map defining where these policies apply. enhancement and preservation of sites of archaeological interest and of their settings. famous or locally important views (see Policies D25. tree slopes and ridges. For sites of lesser importance the Council will seek to preserve the remains in situ. including developed sites where protection of the skyline is paramount (e.48 Areas of special character are areas that form a key part of the landscape character of the Borough. and nature conservation value.

Map 10: Areas of Archeological Potential © Crown copyright Areas of High Potential NB Thames riverfront Area of High Potential has been extended to the low water mark 126 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .

Pursue land use policies which are sensitive to the potential threat development can pose to archaeological remains and adopt a flexible approach to the design of new development in areas where the preservation of archaeological remains is paramount. and if applicable make provision for the preservation or recording of such finds by a recognised archaeological organisation. DESIGN & CONSERVATION 127 . 6. and industrial and commercial areas. Reason 6. Reason 6. for appropriate uses.The support of local archaeological groups is essential to this process. particularly by local groups.The Greenwich Heritage Centre is a potential location for the retention of remains. Encourage co-operation amongst landowners.developers should be alerted early on in the planning process of likely remains so as to secure their preservation. e. iii. developers and archaeological groups by promoting the principles laid down in the British Archaeologists and Developers Liaison Group Code of Practice. The Council will encourage the temporary use of vacant land awaiting development.53 To overcome problems of unsightliness and blight. ii. Early discussion with the Council and English Heritage is encouraged.52 D33 The Council recognises the importance of such improvements as contributing towards overall environmental enhancement of areas and improving the quality of people’s lives.51 The Council will also: i. Environmental Improvements D32 Subject to the availability of resources the Council will initiate environmental improvements. The potential for discovery of significant remains in large areas of the Borough is high. whilst the opportunity to record and preserve such finite resources is usually restricted to one occasion. areas of deprivation. nature conservation purposes. particularly in the Waterfront. Encourage developers to allow an appropriate level of archaeological investigation where significant remains are unexpectedly discovered during construction. and assist in nature conservation schemes. However the temporary use is not intended to prevent the long-term use and/or development of the site.g. and will work with voluntary groups and other agencies to encourage environmental improvements in areas of poor environment.

128 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .

This would include necessary new infrastructure and services. people with disabilities. changes to the strategic public transport and road networks in respect of Deptford Church Street junction realignment. businesses. which is often not a desirable achievement in a world of finite resources and environmental concern. the Council will promote the movement of freight by more sustainable modes such as water and rail. where it can be served by public transport. particularly in respect of sensitive local areas. SM3 pedestrians. improved interchanges.7. SM1 SM2 To encourage the use of sustainable forms of transport. cyclists and public transport users first. a high frequency Metro style rail network of turn up and go services. by restraining road traffic. meeting the requirements of the Road Traffic Reduction Act and Local Air Quality Management Plans. parking control and development control. encouraging other environmentally friendly transport and appropriate traffic management and calming measures. and safeguarding the environment through mechanisms such as traffic management. Generally.1 The overall aim for transport is to achieve a more sustainable relationship between land uses. particularly major generators of travel demand.B. and particularly safe and convenient movement for pedestrians and cyclists. and common high standards. To safeguard the Crossrail route. the following priorities should be considered in preparing development proposals and transport policies and projects: i. such as walking. SM4 SM5 SM6 SM7 MOVEMENT 129 . Policy emphasises better provision for walking and cycling. Greenwich Waterfront Transit is another strategic scheme the Council supports. The main emphasis of policy is to achieve a sustainable transport system and not necessarily to secure greater mobility. MOVEMENT GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 7. particularly in respect of safer journeys to school. people’s activities and the transport network that serves them in order to reduce the need to travel. Thames Gateway Bridge and to have regard to notification requirements in respect of a third Blackwall crossing (to Silvertown Way in L. Newham) Woolwich Rail Crossing and DLR (Woolwich) Extension. cycling and public transport. then users of cars and powered two wheeled vehicles. particularly for those presently disadvantaged in mobility terms. To promote a fully integrated public transport system that is extensive in coverage and meets the needs of residents. and will be safeguarded as and when appropriate.The general movement policies are: To effectively link major transport generators and attractors to the current and foreseeable transport network. ii.The emphasis is therefore on the importance of reducing the need to travel and carefully locating new development. workers and visitors in the Borough. To assist the local and London economy commensurate with safeguarding the environment. To promote safe transport in general. To seek equitable levels of mobility and accessibility for all groups of people. at no or minimal cost to the environment.

For example road improvement benefits the motorist.6 130 MOVEMENT .This has the effect of forcing more people into private cars. It is primarily road traffic which has caused the whole of the Borough to be declared an Air Quality Management Area.A major problem facing the travelling public in the Borough can be deterioration in service provision as bus routes are re-organised. There is an existing capacity problem on rail routes. Many areas of the Borough are also in need of comprehensive traffic calming and problems associated with parking around stations and in town centres needs to be addressed.5 7.g. Walking also makes up an important element of all journeys for which provision needs to be made. and iii) reduce the need to travel especially by car.The Council would like to see better enforcement of traffic restrictions.4 7. turn up and go. The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) includes various proposals for improving rail services in London including a new rail crossing of the Thames at Woolwich (DLR). further reducing the revenue collected and increasing congestion on the roads. which prevents an increase in services. Most services in the Borough are provided by London Central and Stagecoach Selkent. service. the Mayor’s London Plan and Transport Strategy. and a London Metro. environmentally sensitive roads.This traffic puts increased pressure on local. creates more hazards for both cyclists and pedestrians. shopping. Construction has started on the DLR extension to Woolwich. Bus links to the Jubilee Line North Greenwich Station from the South of the Borough need to be improved. These cross-river facilities have been improved by the completion of the Jubilee Line Extension to Greenwich Peninsula and the Docklands Light Rail Extension from the Isle of Dogs southwards to Greenwich and Lewisham. However. in contrast to 27% in Coldharbour and New Eltham.Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 7. The objectives of Government guidance in PPG13 .3 7. Express and orbital routes also need to be developed. Thames Gateway Bridge and DLR (Woolwich) extension also need comprehensive public transport (server) strategies as part of the scheme. causes traffic accidents and injury and reduces the efficiency of bus services. strategic and local level to: i) promote more sustainable transport choices. reduced or simply scrapped. Transport for London are responsible for procuring and subsidising bus services provided under tender by private bus operators. leisure facilities and services by public transport. ii) promote accessibility to jobs. and providing for Borough needs are reflected in the range of Movement policies in the Plan. Public transport is therefore an essential form of movement for travel to work and services for a large proportion of the population. But this disguises significant differences between areas with wards in the north of the Borough having very high rates of car and van non availability e. this is scheduled to open in early 2009. 55% in Woolwich Riverside and 51% in Woolwich Common. regional. Road transport is seriously affected by the amount of traffic commuting through the Borough. For example 76% of traffic travelling North through the Blackwall Tunnel in the morning peak hour originates outside the Borough. adds to problems with local air quality.Transport are to integrate planning and transport at the national. walking and cycling. especially on the North Kent Line. The main areas of public transport deficiency are the limited cross-river service.2 The 2001 Census indicated that 41% of households do not have access to a car or van. as do links to the Queen Elizabeth Hospital. the Woolwich Ferry and the bus service through the Blackwall Tunnel. Proposals are already under consideration for a South London Metro which would include the rail services in the Borough provided by South East Trains – the North Kent Line is a pilot scheme for South London Metro. links between North and South in the Borough and Thamesmead. This planning guidance.The only cross-river facilities for non-car owners are the foot tunnels. the claims of the car are restrained in order to safeguard the 7.

stroke and obesity. developers should pay regard to: i. Close liaison with Transport for London (TfL) and the relevant railway undertakers will be necessary. 7. including meeting Health of the Nation targets for coronary heart disease. minority ethnic groups. people with disabilities. anti poverty and equal opportunities. Reliance on motorised transport is not simply a cause of air pollution and traffic congestion. designing for the needs of pedestrians. iii. The policies may also help improve the environment by reducing traffic jams. building into development costings provision for segregated roadways for Waterfront Transit (see Policy M10) as well as more conventional highways. people with disabilities and non-car owners are catered for. M2 The Council will normally require a Transport Assessment of developments that employ a large workforce and/or attract significant numbers of trips. vi. locating major activities such as schools and shops at public transport. can make a substantial contribution to achieving improvements in outdoor air quality. The best method to increase physical activity is to try to incorporate it into the normal daily routine by promoting walking or cycling to the shops or to work and by promoting accessible public transport. as relevant. cycle networks and pedestrian networks.7 The Council’s transport policy of prioritising reduction in the use of private cars and increasing the use of public transport and walking or cycling.The scope of the assessment will reflect the scale of the development and the extent of the transport implications. well-lit walking areas and cycle lanes may be necessary prerequisites for persuading people to make more journeys by these means. arranging highways networks after these priorities. reducing the divisions between communities made by major urban routes. younger and older people. The needs of the Dome and Waterfront pose particular opportunities and challenges in respect of transport. ii. as well as reducing the number of road traffic accidents. it has also resulted in a significant decline in “physical activity”. 7. iv. cycling and pedestrian nodes. v. Existing and proposed utilisation of public transport and impact upon capacity of networks. cyclists and public transport users first. Increased provision of ‘safe’. walking and cycling is also to ensure that the mobility needs of women.8 Policies Development and Transport . In addition the policy will have additional benefits for health.The emphasis in the Plan towards sustainable forms of transport such as public transport. MOVEMENT 131 . building into highways networks traffic calming and design criteria for speeds no greater than 20 mph and the creation of home zones. and increasing the number of ‘safe’ places for children to play.environment and the legitimate demands of those without access to a car. Transport policies and provision also play a key role in serving the main Council objectives of regeneration.General Principles M1 When planning transport provision for single large developments and extensive sites where comprehensive development can take place.

they are individually tailored to the development and achievable targets. in line with those of the Mayor’s Transport Strategy. Public Transport Extension of the Public Transport Network M4 The Council will advocate and work in partnership with relevant agencies to extend public transport into the following under-served parts of the Borough.There will be an onus placed on developers that they demonstrate the compatibility of their plans to this policy when submitting a development proposal. and 132 MOVEMENT .10 Travel Plans (TPs) are useful tools to ensure that a development minimises the adverse environmental consequences of the travel demand that it generates.Travel Plans are secured and agreed as part of the planning process. minimise the need for car-based trips (especially single-occupant trips) and. It goes on to state that “the Government considers that travel plans should be submitted alongside planning applications which are likely to have significant transport implications”. especially through economies of scale. thus re-enforcing the poverty trap. between residential areas in the South of the Borough and employment areas in the North. including the Jubilee Line North Greenwich Station. reduced parking and traffic reduction targets in this UDP. maximise the use of sustainable forms of transport. to poorly served areas of deprivation to ensure these are not isolated by the absence of affordable and reliable services. including employment. i.Reasons 7. including walking. education and health uses. hospitals and other organisations. cycling. PPG13 promotes the widespread use of travel plans amongst businesses. TPs are appropriate for a range of development types which generate a significant level of travel demand. use of public transport and car sharing. Reason 7. iii.A TP should aim to minimise the need to travel to and from the site.The Council will use its powers through conditions on planning permissions and S106 agreements to secure the outcomes described in this policy in line with Policy SC2. Co-ordination of TP’s between different sites can bring benefits. As such they contribute to meeting sustainability. schools. ii. Planning agreements and conditions on planning permissions in line with Policy SC2 may be used in pursuit of this policy. Single large developments and extensive sites are defined as being of more than 25 dwelling units or more than 500m2.9 In order to provide development and its consequent transport requirements in a sustainable way this policy is geared towards securing sustainable development compatible with the wider objectives of the UDP. where travel is necessary. the developer will be expected to liaise with the Council to determine an appropriate transport strategy for the scheme. Annual monitoring (for a 5 year period) allows mechanisms to be put in place to check and improve rates of reduction if necessary. retail.The implementation of Travel Plans will be secured through a condition or planning obligation on the planning permission in line with Policy SC2. are sought. In the early stages of any major development proposal. Travel Plans M3 Development proposals that will have a significant transport implication will be required to be accompanied by a Travel Plan before any granting of planning permission. Thamesmead. leisure.

It is appropriate that where developments will make significant demands on public transport their scope for contributing to public transport provision should be assessed. Reason 7.The Disability Discrimination Act requires all buses to be accessible by 2017 and Transport for London intend to achieve this objective sooner. especially to provide improved access to public transport for disadvantaged groups. (See Policy SC2). New transport schemes should also be accompanied by comprehensive public transport proposals in order to maximise their catchment potential. the Waterfront. Woolwich and Thamesmead. improvements to and expansion of bus and rail services will also be sought. MOVEMENT 133 . a 400 metre maximum walking distance from a bus stop and an 800 metre standard from a railway station.14 M7 The Council will safeguard land and otherwise support the introduction of public transport services on the river.iv. v. especially to provide access to health and other services. Greenwich. Of these 53% never went out of their homes in a given week.11 These areas are poorly served by public transport.13 Land uses and transport facilities must be integrated. will be sought for housing developments.The existing network of public transport should be fully exploited in the interests of efficiency and maximising accessibility. Accessible Public Transport 7. As a guide to developers and public transport operators. Use of the River 7. Good server networks to existing transport hubs will be promoted.The transport needs of people with disabilities should be integrated into the forward planning and development of the public transport system. to the Queen Elizabeth Hospital generally. For relevant developments the Council will also examine the scope for planning obligations for public transport infrastructure in line with Policy SC2.12 M6 When considering developments that generate and/or attract significant amounts of public transport need/demand the Council will take into account accessibility to and from and of public transport. particularly between Central London. Public transport operators will also be urged to improve the accessibility of their vehicles and rolling stock for the use of people with disabilities and to provide new or improved services. Public transport generally is sustainable and more available to all and it should be promoted as such.This causes problems for existing population and industry. At present many people with disabilities experience specific barriers which either stop or restrict their use of conventional public transport. hinders further development and regeneration and it can exacerbate poverty and social exclusion. Capacity and frequency improvements to public transport networks will also be sought. according to a survey by the Greater London Association for Disabled People. In particular improved access to public transport for disadvantaged groups is sought. M5 Such major new transport developments as the Thames Gateway Bridge and DLR (Woolwich) extension should be accompanied by comprehensive public transport server network strategies. Reason 7. Approximately 7% of the population have difficulties using public transport.

can give links across the River as well as along it to Central London and will give expanded opportunities for work. It is due to open in 2009. ii. Development of the Waterfront areas must allow for the introduction of a service (see Movement Schedules). An orbital rail service is needed to overcome the problems associated with a predominantly radial system. A route from Abbey Wood to Victoria via Woolwich. and Capacity improvements for passengers on rail lines through and at interchanges in the Borough. DLR Extension to Woolwich (see proposals map/site schedule m4) Crossrail Project Orbital Rail Services between Abbey Wood and Victoria Station.16 All schemes will be developed with due regard to safeguarding amenity and the environment.17 7. The capacity of the DLR between Bank and Lewisham will be improved by increasing the length of trains from 2 to 3 cars. with connections to existing lines in the Thames Gateway at Abbey Wood. Safeguarded and other Rail Schemes M8 The Council supports the following rail schemes which it will pursue with the relevant agencies: i. tourism etc. iv. Safeguarded rail routes are shown on the Proposals Map.15 At present the river is under-used for transport. Reason 7. New piers have been provided at the Royal Arsenal in Woolwich and on the Greenwich Peninsula. promote a modal shift from the car and help the area’s regeneration.Reason 7. iii. Because of the long development times involved in rail schemes. Crossrail Safeguarding Directions were issued by the Secretary of State for Transport on 22 February 2005. 7. Public transport provision. It has the potential to reduce overcrowding on rail services in the Borough and open up new routes across London. Crossrail is a Hybrid Bill proposal for national rail links from Maidenhead and Heathrow in the west to Shenfield and Abbey Wood in the east. Policy M37 considers the use of the river for freight. (The Docklands Light Railway (Capacity Enhancement) Order 2005). Capacity limitations on existing networks need to be resolved to ease overcrowding and promote greater use of the system. bus services have great potential to make good rail network deficiencies. to link centres and cater for unmet demand in South London. There is need for better bus linkages along the South Circular Road and these and other opportunities for improved east/west public transport will be examined with Transport for London.18 134 MOVEMENT . Planning applications affecting safeguarded land will be notified to the appropriate promoting bodies. All new infrastructure should be accessible for people with disabilities. leisure. Lewisham and Peckham should be considered. including riverbus services.The DLR (Woolwich) extension will overcome the barrier effect of the River Thames. The Woolwich Ferry is an important existing cross-river link.

exemption from banned turns. Woolwich and Thamesmead to Abbey Wood. Measures assisting buses in making the most effective use of road space could include bus lanes. just as is normally expected in respect of other site infrastructure such as sewers. 7. Implement the London Bus Priority Network and London Bus Initiative in its area and otherwise encourage the introduction of suitable bus priority measures in order to improve the reliability and efficiency of bus services. funding and implementing the system by: • safeguarding of segregated roadways for transit.Bus Priority M9 The Council will: i. water mains. bus termini and turning points and bus priority at signals. and level access/boarding with step free/gap free platform stops. clean fuel systems.21 MOVEMENT 135 . Greenwich Waterfront Transit M10 The Council will promote Greenwich Waterfront Transit (GWT) and ensure that it is fully integrated with development proposals along the route by means of: i. Developments may give opportunities in this respect. ii. land reservations for Transit routes. Development and redevelopment gives opportunity for such improvements. or by the developer actually constructing the transit roadway as part of the development scheme. as well as for passengers to use buses in general. increases the efficient use of road space. ii. conventional highways etc. planning agreements with developers in line with Policy SC2. The Council will put forward specific measures in its Interim Local Implementation Plan (ILIP) as appropriate and resources allow. quality vehicles and stops.19 Priority for buses. and appropriate design of transit stops and access to them. Where possible the Council will press for physical segregation to enforce priority. Reason 7. • developer contributions to transit in cash (through S106 agreements). interim public transport arrangements. iv. which carry large numbers of people. and • integration of stops with high trip generators. The Mayor has agreed the scheme proceed as a bus based system to be built with upgrade capability to tram. The area through which transit will run is characterised by major areas of comprehensive redevelopment.20 GWT is a public transport system characterised by high levels of route segregation and priority. Special attention may be needed for buses at points of traffic congestion and at important junctions. The network will run west to east along the whole Waterfront from Greenwich serving North Greenwich Jubilee Line Station. Support other measures that assist passengers in using buses. Reason 7. This presents major opportunities in developing. Bus lanes also benefit cyclists and must allow for use by them.The accessibility of any system should be a major consideration in its design and preferred choice of technology. iii. The system could be a tram or some form of bus and would incorporate the existing segregated bus route from Charlton to North Greenwich.

which is one of four new Intermediate Mode schemes proposed in London. such as bus garages. People with disabilities and those coping with shopping and children. In particular. bus). Transport Interchanges 7. and integration with other transport networks (pedestrian.22 7. GWT is sought to be in place within the next 5-10 years and developer contributions are time limited. The new Jubilee Line station on the Greenwich Peninsula gives a major opportunity for new and expanded bus services to interchange with the Underground. access for people with disabilities. but within a reasonable timescale for all parties concerned. and westwards to Deptford/Conways Wharf. A comprehensive programme of interchange improvements at Greenwich. improvements to bus infrastructure and vehicles will promote greater usage. In considering proposals for development the Council will seek to retain and improve bus and rail facilities.25 Integration of public transport as far as possible into an integrated. and will. southwards to Eltham and Kidbrooke. Physical difficulties deter use. such as bus garages. transit will be given high levels of priority to ensure fast trip speeds. as do poorly integrated timetabling and different fares and tickets. but in its development and development control functions it can. cycle. is included in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). Developments which improve such facilities will be sympathetically considered by the Council. Development opportunities for this will be exploited where they arise. this should not preclude initial research into the scope for yet further extension. Consultation on the principle and general alignment of Greenwich Waterfront Transit (GWT) was carried out in Summer 2001. are particularly discriminated against by poorly designed and difficult facilities.27 Improved facilities encourage use of public transport. comprehensive and seamless system promotes passenger convenience and usage. is crucial in retaining and 136 MOVEMENT . new transport schemes referred to above (See Policies M8 and M10) will be expected to exploit full interchange with existing services.The scheme. particularly in respect of personal safety. Further detailed consultation on the alignment of additional phases of GWT may lead to safeguarding through Supplementary Guidance and subsequent reviews of the development plan. The Council can only advocate solutions to the latter problems. Also. Reason 7.24 M11 Good interchange within public transport and between public transport and private transport will be sought as opportunities arise. comprehensible.7. such as across the River via Blackwall/Thames Gateway Bridge. Woolwich and Eltham Town Centres will also be pursued with relevant agencies. reliability and punctuality. Many rail stations need physical improvement. and this will be operational by 2010.26 M12 The Council will work with relevant agencies on a programme of safer and improved stations. Reason 7. and this benefit needs to be extended further southwards in the Borough.The preferred route for part of Phase 1 (Abbey Wood to Woolwich) has been agreed in principle. Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities 7. Whilst actual implementation of GWT is the highest priority. attempt to ease problems of physical interchange. and improved buses/bus infrastructure. Consideration should also be given for the provision of cycle access and parking. This will assist securing the contribution.23 Elsewhere with on-street running. Essential bus infrastructure.

planning decisions to ensure major and higher density developments are focussed where accessibility is high. MOVEMENT 137 . vi further service development and extension to be pursued.29 It is necessary to know the existing pattern of public transport in the Borough in order to identify areas where it is deficient. 7.28 The Council will seek particular provision for women. capacity. Reason 7. Schemes for redevelopment will be examined to see if relevant new provision could be made. as male harassment can and does. Women are more dependent on buses than men and form the majority of bus passengers. The whole Borough is considered sensitive to over flying by all types of aircraft due to its predominantly residential nature. Accessibility M13 An “Accessibility Map” will be drawn up for the Borough to assess the coverage of the area by public transport modes. They have particular need in public places. Any planning applications for such a proposal would be required to address and make clear environmental impacts when submitted.. An ‘Accessibility Map’ is an important tool for integrated land use and transport planning – the Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL) map developed by TFL is available for this purpose as general guide.This will enable: i. such as rooms for feeding. often associated with child care. Reason 7. ii. Proposals in surrounding areas that are likely to cause over flying. existing or planned.As such. iii. Flights into Heathrow are becoming an increasing issue for the Borough. environmental and/or safety problems will normally be objected to. Heliports and Airports M14 Generally. Any proposals for the extension/intensification of use of London City Airport will be assessed as set out above.improving bus services. Parental facilities should also be available for men. unless material considerations arise which would justify or enable development in exceptional circumstances. occur. Heliports and like facilities will not be permitted in the Borough.30 In a built-up area like the Borough such forms of transport are intrusive. although the score for each site will need to be assessed on an individual basis. to areas where coverage is poor. etc. noise. and for women only to wait. particularly for buses. to promote public transport and to guide decisions about the scale and location of development. or approaching.Transport or other benefits are generally considered insufficient to outweigh environmental cost and the diversion of resources from more generally available transport facilities. reduced parking standards where access by alternatives to the car are plentiful and where the economy of the area will not be adversely affected. Consideration of further service development along routes that are at. reductions in existing levels of over flying will be sought and proposals generating an increase in noise and/or frequency will normally be opposed.

Shooters Hill Road/Well Hall Road Junction Filter Lane Provision (See Proposals Map / Site Schedule m7).This will be a key issue 7. Third Blackwall Crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown. possibly intermediate schemes. iii. Schemes (ii)(iii).The indicative priority order is: • a DLR extension to Woolwich (see paragraph 7. which would have dedicated lanes for public transport. and to give bus priority (where relevant).32 The Council does not support road schemes that lead to a generalised increase in road capacity. Schemes (i). Schemes (i). Schemes on the Transport for London Road Network (TLRN) will need agreement with TFL. (ii). (See Policy O23).16).g. (ii). iv. • a bridge between Barking and Thamesmead.g.Roads Safeguarded Schemes M15 The Council supports the following road schemes. (iv). These have been developed as a package that will significantly increase access by rail and will provide an improved level of access to the London Thames Gateway area for road based modes. ii. The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) states that “It is important for the road crossings to maximise regeneration benefits while minimising encouragement of additional car use. (iii). Proposals for the existing Beresford Street/Plumstead Road in Woolwich which creates major problems of environmental intrusion and severance are considered in the Town Centres chapter (paragraph 8. Schemes should also be designed to improve safety and convenience for pedestrians and cyclists.. Three possible river crossing schemes have been proposed.specific system to be determined). and • third Blackwall Crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown. car-based commuting. (See Proposals Map / Site Schedule m2). • Easing congestion and permitting traffic management to relieve surrounding areas. 7. (See Proposals Map / Site Schedule m3). especially those related to the economic development of the Borough e. not a bridge. All schemes supported by the Council are expected to pay due regard to environmental and aesthetic considerations in their execution and to their potential for creating or improving wildlife habitat. for which lands will be safeguarded as shown on the Proposals Map: i.31 Some Road improvement is necessary to provide for: • Strategic movements. Schemes under this policy are limited in nature and geared to either specific development/economic aims.18). The continued regeneration of the Docklands area and the Thames Gateway will require the provision of new river crossings. and • Environmental benefits e. Reason 7.g.33 138 MOVEMENT . and these are included in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). (No Safeguarding required as it is within the existing highway . transit vehicles etc. Deptford Church Street junction realignment. e. especially if they could be used for more radial. (iii). (iv). Should this crossing proceed the Council will require a tunnel. and/or adjustment to the road network to give environmental benefit elsewhere through extensive traffic management. trams.see Proposals Map / Site Schedule m6) Thames Gateway Bridge with a dedicated public transport corridor (for use only by public transport vehicles such as buses.

and function as main bus routes. iii. Roads are only to be constructed or improved when they serve primarily other purposes. or any future proposal. Reason 7. viz. it just provides for otherwise restrained demand. But strategic roads should not be such as to encourage the transfer of trips from public transport to car.35 New road construction can help meet movement needs. iii. Road Hierarchy M17 The Council will designate roads in the Borough as a hierarchy of strategic. they can provide an adequate level of service and in turn relieve local distribution and access roads of through traffic. London distributor roads are those which: MOVEMENT 139 . However.34 Road building alone does not relieve congestion. cyclists and buses in the allocation of (scarce) road space. To provide for longer journeys. the crossings. or in association with major public transport improvements/priority. and local distribution and access roads.The presumption should be in favour of the better management of the (finite) road space available. the design of junctions and the amount of traffic they should carry. Roads will not be sought where they provide merely an increase in capacity for general traffic. General Criteria for Road Schemes M16 In general the Council wishes to keep new road building in the Borough to an absolute minimum. environmental considerations will still dictate their size. and in particular for those by coaches and goods vehicles.Traffic here must not overwhelm the character of an area. The Council will apply the following criteria to highway planning: i. As a general rule the effectiveness of the use of roads should be measured in terms of the number of people moved rather than vehicles. to link the Thames Gateway Bridge directly to the A2 road or to threaten Oxleas Wood. in association with restraint policies. development/regeneration. Local distribution and access roads are those which: Are used by traffic passing through a particular area. and is therefore not sustainable.” The Borough is totally opposed to any possible resurrection of. To reduce traffic demands on London distributor roads so that. A complementary approach is to make the best use possible of existing roads. as set out below: Strategic roads will be roads whose function is: i. and design of. To link London to the National Road System serving the rest of the country. and buildings in the immediate vicinity. Link strategic roads. as well as providing access to land. Reason 7. ii.in the decision on. strategic centres. As such there should be a general presumption in favour of pedestrians. and/or as part of a programme of traffic management. This can be done by ii. but at a financial and land use cost. London distributor.

37 M19 140 MOVEMENT . New roads in new housing developments to be adopted will be required to have appropriate traffic calming measures incorporated in them before any dwelling is occupied. If introduced at the outset of a development. sensible and the right time to require developers to incorporate traffic calming measures into the design and construction of highways in housing developments that are to be adopted. under a planning obligation. in environmental areas. This will help assist and achieve conservation and environmental goals. The roads hierarchy will also guide traffic management and route signing strategies helping ensure appropriate traffic uses the most appropriate route. shoppers.defining roads in the Borough and structuring the use of them accordingly. resource availability and road capacities can be a major constraint.This will be done principally by an assessment of the severity of the traffic problem in an area. public demand and by reference to an area’s character. See also Policy H7. cyclists and people with disabilities. potential problems will be anticipated and the need for later remedial measures obviated. An Air Quality Management Area for the whole Borough has been declared to improve the local environment.This reflects the needs of road safety and the provision of high environmental standards in residential areas. The relationship of a development and associated scale of traffic generation/attraction to the roads hierarchy will be a material consideration in determining a planning application. due regard would need to be paid to the more vulnerable users pedestrians (especially children). visitors and others will take precedence over any traffic demands.38 It is desirable.36 By definition. with residential. shopping and places of town or landscape value ranking more highly than others in importance. to improve/conserve the environment. Areas for traffic management will be prioritised and progressed in the context of the Borough’s annual Borough Spending Plan (BSP) submission to TFL. Developments in such areas may be required. In managing the hierarchy. Reason 7. Special regard will be paid to the needs of pedestrians and cyclists when devising traffic management proposals. in pursuing schemes of traffic management. TFL is the Highways Authority for roads designated as part of the Transport for London Roads Network (TLRN). the provision of “Home Zones” will be encouraged to change the emphasis of residential roads to environmentally safer roads. and/or to promote road safety. Further. Environmental Areas M18 The Council defines Environmental Areas as those bounded by strategic/TLRN roads. 7. In such areas traffic management schemes will be devised as necessary to secure the removal of through/extraneous traffic. the needs of residents. Reason 7. London distributor roads and local distribution roads.Thus the priority of areas for treatment will have to be determined. Opportunities can also be taken to conserve or improve the physical fabric of such areas. to contribute towards traffic management schemes to mitigate any traffic impacts that may otherwise arise. and is a statutory consultee on proposals that might affect the network. However.

Specific Improvements M20 Other specific places where traffic management and environmental improvements will be pursued are as follows: • Greenwich. and Greenwich Peninsula / North Greenwich Station. Eltham and Woolwich Town Centres.39 These are important residential. In addition. Reason 7. MOVEMENT 141 . • Plumstead.The Council believes that in the context of environmental sustainability all agencies have a role in the common stewardship of the environment and should be able to demonstrate that their proposed actions have no significant detriment.Woolwich. Greenwich is a Conservation Area and World Heritage Site containing buildings and attractions of international importance. Developments in such areas may be required. Reason 7. shopping and work locations which are suffering badly from the effects of traffic. Relationship of Development to the Road Hierarchy and Town Centres M21 Development proposals generating or attracting significant amounts of traffic must pay full regard to the Road Hierarchy and environmental areas. under a planning obligation. The traffic volume is high and comprises a large proportion of heavy vehicles. There will also be a general presumption that major developments should seek to locate in the first instance at the major transport hubs in the Borough . • East Greenwich. Eltham and Greenwich Town Centres. Extensions to existing developments that exacerbate these problems will not be granted planning permission. promote good travel habits in children and give benefits to areas generally where they are sited. and East Greenwich. to relocate existing development causing traffic generation or attraction problems. and to the relationship of the development and access to/from it to public transport. to contribute towards traffic management schemes to mitigate any traffic impacts that may otherwise arise.Town centre uses will be subject to the sequential approach set out in Policy TC16. A safe routes to school programme will encourage less car use. development proposals likely to generate or attract significant amounts of traffic will not normally be permitted in such areas. Plumstead and Deptford have considerable areas of deprivation. Relocation of High Traffic Generators M22 The Council will undertake as need and resources dictate. • Deptford. For development with significant traffic generation/attraction potential it would assist the determination of any planning application if the developer were also to submit a statement showing what considerations have been given to minimising road traffic impacts.40 In order to protect the local environment and the local road system from heavy traffic. and • As part of a comprehensive programme of works to secure safe routes to schools. Such development will not normally be permitted in locations other than those immediately or highly adjacent to at least a London distributor or a higher order road.

41 Control and management of land use can help to prevent traffic and environmental problems arising. Because of the transitional character of the Borough the “Inner London” standards should apply to Greenwich Town Centre and other areas with a high PTAL rating.000 100-600 For the purpose of this policy “employment generating development” will apply to Use Classes A2. and the parking strategy determined for a town centre. but also existing. ii. land uses and development. i. The first principle to be applied is that generally these should be located in town centres (large and small shops) or established parades (small shops).Reason 7. Exceptions will be judged on their merits. This applies not only to new. M25 For residential developments the maximum provision for parking should be one space per unit. m. and where there is adequate on street parking space. public transport accessibility. 142 MOVEMENT . iii. Generally. Car Parking Standards M23 The standards for car parking for new developments in The London Plan should be applied. B1. For conversions one space (maximum) off street for every additional unit should be provided except: i. B2. Generally there should be no specific provision for visitor parking. iv. Otherwise standards for retail uses as set out in the Mayor’s London Plan will apply as set out in Table M2. The standards are maxima. gross floor space) the onus should first be on the developer to justify the scale of provision proposed by reference to parking already available in the whole town centre. For large shops (in excess of 500 sq. where this would necessitate the complete loss of front gardens. M24 For Shops (Use Class A1) the following principles and standards will apply. and “Outer” elsewhere in the Borough viz: Area Inner London (Greenwich Town Centre and areas with a high PTAL rating) Outer London (Rest of the Borough) One off street space per m2 gross floor space: 600-1. Otherwise standards set out above in (iii) will apply. For non-food retail warehouses the onus should first be on the developer to justify the scale of provision proposed. B8. for small shops parking provision off site is not required.These apply to employment generating development and are maxima. ii. Such gardens are an important street amenity and their complete loss to parking will not be considered.

In some such circumstances (almost) zero provision of car parking would be appropriate. agreement with the developer that pricing and management structures should be subject to Council approval. enable schemes to fit into central urban sites. Theatres. Public Houses. In residential areas where on street parking is already under pressure. Reasons for M23 to M27 7. iii. and in areas of high public transport accessibility standards should be even lower i. ii. Hotels. i. equity and the management of the overall stock of car parking provision. In lieu. that spaces provided in a scheme are generally available and not use specific. iv. landscaping.43 7. Restaurants. the developer to provide a justification for parking levels proposed. reduce the land-take of development. even less parking provision than might otherwise be considered acceptable or appropriate. Maximum standards should be used as part of a package of measures to promote sustainable transport choices. the environment. Bed & Breakfasts. cycle and pedestrian provision through S106 agreements. Other large institutional developments e. There is. Parking controls can have a major impact on how people choose to travel. particularly in the case of large shopping and mixed use developments.. to be determined on its merits. promote linked-trips and access to development for those without use of a car and to tackle congestion. provision for people with disabilities (‘Reducing Mobility Handicaps’ by the Institute of Highways and Transportation is a relevant guide).e. ii. 7. Sheltered/nursing homes: One space for every 3 separate dwelling units. They give opportunity as an effective tool of traffic restraint and reduction assisting the Council to meet its obligations under the Road Traffic Reduction Act. with each to be considered on its merits..g.42 The London Plan recommends maximum levels of parking for broad classes of development. iii.M26 Parking standards for other developments will be as follows:These are maxima.g. public spaces etc. Leisure Facilities etc. developers would be expected to contribute to public transport. public transport and other alternatives.44 MOVEMENT 143 . hospitals:A comprehensive parking strategy will be required of the developer. v. monitoring and reviews of usage over time so that as public transport improves and car usage declines. spaces that are under-utilised can be released and re-used for other purposes e. M27 In all cases decisions on parking provision should also incorporate a consideration of the following principles: i. other development. an inevitable tension with regeneration/redevelopment objectives which needs to be resolved. The standards described attempt to strike a reasonable balance between the needs of a development and a reasonable desire to have car access and considerations of sustainability. lower than 1:1 provision of off-street parking may be inappropriate. however.

road safety schemes controlled parking zone(s). Service Areas M29 New industrial. vi. sight lines. as far as possible within the curtilage of the development. 144 MOVEMENT . is necessary to service developments properly. shopping and commercial developments will be expected to provide adequate service areas. For some developments no substantive general parking may be desirable. iv. loading/unloading. housing. vii improvement to Public Transport. and viii public off street parking. minimising intrusion into the street scene and potentially hazardous manoeuvres on the public highway. provision for cyclists. In particular where it is not possible or desirable to include parking spaces in a development the Council may consider an acceptable alternative to be a contribution from the developer towards the following. ii. for the following community benefits. v. while. provision for pedestrians. iii. etc. Reason 7. especially where emergency vehicle access is concerned. at the same time. the Council will seek developer contributions and apply conditions on planning permissions. Planning permission may be refused if standards are inadequate.Community Benefits M28 Generally. Provision for emergency service access must also be made. Reason 7.46 Adequate space for turning.45 New developments where relevant should contribute to transport infrastructure as a community benefit in order that they are served in a sustainable way. In these instances alternative provision or alternative contributions would be sought. in priority order: i. in line with Policy SC2. road network improvements. and so that vehicles can leave the site forwards.. traffic management.

some provision for off-street public car parks is necessary. Private residential gardens play an important amenity and ecological role in urban areas and make a positive contribution to the street scene. iv. and where scope exists through the use of parts of estate greens to provide off-street parking commensurate with safeguarding local environmental standards. environmentally important areas. where such off-street parking could be contemplated. Matters to consider would include the: i. Necessary parking to facilitate interchange with public transport is also necessary in the main centres of the Borough. In housing estates where on-street parking is a problem. iii. commensurate with safeguarding the needs of local residents. ii. care will be exercised in not providing too lavish a level of public parking in certain areas where it would encourage inappropriate levels of car use to the detriment of the environment. areas of need.49 MOVEMENT 145 . retrograde. etc. and where public transport is an alternative. would be where on-street parking would aggravate the safety and free flow of traffic and pedestrians in the area. by a number of types of transport. and certain important routes would particularly benefit by such a package of control and provision. It is necessary to regard all Parking Policies as being complementary. v. environmental standards and the beneficial functioning of land and business. iv. needs of shoppers/visitors.Their loss to bland tarmac or paved areas is. shopping. Transport interchanges (Woolwich. 7.). Developments will need to take into account parking policies in the Borough. v.Together they are designed to ensure sufficient access to important activities (work. An exceptional circumstance. However. Reason for M30 and M31 7. M31 For each town centre a comprehensive car parking strategy will be prepared. prevention of long stay commuter parking. In connection with traffic management schemes. the Council will seek to establish appropriate off-street public parking in the following areas: i. Eltham. Town Centres. However.Off-Street Public Parking M30 Having regard to the principle of sustainability in modes of transport. Main commercial/shopping/service centres. especially around rail stations and in areas of need. ii. Greenwich). adequate Kiss and Ride and taxi facilities will also be sought at rail and bus stations. such development does not require planning permission and the Council will therefore seek to bring the conversion of private residential garden space to off-street car parking fully within planning control. in particular compatibility with town centre parking strategies will be required. Where environmental benefits would be gained. where congestion would arise. iii. Parking can be controlled by a combination of time and/or price to ensure its most effective and appropriate use. accordingly. and economic vitality of the town centre.47 As a corollary to on-street parking restrictions. extension of CPZ areas.48 7. volume of spaces and pricing.

iv. iii. road and traffic management schemes by: i. 146 MOVEMENT . Providing cycle parking facilities. unobtrusive. as appropriate. However. (women. The needs of cyclists will be particularly pursued in all new development. New residential developments. such as improved junction design will also be implemented where possible and required. the provision of cycle routes will not be conditioned on this. unsuitable facilities for cycle parking also need to be reviewed. In particular. the riverside walk and the Green Chain will be examined in this context. The Borough will press relevant agencies to maintain/provide free cycle carriage on rail/riverbus. Provision for secure cycle parking and other cyclists needs will be a condition on planning permissions for major new developments. Existing.These should be sufficient in number. Providing cycle routes in accordance with the London Cycle Network (LCN). Freeing cyclists from the restrictions of existing and proposed traffic management schemes. or experiencing poverty). Specific provision for the cyclist will encourage greater use of the bike. the unwaged and those residents living in. While segregated cycle routes are often the safest. and developer contributions to cycle provision/networks will also be sought as appropriate in line with Policy SC2. Other physical provision. ii. Reason 7. Cycling can give those otherwise less mobile in the Borough. particularly schemes with flats. (See Table M1). The use of footpaths in general. particularly in conjunction with major traffic attractors/generators and new developments.Thames Cycle Route and evolving local network (see Map 11). as will their provision in association with new development and road schemes. personal doorto-door and efficient transport. as segregation is often not achievable.Cycling M32 Cycling will be promoted in the Borough. that use must be made safe. safe and in well-lit areas. and cycle use of bus lanes will be promoted. safe cycle routes to schools will also be implemented. major new developments will be expected to provide secure cycle parking and facilities for showers. Cycle parking standards are shown in Table M1. will be expected to provide secure cycle storage/parking spaces. drying out or changing clothes on arrival in bad weather. As a standard condition. quiet. non-polluting and efficient relative to resources consumed. Where possible these will be physically segregated from other road users.50 Cycling is beneficial to the individual. access to cheap. the young. It will be promoted through a variety of mechanisms including the London Cycling Action Plan.

Map 11: Cycle Network © Crown copyright Proposed London Strategic Network Existing London Strategic Network Proposed Thames Cycle Route and links Existing Thames Cycle Routes and links MOVEMENT 147 .

Schemes should allow for this as appropriate. should make provision for reserved parking and setting down/picking up points for vehicles for people with disabilities and less mobile people and suitable waiting areas should be provided. so provision is important. Careful design of the pedestrian environment to enable access for people with disabilities is also particularly important. open spaces. Safety and convenience are major objectives. ensuring they are well lit. Ensure safe and convenient facilities for crossing roads and at transport interchanges. vi. safe and well maintained. iii. look first of all at mechanisms to modify or calm driver behaviour rather than restricting ease of pedestrian movement.52 148 MOVEMENT . accessibility and convenience will be promoted by the Council. Many pedestrian facilities are capable of shared use with and for the benefit of cyclists. iv. A safe pedestrian environment is particularly important for women and older people who would otherwise hesitate to go out for fear of harassment and attack. In particular. Greenwich. Introduce pedestrian (priority) areas. such as children and those without direct access to cars. Centres where it will be particularly sought are at Woolwich. People with Disabilities .Access in Public Areas M34 The Council will take into account the needs of people with disabilities in the exercise of its functions that affect the environment (including planning and development control). new development to which the public will have access. Support improvement of the river foot tunnels at Greenwich and Woolwich. as appropriate but especially in Town Centres. Walking is also an important means of getting to and from public transport services and is involved in most other journeys. In particular the Council will seek to: i. Use its powers of development control in the pedestrian’s interests and in its role as Highway Authority have regard to the needs of people with disabilities in the design of highway improvements and pedestrianisation schemes and the requirements of people with visual impairments in the design of pedestrian crossings. Pedestrianisation and better pedestrian facilities can provide major townscape and environmental benefits. Expand the development of a network of pedestrian only priority routes. viii. Plumstead and Eltham. Green Chain. ii.Pedestrians M33 High standards of pedestrian safety. ensure the needs of pedestrians and people with disabilities are fully provided for. Pedestrianisation will be sought where possible. Reason 7. In determining planning applications and securing S106 agreements in line with Policy SC2. When introducing road safety measures. So will provision of a segregated network of paths linking major centres and open spaces by the incorporation of existing paths and the use of opportunities afforded by the riverside. signed. v. 7.Walking is particularly important for certain people.51 Walking is an important means of travel in its own right. road closure and redevelopment schemes. vii. Generally improve the pedestrian environment. New developments and the redevelopment of existing public areas should seek to deal with such problems and will be assessed accordingly. Every trip has a pedestrian element in it. It will be promoted through a variety of mechanisms including the Walking Plan for London. and accounts for about a quarter of all London’s journeys.

the provision of noise insulation for properties adversely affected will be sought. iv. Where lorry traffic is considered acceptable. door-to-door transport to get about at all. As resources allow and where necessary.Reason 7.53 The Council constructs and manages public buildings. Opportunities to provide reserved parking spaces for Dial-a-Ride and community transport vehicles adjacent to seated waiting areas for older people with disabilities in developments will be examined where relevant. etc.54 7. pinch points.The Council recognises that for reasons of safety and cost effectiveness. Reason 7. iii. etc. Often this need can only be met by organisations with specific expertise and operating outside the framework of more conventional forms of transport. By 2000 almost 70% of pedestrian crossings in the Borough were accessible to people with disabilities. the provision of grants to purchase and operate mini buses for community and voluntary sector groups is best achieved in partnership with local community transport operators. Development proposals need to allow for reserved parking and setting down points near the centre of towns. only Strategic Routes are really capable of accepting major lorry flows. difficult roads in conjunction with land use areas of high sensitivity (Conservation Areas. (See Policies D1 and M27).TFL is a key partner in developing freight strategies. as resources permit. Many people with disabilities need specialist. 7. and that Strategic and London Distributor roads are the main freight network.57 Lorries using narrow. designation and signing of lorry routes. road improvement. local area lorry bans. the provision of community transport initiatives such as Dial-a-Ride. In general. the programme of dropped kerbs initiated by the Council will be sustained. streets.This will involve consideration with other road authorities of: i. While conventional public transport remains inaccessible to many people with disabilities. ii. Gadabout. residential roads being used only in the last resort for direct access. MOVEMENT 149 . which are designed to meet the transport needs of community groups and people with disabilities. For example.56 Freight Restriction on Road Freight M35 Road freight movements should be confined to suitable routes. as far as possible. and encouraging developments that minimise freight movement by road. adequate provision must be made for the parking of vehicles to set down and pick up passengers close to Town Centres. open spaces. It is recognised that the transport needs of community groups and people with disabilities are inadequately served by other forms of transport. Mobility Schemes The Council will support. v. residential streets. leisure facilities. and conditions on relevant planning permissions that require the applicant to have a freight movement policy that is approved by the Council. these will be changed to permit access and use by people with disabilities.) are particularly intrusive and environmentally damaging. Taxi-Card and the community transport scheme.55 7.

or the provision of more satisfactory means of access. buildings. Proposals using these may be given more sympathetic consideration than those which do not. Water Borne Freight M37 The Council will support proposals which increase the proportion of freight in the Borough that is water borne. Reason for M38 and M39 7.Rail Freight M36 In association with the Strategic Rail Authority. Reason 7. etc. This is within the Borough’s designated Aggregates Zone and is used for the transshipment of aggregates. should be considered as available.58 Generally. Transference to rail can help ease traffic congestion on roads. 150 MOVEMENT . The use to be made of existing or proposed wharves will be an important consideration in determining relevant planning applications. Areas of High Freight Accessibility are most likely to be those where close access is possible to the strategic road network. Some development sites could be integrated into the rail network and grant aid for new track. Policy W5 provides specific policy guidance on wharves which are formally safeguarded for river-based freight traffic. Network Rail and the rail freight operators the Council will do all in its power to encourage the greater use of the rail system to carry freight. subject to appropriate environmental and amenity safeguards. The main rail freight facility in the Borough is at Angerstein Wharf. movement of freight by rail is more environmentally acceptable and resource efficient.60 Many problems of freight traffic can be avoided by appropriately locating relevant land uses to begin with.59 The advantages of water borne freight are similar to those of rail. rail sidings and wharves without detriment to the environment. (See Policy W5). Much industrial land has water access and existing wharf facilities. Areas of High Freight Accessibility M38 Developments generating or attracting large amounts of freight traffic will normally be expected to locate within areas of high freight accessibility. with a view to their relocation. sidings. Land west of White Hart Road is also designated as a rail freight site. if necessary. The use to be made of the rail system for freight will be an important consideration in determining relevant planning applications Reason 7.These will be designated in due course through supplementary planning guidance. Relevant proposals may be refused planning permission if they are poorly related to such areas. Adverse Effect of Freight on the Environment M39 Existing land uses generating or attracting large amounts of freight traffic to the detriment of the environment of sensitive areas will be examined.

Suitable permanent.61 Coach traffic passing through the Borough and stopping/parking on the street is a problem. Coach layover has been removed from the Cutty Sark environs as part of an environmental upgrade of the area. to accommodate the needs of visitor/tourist coaches commensurate with safeguarding the local environment. Coach Parking Strategies will be drawn up for Greenwich Town Centre/World Heritage Site.Coaches M40 Developments generating/attracting coach traffic (leisure and/or commuter) will need to make provision for dropping off and picking up. and may be a reason for refusal of planning permission. provision for commuter coach parking will not be made in the Borough.At key tourist locations appropriate drop off and layover provision will be sought for visitors coaches. and other locations that attract significant numbers of tourist coaches. Reason 7. Generally. coach manoeuvring and parking on site. particularly at visitor attractions such as Greenwich Town Centre. M41 M42 MOVEMENT 151 . The scale of coach traffic generated will need to be justified. Eltham and Woolwich Town Centres. replacement off-street provision is required but has yet to be secured. Developments may give opportunities to achieve this as a partnership with the Council.

TABLE M1: CYCLE PARKING STANDARDS Location Category Land Use Location Category Business Offices. colleges Pubs. Services Light Industrial General Industrial Warehouses Food Retail Non-Food Retail Garden Centre Primary Schools Secondary Schools Universities. Sports Centres. Cinemas Leisure. Health Centres and Clinics Libraries Hospitals Rail Stations Bus Stations Cycle Parking Standard 1/125m2 with minimum of 2 space 1/250m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1/500m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1/500m2 with minimum of 2 spaces Out of town 1/350m2 Town centre/local shopping centre 1/125m2 Out of town 1/1500m2 with minimum of 4 spaces Town centre/local shopping centre 1/300m2 1/300m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 10 staff 1 Space per 10 staff/students 1 space per 8 staff/students 1/100m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1/50m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 20 seats with minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 50 seats with a minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 10 staff plus 1 space per 20 peak period visitors 1 space per 2 students 1 space per unit 1 space per 5 staff plus 1 space per 5 staff for visitors 1 space per 10 staff plus 1 space per 10 staff for visitors 1 space per 5 staff plus 1 space per 10 staff for visitors See DOT 1996 TAL 3/96 Meet local demand Places of Work B1/A2 B1 B2 B8 Shopping A1 A1 A1 Educational D1 D1 D1 Entertainment A4 A5 A3 D2 D2 Housing Community C2 C3 D1 D1 C2 Transport Source: London Cycle Network Design Manual (1998) 152 MOVEMENT . Cafes Theatres. Swimming Pools Student Accommodation Flats Doctor and Dentist Surgeries. Wine Bars Fast Food Takeaway Restaurants.

000 sqm GFA) Food superstore (over 2.500 sqm net sales or 4.000 sqm GFA) Non food warehouse Garden centre Town centre / shopping mall Source: London Plan (2004) 4 to 2 1 maximum 1 space per X square metres gross floor area 75 50-35 30 45-30 30-20 18 38-25 60-40 65-45 75-50 25-18 50-30 45-30 50-35 15 30 25 30 MOVEMENT 153 .TABLE M2: RETAIL CAR PARKING STANDARDS PTAL 6 inner / 5 outer London & 5 Retail land use Smaller food store (up to 500 sqm GFA) Food supermarket (up to 2.500 sqm net sales or 4.

154 MOVEMENT .

TOWN CENTRES 155 . amenity. visitors and the business community. They are appropriate locations for a variety of town centre uses scaled to serve the population of their sub-region without harming the vitality and viability of Woolwich or Eltham. and to preserve and enhance historic buildings. The Plan promotes the regeneration and revitalisation of the Borough’s network of Town (Major. iii. commercial viability and sustainability of the Borough’s Town Centres as retail. usually including a small supermarket. Greenwich is the Borough’s largest District Centre. workers and visitors. ii. comfort. Proposals that serve this wider market must respect both its heritage and its service role to local residents. as set out below and in Tables TC1.8. The general policies for Town Centres and retailing are: STC1 To safeguard and improve the vitality. and to reduce congestion and pollution in town centres by promoting public transport. leisure and other town centre uses. and linked trips. By virtue of their accessibility and existing diversity of use. and other important heritage features. and the Borough’s largest and second shopping and office employment centres respectively. they are considered the most appropriate locations for a range of activities that attract and serve Borough residents.They are preferred locations for larger scale development in retail. Seven Local Centres offer a moderate range of shopping and service activities. STC3 To safeguard and enhance safety. cultural and community facilities. including retailing. STC4 To promote a high standard of design in town centre buildings and public and civic spaces. TOWN CENTRES GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 8.TC2 and TC3: i. and the environment within the Borough’s town centres for residents. service and residential centres for residents. as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area. residential. walking. cycling. employment. District and Local Centres. security. STC2 To support the Borough’s Town Centre hierarchy of Major. iv. Provision of a minimum range of retailing and services will be safeguarded. Six District Centres offer a significant range of both comparison shopping and a supermarket or range of food shops. Retail developments will be subject to need and sequential testing. arts. A new Local Centre will be developed by Kidbrooke Station. leisure. STC5 To improve town centre accessibility by a choice of means of transport.1. Woolwich and Eltham are designated Major Centres. leisure and entertainment. commercial and public services. and in addition a major visitor destination and an inscribed World Heritage Site. 32 Neighbourhood Parades complement the formal retail heirarchy and typically have less than 20 shops offering basic convenience goods and services within walking distance. and its network of Neighbourhood Parades. and are suitable locations for appropriately scaled town centre uses to serve their local catchment. access. District and Local Centres) and Neighbourhood Parades.

000 m2 could be A3.300 4.030 78.TABLE TC1:TOWN CENTRE HIERARCHY AND TOTAL RETAIL (A1/2/3) FLOORSPACE Location Total floorspace (m2 gross) Durable / Convenience Service / comparison Other Vacant Planning Permission Major Centres 1 (50-100. Site rear / west of Lidl.TC3 and Proposal Map.300 75.830 116.000 79.000 2.220 3.000 3.830 27.550 Sources: GOAD.200 66.850 14.360 9.750 8.460 3. Permission at Woolwich Royal Arsenal: 12-14.260 64.000 177.050 2.250 32.400 78.050 8. Retail warehouses and supermarkets.100 53.000 3.450 35.000 m2 floorspace) Woolwich 2 Eltham District Centres 1 (10-30. 9. See tables TC2.600 5.400 50.400 12.000 5. Permission granted in 2000 at Greenwich Reach East. plus East Greenwich 2.850 400 1.850 220.000 10.930 3. 6. Outline planning permission granted to Meridian Delta Limited for up to 31.500 21. Borough records and estimates 2003/4 Notes to Table TC1 1.950 12. See table TC2 and Proposal Map 4. Blackheath and Lee Green are mainly located in Lewisham. Major/district centres as defined in the London Plan.570 300 1.500 6. Permission (outline) for non-food retail off Brocklebank Road/Bugsby’s Way.300 16.950 15.950 287.050 3.420 43. 8.300 11.450 9. mostly on Woolwich Road or Bugsby’s Way.350 91.880 1.050 5.000 m2 floorspace) 3 West Greenwich 4 East Greenwich Blackheath 5 Lee Green 5 Plumstead High Street Thamesmead Larger town centres Local Centres & Neighbourhood Parades 6 7 Local Centres. 5. 32 Parades 6 ALL CENTRES / PARADES Out-of-centre 7.2 Background Town centres provide an important social and economic focus for the districts and communities they serve.920 25. Collectively they offer a broad mix of facilities. 8 All superstores / retail warehouses Greenwich Peninsula 9 TOTAL 71. services and jobs in locations accessible to the widest range of people by a choice of modes of transport. 7.850 104.300 12.While retailing normally underpins these 156 TOWN CENTRES .000 4.530 0 0 0 0 0 41.550 365.880 7.370 22. 3.350 53.350 sqm A3 on Greenwich Peninsula including within the Millennium Dome.000 500 19.10. Excludes stand-alone local shops.180 4.000 0 21.000 4.000 6.200 5. mostly A3 with ancillary/non destination A1 only.600 11.000 sqm (gross) A1 and A2 and up to 19. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 8. of which up to c.250 37.450 n/a 2.620 11.880 61.000 m2 .750 1.880 21. Reviving the Borough’s town centres is a key objective of the Greenwich Strategy (2003).

After a difficult period of general decline and retail contraction in the early to late 1990’s. have led to a selective resurgence in town centre fortunes. without unduly compromising local services accessible to less mobile residents. the Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 Update) notes that Woolwich remains vulnerable to competition and needs to improve its retail offer and market share to consolidate its recovery. Greenwich is the most significant of the Borough’s District Centres as designated in the London Plan. Woolwich is constrained to the north by the Thames.5 8. the Borough’s town centres face stiff competition from out-of-centre retail developments that provide extensive free car parking. In addition the Arsenal redevelopment. office conversions and planning permissions elsewhere in the town centre provide a development pipeline of at least 3. The Council is using its role as planning authority to ensure that the Arsenal integrates with and complements the existing town centre. creating a demand for extended opening hours for retail and leisure activities. It is designated as a Major Centre in the London Plan. On the other. civic and community services.These include Bluewater and concentrations of retail warehousing such as Charlton. Activities such as tourism.The western end of the Arsenal and the adjacent Warren Lane development site are being promoted for mixed-use development including commercial leisure uses such as a multiplex cinema. UK leisure spending doubled in real terms in the last quarter of the 20th Century. the Royal Observatory and the former Royal Naval College (a campus for Greenwich University and 8. Riverside walk and Riverside Park is hampered by the busy A206. community. It is therefore important that on the one hand planning policies for the Borough both promote retail investment and protect the retail activity that remains. employment or residential use can in turn boost a flagging retail sector by attracting new customers. in partnership with the London Development Agency. and recognised to be in need of regeneration. tourism and leisure uses. and office employment.3 Curbs on further out-of-centre development following introduction of the Sequential Approach in PPS6 Planning for Town Centres. Part of the town centre falls within the inscribed Greenwich Maritime World Heritage Site. they must also facilitate the emergence of complementary. including the assembly and compulsory purchase of key development sites.7 8. In this regard the threat to the retail role of some of the Borough’s centres is also an opportunity. Borough Town Centres Woolwich is the Borough’s main centre for shopping.6 8. The redevelopment of redundant sites and conversion of underused premises can allow diversification into more sustainable roles. Through the Woolwich Regeneration Agency the Council is also taking a more proactive role.Woolwich is experiencing renewed investment and interest stimulated by regeneration of the historic Woolwich Royal Arsenal. 8. rather than competing with existing retail functions in Woolwich. Some of the Borough’s town centres have experienced a decline in both convenience and durable goods shopping. The Arsenal is being redeveloped for a mix of uses including heritage tourism.000 new dwellings within the town centre. leisure. and a preferred location for employment. alternative or ‘niche’ roles where this would benefit the overall vitality and viability of a centre. An increasing number of people are working hours that differ from the traditional working week. However. yet access to the Royal Arsenal.other activities. and increasing vacancy levels that threaten their retail role and viability.4 8. other regeneration programmes and the planned extension of the Docklands Light Railway. a figure likely to be significantly exceeded as other sites come forward over the Plan period. Woolwich is the Borough’s priority location for major retail and multiplex development. in conjunction with other social trends and a buoyant economy in the late 1990’s. internationally famous for its historic monuments. including the National Maritime Museum. It offers a major opportunity to diversify and transform Woolwich by stimulating the re-use of town centre development sites and redundant buildings.8 TOWN CENTRES 157 .

on identified sites and elsewhere as opportunities arise. Greenwich is a visitor destination of international status.9 Greenwich received a major boost with the completion of two new stations on the Dockland Light Rail extension to Lewisham. is a significant employment centre and secondary office location. There is scope for tourism development to capitalise on these historic assets. Local Centres and Neighbourhood Parades primarily offer convenience and ‘top up’ shopping and services to their localities. District Centres. and the interests of local residents and businesses. competing centres.although its modest size leaves it vulnerable to competition from larger. and the Borough’s second largest retail centre. adopted by the Council as Supplementary Planning Guidance (April 2000. to be updated).13 Policies CENTRE-SPECIFIC POLICIES TOWN CENTRE TC1 The Council will seek to ensure that the reuse and redevelopment of the Woolwich Royal Arsenal and Warren Lane site integrate and connect with. concluding that the centre is relatively healthy . and discussed further in the West Greenwich Development Framework. of particular benefit to the less mobile and the large number of households in the Borough that do not have access to a car. Some such as Plumstead High Street and Blackheath perform niche roles. The DLR has also created new opportunities for commercial. and complement and enhance. Greenwich also suffers from heavy through traffic and other environmental problems.11 8. It complements Woolwich by providing a community focus for residents in the south of the Borough. They play an essential role in maintaining a sustainable pattern of retailing and service provision within walking distance of the communities they serve.Trinity Music College).The Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 update) noted it has a stronger retail role than Woolwich. Architectural attractions are complemented by the historic Greenwich Market and a wide range of pubs and restaurants. with specialist Asian shopping and an extensive range of restaurants respectively. 158 TOWN CENTRES . In general the smaller centres contain a lower level of retail activity than larger centres. Tudor Barn and Well Hall Pleasaunce. the needs of visitors. providing direct access to Canary Wharf and the City of London. 8. These are identified on the Proposals Inset Map. a role that will be enhanced during the seven year South Greenwich SRB5 regeneration programme. This is helping to bring forward a range of development proposals. Woolwich as the Borough’s most important centre. cultural and creative activities on nearby sites in underused parts of Deptford Creek. 8. Others such as Blackheath Hill are in prolonged decline with little remaining retail function. Additional retail and leisure refurbishment or redevelopment will be supported within the town centre. Eltham is a designated Major Centre in the London Plan.The Plan seeks to balance protection and enhancement of the historic environment. further guidance on design issues in the public realm it set out in the Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual (1999).The majority of the area within the defined town centre boundary falls within either the West Greenwich or Greenwich Park Conservation Areas.12 8. and will benefit further from plans to increase the DLR’s passenger capacity. In addition to the policies in this Plan. and have higher levels of service uses and vacancy.10 8. despite having a relatively large number of units. Eltham is also conveniently located for the Green Chain Walk and important visitor attractions including Eltham Palace. and conflicts between its roles as a major visitor destination and a local shopping centre.

Follow-up work in 2007/8 will also look at opportunities in. The Council will support developments in tourism. the surrounding area. and in particular its retail role. which are suitable for mixed use. Collectively these schemes will substantially extend and diversify the town centre.The Warren Lane (‘teardrop’) site is designated for mixed use.15 Woolwich has the largest retail floor space of any centre in the Borough.The Council aims to ensure that those elements that have yet to be finalised also complement.The Royal Arsenal redevelopment is progressing in accordance with the approved Master Plan (1998. under review).Reason 8. the southwestern part of the Royal Arsenal. and most of it is also designated as a Conservation Area. Reason 8. Town Centres are acknowledged to be suitable locations for retail. office. vitality and viability of Woolwich. Reason 8. adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance. There is expenditure capacity based on current trends to accommodate a significant increase in both convenience (supermarket) and High Street comparison-shopping. and despite environmental and shopfront improvements is in need of further modernisation. It also has a number of underused. leisure. the centre’s existing functions. The Council will seek to ensure that the former Greenwich University Calderwood Street site in Woolwich Town Centre (Site Schedule mu27) is developed for a mix of uses to include activitygenerating town centre uses. rather than compete with. but has experienced persistent shop vacancy in its western fringes. and TC2 TC3 TC4 TOWN CENTRES 159 . currently under review). the evening economy and town centre living that contribute to the diversity.17 The Council is seeking replacement uses that will make a similarly broad contribution to the Woolwich economy within a comprehensive mixed-use development.These principles formed the basis of the Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (1998 & 2000 update. Increasing the resident town centre population will in turn support and boost its shops and businesses. residential. It adjoins. culture. and further guidance is provided in The Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft. and has potential to consolidate its existing role in value retailing . It is a unique part of Britain’s military and industrial heritage. It is therefore the Borough’s priority location for major retail investment. These issues are examined in more detail in the emerging revised Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework. containing 18 listed buildings. Reason 8.a market niche that is growing in importance. where heritage uses are concentrated. A range of potential development sites are identified in the Site Schedules. a natural route into Powis Street. by facilitating increases in the quality. quantity and variety of retail floor space in the centre.14 The 31-hectare Royal Arsenal site is a designated Mixed Use Area (see Policy W3). older office buildings.16 Woolwich will become a major visitor focus but currently lacks appropriate facilities to complement its retail and service functions. entertainment. leisure led development (Site Schedule mu13). leisure. and is being jointly marketed with. and enhance its appeal as a destination for Borough residents and visitors. two of which are being converted to residential use. The Council seeks to revitalise Woolwich as the Borough’s primary shopping centre. equivalent to a 40% increase above currently trading floorspace. and wider integration with. It occupies a pivotal position between the Arsenal and Macbean Street. revised 2000). The Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 update) identifies a need to claw back substantial trade leakage to surrounding centres.

National Maritime Museum and extending outside the town centre to include the Royal Park. as defined on the Proposals Map. TC5 The Council will seek to secure safer and more convenient pedestrian and cycle access to and within the town centre. These schemes are promoted in the London Plan and the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). and to improve safety and environmental quality in the town centre. which also presents an opportunity for associated retail/commercial development (see Site Schedule mu14 and the Woolwich Interchange Planning Brief. Views and vistas to and from the World Heritage Site will also be protected by ensuring that developments in the buffer zone of the Site or directly visible from it are visually sympathetic. seafaring. the waterfront and the Royal Arsenal. in recognition of its outstanding and internationally significant universal value.18 To improve the accessibility of Woolwich by public and non-motorised transport. M10 and M11). The Council will safeguard the alignment of Crossrail and the extension of the Docklands Light Railway to Woolwich.The Council also formally supports the Greenwich Waterfront Transit route Abbey Wood. It comprises one of the finest and most dramatically sited architectural and landscape ensembles in the British Isles. Development within it should preserve and enhance its essential and unique character and appearance. The Council is pursuing a package of measures to reduce the severance caused by Beresford Street/Plumstead Road including traffic calming and visual improvements. Safeguarding also remains in place for a rail link by tunnel between Silvertown and Woolwich (See also Policies M8. safeguarded under Policy M8. 2002). It includes the historic centre of the town with the architectural masterpieces and designed landscape of the Old Royal Naval College. Part of the site is Grade II Listed. to reduce the need to travel by car. especially for residents without access to a car.The severance of the Royal Arsenal and Warren Lane sites from the town centre by Beresford Street/Plumstead Road is an impediment to their redevelopment to support town centre regeneration. Reason 8. The safeguarded trans-London Crossrail routes are supported in principle (see Site Schedule m5). and the Council is promoting inclusion of a Crossrail station at Woolwich. The Council will seek to secure provision of an integrated transport interchange incorporating Woolwich Arsenal station. via Woolwich. Woolwich Town Centre is a suitable location for such major trip generating uses due to its accessibility to staff and the public by a variety of forms of public transport. Reason 8.20 The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site was inscribed in 1997 under the 1972 World Heritage Convention. and to capitalise on the opportunity for associated retail and commercial development.19 The Council has expressed its formal support for the proposed Docklands Light Railway Extension to Woolwich from City Airport and the Royal Docks. It formed the sixteenth World Heritage Site in the UK. Greenwich Town Centre TC7 The Council will protect and enhance the site and setting of the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site. and between the town centre. royalty and the TC6 160 TOWN CENTRES . Reason 8.The strong historical association of the area with shipbuilding. to Greenwich. A site has been identified for a new transport interchange with the DLR near Woolwich Arsenal station. and will promote and support the provision of Greenwich Waterfront Transit to serve Woolwich town centre. the navy.education functions (PPS6 Planning for Town Centres).

It sets out aims and objectives for the Site and a programme of long and short-term actions. to make Greenwich unique. The Stockwell Street Planning Brief (2000) provides advice for the largest development site in the core of the town centre (Site Schedule mu3). For shop-fronts and signs within Greenwich Town Centre the Council has produced two design guidelines. students and visitors. tourism. Refurbishment or new development in Greenwich must be appropriately scaled. vitality and viability of 8. and there is a need to improve the range of accommodation and evening hospitality and leisure uses.23 To maintain and preserve the architectural integrity and identity of the town centre. 8. and that development proposals affecting sites or their buffer zones require careful scrutiny for their likely effect on sites. leisure. landscaping.21 PPG15 Planning and Historic Environment states that the inclusion of a site on the World Heritage List highlights its outstanding international importance as a key material consideration to be taken into account by local planning authorities in determining planning applications and listed building consent applications. Both the Site and the buffer zone are also protected by Conservation Area designation.25 TOWN CENTRES 161 . The Council will preserve and promote the enhancement of historic Greenwich town centre. retailing. education and residential developments will be supported where they preserve and enhance its heritage and environment. and will seek to expand and diversify its business base. The Council will support and promote the multi functional role of Greenwich town centre. national and regional tourist and visitor destination by virtue of its world-class heritage features and specialist markets. or their settings in the longer term.The growing prominence of the University of Greenwich and Trinity College of Music (incorporating the Laban Centre for contemporary dance) are helping to improve the profile.24 Greenwich is a well-established international. and demonstrate the highest standards in design. Reason 8. a sector that offers scope to bring further economic and educational benefits to the Borough. The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site Management Plan (2005) provides a framework for the activities that take place in the Site. To a significant extent this role shapes its wider commercial functions in retailing. whilst ensuring that they do not conflict with the need to protect the heritage qualities that make Maritime Greenwich such a special and unique place. hospitality and leisure uses. combine with the brilliant architectural expressions of them within a historic landscape.The Council will seek to capitalise on its cultural strengths as a visitor destination and centre for tertiary education. and to ensure that new development complements its existing form and character. detailing and finishing. To achieve this planning authorities are advised to formulate specific planning policies for protecting World Heritage Sites. Advertisements and Illumination in Town Centre. respect existing form and character. maintain its diversity and provide a balanced range of opportunities and services for residents. hospitality. Employment. At present Greenwich has limited success in attracting overnight visitors. services and leisure activities for the local community is also vitally important (see Policy TC10). This visitor destination role is complemented by a growing presence in further and higher education. Supplementary Planning Guidance on streetscape design is provided in The Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual (1999) and Greenwich Town Centre Colour Guidance Note (2002).measurement of time and distance. culture. Design Guidance for Shop-fronts in Greenwich Town Centre and Design Guidance for Shop Signs. although its role in providing convenience shopping. Guidance stresses that sites should be protected for the benefit of future generations.22 TC8 TC9 8. Reason 8. the business community.

Protection of existing industrial uses. or 23% as at 2001. 8. and the Council will use its enforcement powers where appropriate. in particular around Deptford Creekside. bar and take away facilities is more than sufficient (approximately 35 units. Greenwich also experiences problems with un-permitted encroachment of snack-oriented A3 activity within A1 shops. Significant commercial development sites elsewhere in the town centre should include a reasonable balance of uses. proximity to Canary Wharf and the ‘marketability’ of Greenwich. In accordance with flexibility offered under Policy TC18 exceptions may be made for restaurants that cater to this market. Under the General Development Order (1987 as revised) such activity is only allowable in A1 shops where it is functionally linked with.000 students in Greenwich.26 Greenwich also offers opportunities to expand its currently modest role as a business and office location. A4 & A5) should form part of a balanced mix. the Council wishes to manage the overall provision of food and drink uses to secure a greater choice of A3 seated restaurants that offer a good quality evening dining. the main retail activity taking place. In new developments with prominent pedestrian frontages food and drink uses (A3.These two universities accommodate about 10. See the West Greenwich Development Framework (2000. poor management and their proliferation can cause environmental problems. modernize and diversify the business space available. Whilst the number of restaurant.Greenwich town centre. and take-aways (A5) will only be permitted within defined shopping frontages in accordance with Policy TC18. Their operations. and ancillary to. The Council will seek improvements in the management and facilities of the town centre’s markets through the cooperation of landowners and stallholders.There are also a number of smaller.28 TC11 Market development will be strictly controlled in Greenwich town centre to protect the amenities of residents and the qualities of the Conservation Area.27 The range of shops in Greenwich barely meets the needs of local residents. good transport accessibility. 8. and are helping to attract new business investment in the town centre area. Additional factors include surplus industrial land. TC10 The Council will safeguard A1 shopping facilities and encourage their development in Greenwich Town Centre to meet the needs of residents. specialist or independent colleges and halls of residence in the wider vicinity including Deptford. However. This necessitates striking an appropriate balance between Greenwich’s various roles and utilizing or moderating pressures for residential development. to be updated in 2007/8). Reason 8. to benefit residents and the tourism economy alike. within core and fringe frontages alone). workers and visitors. For clarity it should be noted that A3 use applies to the use of a unit for the primary purpose of the sale of food or beverages for consumption on the premises. 162 TOWN CENTRES . Applications for change of permitted use from retail (A1 or A2) to restaurants (A3) bars (A4). staff and students provide opportunities for Greenwich companies including local retailing and leisure facilities. particularly for office and studio workshop-based activities including creative industries.29 Markets are a traditional part of the character of Greenwich town centre and a popular attraction for visitors. On the other hand there is a need to increase. Reason 8. start up and small business premises will continue to be important where they are viable and well utilized.

1998 and 2001. and A1 retail representation is stable at 60% (town centre surveys.TC12 The Council will seek to introduce traffic management.32 Eltham town centre would benefit from a more clearly defined social and cultural role to complement and enhance its commercial strengths. The Council wishes to manage the overall provision of A3. positively address its image. 1997. Given improved public transport connections to the town centre and through the north of the Borough. bus priority and pedestrian priority schemes to reduce the effects of through traffic on Greenwich town centre and surrounding areas whilst improving convenience and safety for pedestrian. pollution and vibration due to its position astride a major traffic route. to benefit residents and the tourism economy alike.Tudor Barn and Well Hall Pleasaunce. the preferred alternative 8.Although the lorry ban has improved the situation. still pose a threat to the structure of historic buildings. it is considered that visitors and commuters traveling by private vehicle should be encouraged to use public transport.30 Greenwich town centre suffers badly from congestion.33 Eltham is the Borough’s second largest but strongest retail centre for comparison or durable goods. and reducing pollution. improving journey times by public transport. by number of units). although scope for expansion in the town centre is limited due to its close proximity to residential areas. A4 and A5 food and drink uses to secure a greater choice of A3 seated restaurants that offer good quality evening dining. Reason 8. Reason 8. under review) and the Site Schedules (mu12. The SRB5 South Greenwich programme will provide opportunities to improve Eltham’s profile. In accordance with flexibility offered under Policy TC18 exceptions may be made for restaurants that cater to this market. Eltham could take greater advantage of its proximity to the Green Chain Walk and important visitor attractions including Eltham Palace. See also Polices M20. traffic restraints. Additional parking provision will be restricted to an essential minimum.35 TOWN CENTRES 163 .31 TC14 The Council will seek to safeguard and improve the range of shopping. and forge stronger connections with its catchment area and communities.The Greenwich Retail Study (2002) confirms earlier research findings that Eltham is under provided in food retailing. Vacancy rates are very low within the defined retail frontages (6% in 2001 compared to 11% in 1998). and will encourage the provision of facilities to take better commercial advantage of its tourism potential. restaurant and leisure facilities in Eltham. In the event that the identified Eltham sites prove unable to accommodate all the capacity identified. Reason 8. Development opportunities have been identified in the Eltham Town Centre Development Guidelines. employees and visitors. 8.34 8. Eltham Town Centre TC13 The Council will support and promote Eltham as a vibrant community and cultural centre for south Greenwich.Waterfront Transit will be promoted and sought to serve the area. heavy traffic volumes. mu15). and therefore that road use priorities in the town centre should prioritise pedestrians and those using more sustainable forms of transport. and to the health and safety of residents. including coaches. Provision of a new leisure centre is an objective in the Greenwich Strategy. M28 and M42. and planning permission has been granted for one on Site Schedule mu2. It also currently lacks adequate leisure and youth facilities in relation to the area it serves.

particularly those suffering from retail decline. parking controls. There are no sequentially preferable sites. simplifying multipurpose trips. Reconfiguration of existing out-of-centre retail and leisure floorspace will be considered against Criteria (iii) – (vi). DEVELOPMENT IN TOWN CENTRES Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach TC16 Town centres are the preferred location for retailing. providing the type and scale of development is appropriate to the size and role of the centre in the Borough’s town centre hierarchy. iii. Promoting and protecting diversity can contribute to the vitality and viability of town centres. M26 and M27. conveniently accessible by a choice of modes of transport including walking and cycling. offering affordable and sustainable access to a range of facilities and services for all sectors of the community. The proposal would not unacceptably impact on residential amenity. CCTV installation. Reason 8. Planning conditions or legal agreements will be employed on new developments including reconfigurations to minimize impacts on town centres. Reason 8. and extending trading opportunities into the evening and weekends. These activities will be permitted in town centres. As resources permit. ii. to reduce traffic congestion. the Council will investigate traffic calming. Town centres tend to be the focus of public transport networks. bus priority schemes. leisure and other key town centre uses that attract or serve the public including offices. and improve public and pedestrian safety and comfort in Eltham town centre. or will be made.location for additional supermarket floorspace in the south of the Borough is the new Local Centre as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area (See Policy H4). and would benefit from further environmental improvements in addition to the town centre square project for Passey Place (2000). M24. v. iv. The proposal would not demonstrably harm the vitality and viability of an existing shopping centre. individually or cumulatively with recent or committed developments.36 Eltham suffers from heavy through traffic.37 The importance of supporting and enhancing town centres is emphasised in PPS6 Planning for Town Centres and the London Plan.38 164 TOWN CENTRES . reducing dependence on the private car. and will seek to improve its streetscape and environmental quality. hospitality. by attracting additional customers. There is a need for the development. vi. tourism and cultural facilities. and streetscape improvements in partnership with the local community and the Eltham Town Centre steering group. Retail or indoor leisure developments or extensions on edge-of-centre or out-of-centre sites will only be acceptable where: i. Parking provision is consistent with the relevant standards and principles in Policies M23.The nature and extent of these uses will vary between centres. but would typically include some of the activities 8. traffic patterns or road congestion. the environment. Proposals are. TC15 The Council will support and promote measures for bus priority.

The Mixed Use Site Schedules identify a range of sites to accommodate new town centre retailing. In the event need can be established. DIY was the only sector where need was identified up to 2011.42 8. moderate capacity for both in the Eltham catchment. C1. on Site Schedule mu29. A3. falling within uses A2. B1. The Greenwich Retail Study (Donaldsons 2002) examines retail provision. In terms of retail warehousing.This policy will therefore apply to all retail uses including retail warehouses and other formats open to the visiting public. Charlton Business Park (see Policy J3) accommodates the borough’s main concentration of out-of-centre retailing and offers scope for linked trips. Reconfiguration of existing retail warehousing may help redress this imbalance e. 8. taking a flexible approach to store formats in relation to the sites available (see PPS6). centre size. 8. distance from defined core shopping frontages and barriers to pedestrian movement will be relevant considerations. A4. and there is also scope to provide a medium to large supermarket and other local retail facilities as part of the Kidbrooke redevelopment (see Policy H4).39 Town centres are generally underpinned by retailing. to establish whether there is need for any additional retail floorspace in the period to 2011. and Policies J4. D1 and D2 of the Use Classes Order (1987 as amended 2005).This Study is also specifically intended to serve as a capacity model and baseline information source to be updated for any significant retail applications submitted during the Plan period.The Retail Study Update (August 2005) will also be material.41 8. C1 for community facilities. but limited capacity in the Greenwich catchment (which includes Charlton and also Greenwich Peninsula.g.010 new dwellings). although other locations have also been identified as suitable for some of these uses (see also Policy T1 for hotels. Hybrid uses which combine wholesale and retail activity will considered individually against the most relevant parts of both policies. and is thus preferable to other free-standing out-of-centre locations. alongside overcapacity in some other sectors. It concludes that there is capacity underpinned by a need for regeneration for a significant increase in both convenience and comparison shopping floorspace in the Woolwich catchment. A5.40 8. town centre performance and shopping patterns in the Borough. Given the conclusions of the Greenwich Retail Study and Update it is not envisaged that further significant retail development will take place outside town centres in the Plan period. proposals outside or on the edge of town centres must demonstrate that there are no sequentially preferable sites available. See also Policy J8 for wholesale uses. In defining a location as ‘out-’ or ‘edge-of-centre’. are thus vulnerable to out-of-centre retail development. Retail (and leisure) proposals at edge or out-of-centre locations must first demonstrate need.43 TOWN CENTRES 165 . J7 and W3 for offices). and to define a maximum floorspace permitted. PPS6 Planning for Town Centres confirms that indoor leisure uses (Use Class D2) are also subject to need assessment and the sequential approach. unless the retail element is both ancillary and minor in terms of both floorspace and especially turnover. For ‘top up’ convenience shopping an assessment of need based on a demonstration that there is a local gap in provision of adequate top up shopping in walking distance of the proposed site will be sufficient.000 sqm of additional retail floorspace within a major mixed development including 10.identified in the policy. Planning conditions and/or legal agreements will be applied to out-of-centre retail planning permissions to limit the range of goods sold.These activities can both benefit from and reinforce proximity to a healthy retail sector. where planning permission has been granted for approximately 31.

At ground floor level a minimum of 70% of Core Frontage. Should directly serve visiting members of the public. In major centres. Core frontages are not designated in Local Centres. and greater emphasis will be placed on safeguarding essential local services (see Policy TC19). Will not be permitted if as a result breaks between occupied A1 premises exceed two units in core frontages or three in fringe or local frontages. and by designating local centres in their entirety as Local Shopping Frontage. vitality and viability without unduly constraining opportunities for an acceptable level of diversification. ii. iv. v. relevant to the application site. This policy will also be applied to new units within designated frontages. Must not result in the loss of an occupied A1 retail unit where reasonable alternative premises are available elsewhere in that centre.A4 and A5 uses would occupy more than 25% of all designated frontage premises within that centre 8. subject to the ground floor retail thresholds set out in Policy TC17. Reason 8. Being smaller they tend to offer basic convenience or ‘top up’ retailing and local services.45 8. it will be applied to an individual block of frontage.46 8.44 The Council seeks to protect both retail activity and central areas within town centres where retailing is the dominant use. The calculation of the percentage limits on non-A1 uses will be based on linear length of designated shopping frontage. In larger centres fringe areas complement core retail frontages by providing locations for specialist shops and services which cannot afford core rents. Non-retail (A1) Uses in Protected Shopping Frontages TC18 The Council will support the provision of a range of activity generating non retail uses in town centres. Fringe and Local Shopping Frontages TC17 The Council will seek to protect the overall viability of town centres by designating Core (Primary) and Fringe (Secondary) Shopping Frontages in major and district centres. The 50% threshold in fringe and local frontages is intended to limit the loss of retail units in fringe frontages and local centres. iii. or where they form a logical extension to an existing frontage. including evening activities where environmentally appropriate. Should include the installation and retention of a display window of good design. and protects the long-term viability of town centres for retailing. while the level of non-retail facilities in the fringe has risen from 31% to 45% (Council surveys. Retail (A1) representation across all local centres was 52% in 2001. to protect retail choice. and 50% of Fringe and Local Frontage. should be available for A1 retail use. In district and local centres the calculation will be applied to the entire frontage designated by core. based on number of units). and keep the shopping frontage active and viable.These thresholds reflect existing trends in the Borough. Non retail proposals: i. and Will not be permitted if as a result either the Use Class category proposed or the combined total of A3. rather than comparison shopping opportunities for larger items. fringe and local shopping frontages are identified on the proposals maps or in Table TC2. fringe or local category. generate and not impede pedestrian activity. In Neighbourhood Parades retail representation may be low.This best serves the interests of shoppers.47 166 TOWN CENTRES .Protected Core. Core. A1 retail occupancy in core frontages of the Borough’s larger centres declined slightly from 72% to 66% between 1993 and 2001.

particularly purpose-built facilities of borough-wide significance. Changes to other environmentally suitable uses will be considered where premises are vacant. Subject to other relevant policies. newsagent. or where retail premises are vacant and cannot be let or sold for retailing. and provide a range of local employment.Through diversity town centres can better meet the needs and aspirations of local communities. exceptions to retail safeguards may be made for community uses.48 PPS6 Planning for Town Centres notes that encouraging a diverse range of Key Town Centre Uses within town centres can enhance their vitality and viability. The policy applies limits to the extent and co-location of non-A1 uses to avoid the loss of a ‘critical mass’ of retail activity in protected frontages. who might otherwise be effectively deprived of the services they provide. Cultural and Entertainment facilities TC20 The Council will seek to retain premises for arts. to facilitate transition to more sustainable patterns of use. In such cases the general levels of vacancy in a centre or frontage block. Reason 8. Exceptional cases must offer regular evening dining. doctor and dentist.The Council will consider producing more detailed advice on food and drink uses in a Supplementary Planning Document. post office.50 TOWN CENTRES 167 . and operators may be required to enter into a legal agreement to ensure this remains the case. social and health facilities within walking distance of residential areas are a valued element of the social fabric and help to minimise social exclusion.51 Local shops. cultural or entertainment activities for their intended or an equivalent use.They particularly benefit residents without cars or with constrained mobility. Essential local facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and freestanding premises TC19 In considering proposals for Neighbourhood Parades and freestanding neighbourhood shops the Council will seek to safeguard existing A1 retail uses and the provision of a minimum range of essential local facilities including a general grocer. In turn diversity is underpinned by a vital retail sector.Reason 8. chemist. which provides a focus of activity for other uses. and it can be demonstrated that there is no demand or market for the permitted use or an alternative essential local service not currently represented. Exceptions will be made for the loss of health facilities as part of a managed modernisation programme (see Policy C2). Change of use in any such facility will be opposed if it would result in the loss without replacement of a valued local service. Evidence of active but unsuccessful marketing on realistic terms will be relevant in such cases.49 8. or its loss would place the surrounding area more than 400 metres from the nearest alternative.The third objective is to safeguard other existing A1 retail uses. 8. The second objective is to ensure the provision of any essential local service not currently provided within a 400-metre radius. In determining applications for premises in neighbourhood parades or freestanding local shops the Council will firstly seek to safeguard existing essential local services. as defined in the policy. the letting history of the premises. Exceptions may be made to criterion (iii)–(v) for A3 restaurants. and evidence of active and realistic marketing of the unit for retailing will be relevant considerations. and to avoid the fragmentation of retail areas. providing their use does not unacceptably impact on residential amenity or traffic levels. particularly in Eltham and Greenwich (see Policies TC10 and TC14). It is intended to avoid stretches of ‘dead’ frontage lacking in pedestrian activity. Arts. which could undermine the centre as a whole.

These are of cumulative social and recreational benefit to local communities. This needs to be balanced against the need to retain residential accommodation as far as is practicable. providing a good quality and secure living environment can be created (see Policies D7 and E3). and facilities for. community activities or other Town Centre Uses will normally be permitted.54 PPS6 Planning for Town Centres notes that increasing town centre population can make a contribution to vitality and viability. arts and cultural use.55 168 TOWN CENTRES . vibration and other forms of pollution. and vacant town centre buildings or parts of buildings outside protected shopping frontages that cannot be let or sold for their permitted use. Use of Premises Above Shops TC21 The use of vacant or under-used floor space above shops for offices. The Policy seeks to prevent the loss of sites and premises for social.Town centres also tend to be highly accessible by public transport. Premises in current office or community use are not lost (see Policies J5 and C2). tourism. Reason 8. Dwellings offer a good quality and secure living environment. Residential conversion of premises above shops. arts. cultural or entertainment uses. and improve personal safety outside normal business hours. iii. Such facilities are typically located in or near town centres. and suitable for car free housing. parking provision 8. and provision of dwelling suited to their needs will be encouraged wherever practical.52 The Greenwich Strategy seeks to promote improved access to. incorporating where appropriate measures to reduce to reasonable levels noise. except where: i. ii. foster development of the evening economy. It would result in the loss of reasonable residential accommodation with separate access. town centre housing may particularly suit the less mobile including wheelchair users. and Separate and secure access to residential areas is provided. In centres with good public transport access. To ensure that offices are not prematurely lost to housing. Due to the close proximity of shops and other facilities. providing such use is environmentally appropriate. Town centre living TC22 The Council will promote town centre living through supporting mixed use town centre developments that contain a residential element above ground floor level. ii. and dwellings overlook public areas wherever practical. alternative sources of employment.53 There is a need to increase commercial viability. Housing can also sustainably re use town centre buildings which are vacant or no longer suited to their original purpose (see Policy H1). It would unacceptably harm the amenity of neighbouring residents. and other economic benefits. providing: i. generate jobs and find premises for small business and community uses in these locations. Affordable housing will be sought in developments providing 15 or more dwellings (see Policy H14). and can generate civic spirit. site servicing and access arrangements are inadequate for the intended purpose. iii. or Parking. See also Policy J9 for arts-related workspace. Reason 8. evidence of reasonable and active site marketing for the permitted use will be required (see Policy J5). will normally be acceptable.Reason 8.

natural and historic environments.other than for occupants with disabilities is considered unnecessary and undesirable. refuse storage and litter. accessible. improve movement and improve servicing within town centres. Reason 8. minimise or mitigate unacceptable environmental and amenity impacts (see also Policies E1 and E2). The Design and Conservation and Environmental Protection chapters. and commuted payments may be sought to improve public transport (see Policies H19. Reason 8. safe and efficient backdrop for retail and other activities. URBAN ENVIRONMENT Improving the quality of the built and natural environments of town centres is a policy priority. and businesses. Beresford Square. will benefit residents. dust. materials and the layout of buildings and public space.58 The Council seeks to balance general support for commercial activities in town centres with the need to safeguard and enhance their environment. or other environmental impacts.They provide a focal point for day-to-day activities. Environmental protection TC23 Town centre developments will be required where necessary to install or implement appropriate measures to control or mitigate to acceptable levels noise. E1 and E2). Access to on street parking permits may be restricted by legal agreement. and promoting quality in design. and a venue for outdoor arts. Controlling congestion and pollution. comfort and appeal to benefit local residents. M26-M30). sets out the Council’s detailed policies to achieve quality in urban design and to safeguard and enhance the built. enhance customer facilities.59 Civic spaces such as Cutty Sark Gardens (See The Cutty Sark Gardens Planning Brief. cultural and entertainment events. vibrations. Civic Spaces TC24 Development proposals that would diminish the character and use of town centre civic spaces will be resisted. M25. employees and customers by creating a more pleasant.The Policy aims to prevent. fumes and smells.56 8. whilst acknowledging that background levels of disturbance and/or pollution in town centres should reasonably be expected to exceed those in ‘suburban’ areas. Proposals will be refused where their environmental impacts would unduly impact on the operation of local businesses or the amenity of nearby residents. 8. 2006). The supplementary policies below seek to minimise adverse environmental impacts from retail and town centre activities.57 TOWN CENTRES 169 . Dial Arch Square and Passey Place make a valuable contribution to the character. customers. employees. General Gordon Square. and in particular Policies (D1D8. townscape and activity of the Borough’s town centres.

existing public parking and the standards in the Movement Chapter. Servicing and Parking TC25 Provision should be made for customer access. 170 TOWN CENTRES . and potential traffic and parking congestion. and where necessary to consider imposing restrictions on delivery hours. but one often involving a significant intensification of use on open land.61 Markets are a popular form of traditional retailing. iii. Recycling facilities should be provided in car parks of more than 200 spaces. and high levels of car trip generation . ii. residential amenity and other local businesses. but can generate problems for the environment. especially in residential streets. minimizing or mitigating potential environmental problems. and play an important role in Woolwich and Greenwich town centres (see also Policy TC11). vehicle turning and waste storage arrangements in existing shopping frontages when considering applications for new uses. servicing. Car parking requirements will be considered in accordance with principles of traffic reduction. including people in wheelchairs. including wherever feasible and appropriate drop off points. On the other hand. and the disposal and/or recycling of refuse. Such obstructions cause traffic congestion. facilities and buildings should be safely accessible to all.60 The Council seeks to balance traffic reduction priorities with the need to improve the environmental quality. It will look for opportunities to remove conflicts between on street servicing and bus movements. site restitution. servicing and cycle parking in all significant new town centre developments.They provide a range of benefits and help to meet local shopping needs. by controlling. It also seeks to ensure temporarily occupied sites remain fit for their usual purpose.The right balance will help to reduce car use overall whilst also reducing illegal parking by customers and delivery vehicles. and will likewise expect safe and hygienic arrangements in new developments. as well as customers. especially noise at antisocial hours and litter. See Policies M23-M35. young children and older people. parking congestion or the flow of traffic especially public transport. carers and parents with buggies. Reason for Policies TC25 & TC26 8. and accessibility within town centres. proposals for market stalls. The usual use of the proposed site and the operation of permanent businesses located in the vicinity. and can create pedestrian hazards such as vehicular movements on footpaths. or on the natural environment. the character of a conservation area or setting of a listed building. Markets and Car Boot Sales TC27 Where planning permission is required.Site Access. Residential amenity. TC26 The Council will seek to improve delivery access. storage. Pedestrian and highway safety.often very early in the morning. Reason 8. ramped access and/or lifts for people with reduced mobility. Excessive parking provision is a waste of land and can encourage further car use. Car boot sales are an alternative retail form increasing in popularity. safety. Council policy aims to protect nearby residents and businesses. new markets and or car boot sales will be permitted unless they would unacceptably impact on: i. Conditions may be imposed to control hours of operation and to ensure that adequate arrangements are made for parking. disrupt bus routes.

64 8. cyclist and pedestrians. ii. For this reason they are best located in town centres in accordance with the sequential approach and due to their potential for linked trips to local shops. Reason 8. fumes. Additional safeguards may be sought in relation to parking and traffic issues to reduce problems arising from illegal short term parking by customers. In effect this means that planning permission will always be required unless the site is on undeveloped land. and in relation to hot food uses can normally be mitigated by installation of suitable ducting and waste storage facilities. late night noise and traffic. 8. that there are no sequentially preferable sites available and that they are conveniently and safely accessible by public transport as well as by cycle and on foot. and would not unacceptably impact on residential or workplace amenity. iii. and The proposal complies with applicable retail frontage policies and does not jeopardize the provision of an essential local service (see Policies TC17-TC19). Proposals outside Major. road or pedestrian safety. Hot food take-aways will be permitted providing: i. The proposed use and the level of activity it generates is appropriate in the location proposed. A4 and A5) increased from 15% to 18% between 1993 and 1998.65 TOWN CENTRES 171 . It has since dropped back to 16% in 2001. creating pressures on premises in other uses. Customer visits by car would not unacceptably impact on existing or proposed public transport provision. traffic movements. District and Local centres predicated on serving a wider than ‘walk-in’ catchment demonstrate that:. fringe and local frontages (TC17 and TC18). These apply a maximum threshold of 25% of premises for all food and drink uses to safeguard retailing and ensure a reasonable mix of facilities are available to local residents. Safeguards on amenity and the environment are set out in Policy TC23 (see also E1). or unless the land in question is a building or is in within the curtilage of a building.63 Hot food take away premises fall within Use Class A5. Hot food uses will need to be designed and sited with additional care in areas of special character. and are also commonly associated with environmental and amenity problems such as litter.they serve a need not generally met by existing facilities. that is land with no associated buildings or with no permitted or established use (for the avoidance of doubt car parking and playing fields constitute development). and restrictions on opening hours.62 Under the General Permitted Development Order (1995) Part 4 Class B. nor on the environment or the character of the area. markets and car boot sales may operate without the need for planning permission for up to 14 days in any calendar year unless there is an Article 4 Direction in force (removing General Permitted Development rights). and because background activity levels are usually higher. iv.The overall level of food and drink use (including A5 takeaways) in any centre will be limited by policies for core. The number of premises in designated centres and parades in food and drink use (A3. bus movements.8. waste disposal. They often attract significant numbers of customers. Hot food take-away outlets including drive-through restaurants TC28 Town Centres and Neighbourhood Parades are the preferred location for hot food take-away establishments including drive-through restaurants (Use Class A5). This can unacceptably reduce safety and increase congestion by impeding traffic.

The Policy will be interpreted more strictly where proposals would adversely affect Neighbourhood Parades. iii. District and Local Centres are less vulnerable to competition from forecourt retail premises by virtue of their existing size and range of retailing. forecourt retail (Use Class A1) floorspace shall not exceed 150 m2 (net) unless the proposal meets a demonstrable local need not served by existing local convenience shops. The proposal will not unacceptably impact on public transport operations.These are defined on the Proposals and Inset Maps. Other local shops and services that rely on customers attracted to existing convenience shops in the parade then become vulnerable. providing: i. retail development on a site that is not abutting or wholly within it could undermine the parade by functioning as a rival destination and overwhelming existing convenience stores. Paragraph 8. and Dedicated parking is provided for shop customers without obstructing the forecourt. and it is demonstrated that there are no sequentially preferable sites available sufficient to accommodate the retail element on a stand alone basis. 8. On sites outside defined retail centres and parades. Policy TC16 and its Reasons provide further advice on need and sequential testing. and will therefore generate shopping trips in its own right. often including a small supermarket. Whereas competition within the parade is acceptable.Retail facilities in Petrol Stations TC29 The Council will normally permit forecourt retailing in Major.68 172 TOWN CENTRES . The proposal will not unacceptably impact on residential amenity or the environment. Recent changes in filling station operations have seen retail functions expand from ancillary to general retailing. PPS6 and PPG13. and in Neighbourhood Parades on sites abutting or within the existing shopping parade. The policy supports forecourt-retailing proposals where they contribute to the vitality and viability of town centres.42 notes that the test of need for small convenience shopping proposals will take account of gaps in local provision.66 The Council seeks to maintain and support the existing network of town centres and shopping parades by focusing new retail investment within such locations. Reason 8. traffic levels.67 8. where existing shops tend to be much smaller than 150 m2. as above this figure it is considered that the retail function is a use in its own right. and opposes them in out-of-centre locations where they do not. or in Tables TC2 and TC3. In this respect the Council has defined ‘ancillary’ as less than 150 m2 net floorspace. District and Local Centres. Major. The shop is safely and conveniently accessible to pedestrians and cyclists. site servicing or other on-site activities. v. traffic congestion or highway safety. iv. Accordingly considerations such as need and the sequential approach are applicable. in accordance with Guidance in PPG1. is comparable to ‘stand alone’ retail units being twice the size of a typical cornershop. ii.

57 (odd) Core: western side (Cannon Retail Park) Core: 2 – 4b (even) 1 – 5 (odd) Fringe: 6b – 20 (even) 7-21 (odd) Core Core Lakedale Road 6.119 (odd) Fringe: 2 .183 (odd) Fringe: 1 .32 & 44 .213 (odd) Fringe: 92 .33 (odd) Fringe: 35 .177 & 187 .118A & 126 .13 (odd) Fringe: 15-19 (odd) Fringe: 1-17 (odd) Core: 142 .TABLE TC2: DISTRICT AND LOCAL CENTRES SHOPPING FRONTAGES1 Name 1 District Centres Blackheath (Mostly in LB Lewisham) East Greenwich Street Blackheath Village Lee Road 2 Trafalgar Road Numbers Core: 1 . 155 .156 (even) 97 . Safeway superstore TOWN CENTRES 173 .232 (even).110 (even).79 & 137 .98C (even) 63A .30 (even) 13 .153 & 179 . 71 .139 (odd) Core: 2A . Thamesmead Twin Tumps Way Joyce Dawson Way Aldi.39 & 47 . site between Aldi & Iceland.167 (odd) Fringe: 1-7 (odd) Core: 100 .53 (odd) Woolwich Road 3 4 5 Greenwich Lee Green (Mostly in LB Lewisham) Plumstead High Street See Proposals Inset Map Lee Road Eltham Road Plumstead High Street Fringe: 121 .14 & 18 .

45.71 Even: 150 . 174 TOWN CENTRES .413 Even: 336 .6 Odd: 125 . 396-404 All: 1-5 Odd: 5 .16 All: 12 . Even: 2a . Even: 2a .380. Even: 2 . 405 .43.33 Odd: 1.44.192 All: 1 .281.69. Odd: 57.401.93 Odd: 369 .26 All: 1-17 Odd: 43a.288 Odd: 77 . 59 .143 Odd: 1 . 34 . and as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area (see Policy H4). Even: 276 .158 Odd: 275 .15.48 Even: 156 . Even: 134 .170 Local Centre Frontages (no core/fringe) Blackheath Hill Blackheath Hill Greenwich South Street Lewisham Road Charlton Village Herbert Road The Village Herbert Road Plumstead Common Sandy Hill Road Court Road Mottingham Road Footscray Road Station Approach 2 3 4 5 Mottingham (mostly in LB Bromley) New Eltham 6 Royal Standard Old Dover Road Stratheden Parade Vanbrugh Park Westcombe Hill Odeon Parade Tudor Parade Well Hall Parade Well Hall Road 7 Well Hall Notes to Table TC2 1.5 All: 1 .TABLE TC2: DISTRICT AND LOCAL CENTRES SHOPPING FRONTAGES1 continued Name 1 Street Numbers Odd: 1 .20 Odd: 53 .13. Even: 44 .74 Even: 24. Additional local centres are likely to be provided as part of Gallions Urban Village (outline planning permission). Even: 2-32 Odd: 1 .

200. 107.84.95. 96 .25 Odd: 25 .74a Odd: 211 .48 Even: 150 .21 183.74. Even: 416. Odd: 369 .60.15.81.116 All: 1 . 52. 740 .379. 2a. 58 (PO). 203 Odd: 91 .122 10 Eynsham Drive 11 Fiveways 12 Hill Reach 13 Holbourne Rd 14 Humber Road 15 Kidbrooke 16 Kingsman Parade 17 Leslie Smith Square 18 McLeod Road 19 Middle Park 20 The Mound TOWN CENTRES 175 .13. 44 . 50.198 Odd: 1 .12. 436a Even: 164 .229.753.4 Even: 122 .102. 2b Odd: 23 .139.16. 56. 416a . 185a Odd: 61 .78 Odd: 11 . Even: 2. Even: 58 .28 Even: 188 . Woodman PH Odd: 201. Crossways PH.758. 64 . 15a. 120 .TABLE TC3: PREMISES IN NEIGHBOURHOOD PARADES Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Abbey Wood Avery Hill Bexley Road Brewery Road Charlton Church Lane Charlton Road Conway Road Court Road Eltham Common Street Wilton Road Abbey Wood Road Avery Hill Road Bexley Road Brewery Road Waverly Road (corner) Charlton Church Lane Charlton Road Conway Road Court Road Well Hall Road Eynsham Drive Southwood Road Sidcup Road Hillreach Holbourne Rd Whetstone Road Humber Road Station Crescent Rochester Way Kingsman Parade Leslie Smith Square McLeod Road Newmarket Green The Mound William Barefoot Road Numbers Odd: 1 . 42 . 106 . Even: 10 .436. 184 (cnr Penmon Road) Odd: 129 .178. Even: 2 . 109 Odd: 103 .115 Odd: 1 . 22. Greyhound PH All: 1-7 Even: 70 .13 Even: 72 . Even: 38-40 (PFS). Even: 12 .144 Even: 2 . 143 (cnr Sidcup Road) Odd: 731 . 11. Even: 728(PFS). 55.47.17 All: 1 . 185.7.

251 .202 All: 1 .13.27.TABLE TC3: PREMISES IN NEIGHBOURHOOD PARADES continued Name 21 Plumstead Common 22 Royal Hill 23 Shooters Hill 24 The Slade 25 Southend Crescent 26 Swingate Lane 27 Teleman Square 28 Waterdale Road 29 Westhorne Avenue 30 Westmount Road 31 Wickham Lane 32 Woolwich Road Street Plumstead Common Road Royal Hill Shooters Hill Road The Slade Eltham High Street Swingate Lane Teleman Square Wickham Lane Kings Highway Westhorne Avenue Westmount Road Plumstead High Street Wickham Lane Woolwich Road Numbers Odd: 117 . 80. 160 . 183 .10 Odd: 251 .279 Odd: 141 . 25 .152 Odd: 293 .155 All: 11 . 70.562 Odd: 95 . 72. Even: 8.52-56. Odd: 1 .133. 22 .101b.46 176 TOWN CENTRES . 66.158.317. 142 .203 Even: 122a . 196 .132.168.129.46. 94 (superstore) Even: 546 .31 Odd: 239 . 182.86-94 Even: 170 . Even: 92 .245. Even: 2a (PFS) Odd: 117 .212 Even: 18-26.263 79 (NW corner). 76.

subject to the need to: i.4 9. recognising that it has a positive and significant role to play in securing the economic and environmental regeneration of the Borough particularly in the Waterfront areas. Greenwich is undergoing great change as its maritime.The Council wishes to attract new hotel developments. principally the National Maritime Museum.9. In addition to the new development around the Peninsula. industrial and military heritage is consolidated with new roles in providing sustainable communities. and the expansion of tourism in the Borough. Cutty Sark. ensure that tourism is managed to provide benefits for local communities and businesses. the Borough continues to capitalise upon its many historical assets. leisure and other key town centre uses which attract large numbers of people to locate within the Town Centres. the amenities of the local community and the environment of the Borough. making the most of historic heritage.2 PPG21 Tourism (1992) and the London Plan (2004) stress the benefits of tourism and the need to ensure that tourism is sustainable. Old Royal Observatory and former Royal Naval College. scientific 9.5 TOURISM 177 . in order to assist the local economy and increase the number and variety of jobs available locally. To promote the provision of facilities for tourists in appropriate locations. the riverside locations and creative potential. The general policies for Tourism are: The Council supports and promotes tourism. protect the housing stock. education. and that major tourist facilities are well served by public transport. architectural. ST1 ST2 iv. diversify the tourism base of the Borough’s economy by seeking facilities which embrace a wide range of arts. ii.3 9. particularly in the vicinity of Greenwich Town Centre. culture. PPS6: Planning for Town Centres (2005) and Policy TC16 promote retail. The policies in the UDP welcome tourism in appropriate locations and support the provision of hotels and conference centres in the light of the general shortage of hotel space in an area that has many high profile tourist attractions. TOURISM GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 9. iii.Visitors come to see the royal.The latter supports the diversification of tourism across London and that the benefits are dispersed. both interacts with the UDP and aims to focus tourism delivery agencies towards achieving a sustainable tourism economy. modern businesses. sporting and entertainment activities for participation and enjoyment by all sections of the community. The choice of the Peninsula for the Millennium celebrations brought the Borough international status that is being drawn upon and channelled further into the local economies and communities. ancient woodlands. culture and tourism sectors.The Borough’s Tourism Strategy for 2004-2010 ‘Greenwich: A Place to Visit?’. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 9. and recognises Greenwich Riverside as a Strategic Cultural Area.1 The Plan promotes the protection of the concentration of tourism activities around key sites. The Greenwich Strategy aims to reinforce Greenwich as a world renowned and welcoming tourist destination.

however this includes seasonal University accommodation and a caravan park (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010). the Royal Arsenal.500 serviced and non-serviced bedspaces available year round. Charlton House.7 Policies Location and Criteria T1 The Council will welcome proposals for major tourism development including hotels (over 10 bed spaces). (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010) these issues must be addressed. has caused problems associated with traffic congestion and erosion of the environment.and nautical legacy that has made Greenwich a site of World Heritage Importance. Since 2000. with a key factor being the under supply of visitor accommodation. M32. M40 and M41.9 million visitors to the Borough in 2001. promoting the World Heritage Site Status of Greenwich and seeking development of tourism support industries. by linking areas across the Borough by a sustainable transport mode. Other attractions including Eltham Palace. including linking waterfront sites through design. particularly in the vicinity of Greenwich Town Centre. that there will be no significant harm to the amenity of neighbouring residents and land users.6 The concentration of tourism activities around key sites. 9. walkways.With 6. within areas listed in the Mixed Use Schedules and in identified Waterfront locations with good public transport access (Policy W3). In addition. Skill shortages and training needs have and continue to be met through training schemes. iii. M26. conference facilities or interactive attractions in town centres. that parking. efforts must be made to use the Borough’s strengths and take advantage of the opportunities available. Thames Barrier and the Green Chain network of open spaces. The connection of Greenwich Town Centre to the DLR and to the underground network at Greenwich Peninsula has provided stronger links between the Borough and Central London. if those attracted to Greenwich are to be encouraged to lengthen their stay. See also Policies E1 to E3 and E5 to E7. M27. iv. educational establishments and the Greenwich Local Labour and Business initiative. the number of graded bed and breakfast spaces has fallen by approximately 5% and there is a shortage of specialist types of business tourism facilities. environmental improvements. cycleways and improved public transport. Such development will need to satisfy the following criteria: i. The development of a Waterfront Transit link complements the picture.The current level of spending per visitor is low. particularly as a result of noise or disturbance. that all aspects of the development are accessible to those with sensory or mobility impairments. 9. a high standard of design which complies with the policies contained in the Design and Conservation and Waterfront Chapters. The full benefits of this growth can be achieved as a result of inward investment into the Borough. ii. 178 TOURISM . cycling and (where relevant) coach facilities be provided on site to accord with Policies M23. that the level of traffic generated by the development will not adversely impact on the surrounding environment (especially air quality) or on traffic congestion or bus services. v. Greenwich has an average of 3.

Where major tourist development.10 9. and securing economic benefits for local people. it raises the profile of the area. particularly on the Waterfront (see Policy SW1). as part of its commitment towards encouraging tourism development within the Borough. The site is close to existing public transport facilities.11 9. the Council will seek to ensure that the development uses the river for visitor transport.12 TOURISM 179 . the identification of sites for tourism development will also help avoid piecemeal development. ii. Most major tourist developments will provide benefits such as leisure facilities or job opportunities. and focus the efforts of the Council. will help to structure future provision. encourages joint marketing and provides a strong base for facilities serving the tourist market. The use of the River Thames and Deptford Creek for tourism is supported. or other leisure facilities. encouraging sensitive location for what can often constitute an intensive form of land use and can create severe environmental problems in surrounding areas if the implications are not fully explored. particularly shops. In trying to maximise the benefits of such developments towards the community and to avoid any problems arising from new development the Council will use planning agreements. including hotels and associated ancillary visitor facilities provide sport and recreation. It is necessary to assess major hotel development against criteria as listed above. Tourism related developments adjacent the Borough’s waterways will be encouraged to make use of the river wherever possible. vii. and viii. Small Hotels. 9. The sequential approach towards major tourist development. hotels and restaurants. can be used by local residents and businesses. in Policy T1 are complied with. the Council will seek to secure public access to them. The Council has prepared a guide of Hotel Sites for the Millennium. enabling them to be co-ordinated with other areas of economic regeneration. In meeting the demand for accommodation in particular. although these may not necessarily meet the needs of the community. in actively promoting major tourist development e.vi. such as hotel leisure facilities.g. This approach has a number of advantages. the siting of buildings and activity or the use of the river itself. that facilities associated with the development. bed and breakfast accommodation and guesthouses including permitting conversions of buildings from other uses providing that the following criteria are fulfilled: i. encourages environmental improvements and induces investment.The Council will continue to review the need for hotel sites and to identify further suitable locations in future planning briefs. be it through design.8 Tourism development in the past has tended to be opportunistic rather than planned.9 9. that planning agreements are used as appropriate to secure community and workplace benefits. hotels and visitor attractions in the Borough. facilitates links between attractions. to v. that where development is proposed on sites adjacent to the River Thames or Deptford Creek. Criteria i. in accordance with Policy SC2. This has resulted in the Borough experiencing many of the environmental problems associated with intensive tourism related uses whilst receiving few of the benefits. Reason 9. thus ensuring the optimum use of the site. In particular developers of major tourist developments will be expected to use Greenwich Local Labour and Business (Policy J14). Bed and Breakfast Accommodation and Guesthouses T2 The Council will give favourable consideration to the development and extension of small hotels (up to 10 bed-spaces).

The Royal Arsenal.16 180 TOURISM . Diversification of tourism within the Borough should include developing facilities for conferences. Significant improvements have resulted from the development of the DLR into Greenwich town centre. exhibitions and other high revenue generating developments. there is limited group accommodation provision. Diversification T3 The Council will seek to diversify the tourism base of the Borough by encouraging the provision of a range of tourist facilities and ensuring that a geographical spread of sites are available for good quality tourism development. Reason 9.000 hotel rooms should be provided in the period up to 2016 and in particular. The Council has prepared a Cultural Strategy and a Tourism Strategy which address the need to diversify tourism in the Borough. 2004). has the potential to be a tourism focus for Woolwich . with visitors being actively encouraged to lengthen their stay. and other forms of visitor accommodation that need to be safeguarded for their contribution to the Borough wide tourism strategy and to meeting local needs. particularly residential areas. including the Firepower Museum and the Greenwich Heritage Centre. thus increasing their level of spending. and protect existing. Deptford Creek is an area for focused tourism. be strictly controlled to ensure that they do not have a negative impact on adjoining areas.15 9. Charlton House and Oxleas Woods. Well Hall Pleasaunce.the variety of buildings. In Woolwich.Reason 9. however. facilities for camping and caravanning in the Borough. the benefits of tourism can be dispersed and built upon. there is an identifiable shortage of ‘value for money’ hotel accommodation. Through managing tourism activities and promoting the attractions found wider afield within the Borough such as Eltham Palace. Conversions should. It is not envisaged that this demand could be fully met through the construction of new hotels. quality of architecture and accessible location lends this site to development that incorporates tourism facilities. the emphasis will be on providing basic tourist infrastructure to establish a secondary focus for the development of tourism in the Borough.14 This approach seeks to upgrade the quality and diversity of tourism development and by doing so to improve the quality of tourism related employment available to local people across the Borough and provide key elements of the local business infrastructure. It is through this diversification of the tourism product found in Greenwich that a more sustainable tourism economy could be developed. 9. a further 36. According to the London Plan (2004).13 Over the plan period Greenwich will have established a number of hotels. The Borough is home to a range of accommodation and whilst it has a reputation of good value accommodation for the independent traveller. Camping and Caravanning T4 The Council will seek to provide additional. cultural and creative development contributing to mixed use policies and wider regeneration (see London Plan. Future tourism development in Eltham Town Centre should be geared towards providing ancillary facilities serving tourist attractions such as Eltham Palace in the Eltham area as a whole. In Greenwich Town Centre future effort and resources will be concentrated on improving existing facilities and relieving congestion.The ability to promote Greenwich as an overnight tourist destination or as an alternative place to stay as part of a London visit is undermined by a shortage of hotel stock (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010).

Camping and caravanning facilities also help to meet the need for budget accommodation.Reason 9.17 The existing camping and caravanning site at the Abbey Wood Caravan Club is well used. TOURISM 181 .

182 TOURISM .

10. The Waterfront also contains numerous tightly knit residential areas. The policies aim to achieve the right balance between development.10. whilst protecting and enhancing their natural habitats. and community interests to deliver lasting community benefits.These include the Millennium Dome. SW2 The Council recognises and will seek to enhance the value of the River Thames and Deptford Creek as waterways rich in biodiversity and environmental quality. The Waterfront is also an area of dynamic change. Major new development and infrastructure projects contrast with the legacy of dereliction and low investment when the previous Development Plan was adopted. set within areas of high heritage value and thriving residential communities. The Greenwich Strategy encourages more cultural activity in the Borough. The characteristics of the principal communities in the Waterfront Area and the development issues for their localities are set out below. bringing about the regeneration of the whole area and realising its economic. environmental. However. including all land to the north of the North Kent railway line (see Map 12).6 WATERFRONT 183 . which have generated renewed interest and act as a catalyst for further change. other parts of London and the South East. WATERFRONT GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 10. to improve the quality of life and opportunities for local residents. and strategic open spaces such as Greenwich Park. conservation. and an archaeological and recreational resource.4 10. for recreation and leisure. It is a waterway rich in biodiversity. the Jubilee Line and DLR extensions.3 The Waterfront is an area of rich diversity. many dating back to the mid-19th century. most of that will be accessible to the public from the Riverside Walk. a range of regeneration initiatives are underway to capitalise and build on the Borough’s improved profile and infrastructure. cultural and recreational potential. including the Woolwich Royal Arsenal. The River Thames The River Thames is a major linear open space that frames some of the Borough’s key historic buildings. and an essential part of the Borough’s character and landscape in their own right. to secure the sustainable development of balanced waterfront communities. Despite the changes underway. Canary Wharf and the Square Mile. social. National Maritime Museum and the Royal Observatory in the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site.1 The Greenwich Waterfront area stretches from Deptford to Thamesmead. a transport route.2 SW1 The Council will facilitate the redevelopment and re-use of remaining redundant land and buildings in the Waterfront during the Plan period. Parts of the Riverside display a distinguished natural and historical heritage. as Open Spaces. It is an area of strategic importance benefiting from improved transport connections to the West End. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 10. promotes the Waterfront Area as a transport route.The Borough contains 14 kilometres of fully tidal river frontage. majestic buildings like the former Royal Naval College. and their intimate scale and character contrast with the Riverside industrial buildings and open spaces. The Borough has 6 wharves currently 10. The Waterfront Chapter aims to deliver national and regional planning objectives for sustainable land use by facilitating the regeneration of large tracts of previously derelict land.5 10. some still suffer from a poor environment and inadequate community facilities.

Map 12: Waterfront Area © Crown copyright Waterfront Area 184 WATERFRONT .

To the north. canals. Significant recent projects include a major new residential development on the Western Reach at the mouth of Deptford Creek. The London Plan identifies Deptford Creek~Greenwich Riverside as an Opportunity Area. Deptford Creek and the Thames. lies a Defined Industrial Area occupied by two of the Borough’s largest industrial WATERFRONT 185 .11 Development in the Creekside area will extend both the size of Greenwich Town Centre and its range of facilities. Downstream from Deptford Creek the waterfront is undergoing considerable development. As part of the DLR project a mixed-use development has brought an improved range of retail and leisure opportunities to the Town Centre at Cutty Sark station. In response the Council has adopted the West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). It is an area with a significant maritime heritage.There is also heightened interest in a number other sites around Deptford Creek. cultural and creative enterprise are harnessed to further regenerate the area and benefit local communities. It is benefiting from ongoing programmes of environmental improvement and housing estate refurbishment. It also seeks to further improve public access between Greenwich Town Centre.The Blue Ribbon Network recognises the special character of river and canal corridors as both a strategic and a scarce resource.The proposed Waterfront Transit 2nd Phase would improve public transport links with other town centres and waterfront visitor attractions in the Borough. It is intended to update the framework in 2007/8 possibly with Lewisham Council. and Lewisham without adding to road traffic. Deptford Creek is experiencing considerable development pressure. as Supplementary Planning Guidance. near the mouth of Deptford Creek and at Victoria Deep Water Terminal on the west side of Greenwich Peninsula. and its replacement with a mixture of private and affordable flats and family homes.The town is rich in local history and famous for its historic buildings and monuments. to improve public transport. commercial. and addresses the competing needs. containing local authority housing estates and a variety of small scale commercial and industrial uses. 10. The extended Docklands Light Railway is encouraging further investment. This will include the demolition of the New Haddo Estate. 10. despite a permanent ban on heavy goods vehicles.The former Royal Naval College and Dreadnought Seaman’s Hospital have been refurbished as visitor attractions and for use by Greenwich University. It is also an emerging node for cultural and creative industries as exemplified by the Laban Centre for contemporary dance in the neighbouring Lewisham Borough. Central London. streams and open water spaces.8 10. and straddles the Borough boundary with Lewisham. uses and demands that are placed upon them. and has improved accessibility by linking the Town Centre with Docklands. and the town centre also benefits from the Trinity School of Music and the refurbished Cutty Sark Gardens.reserved for cargo-handling use under Safeguarding Direction and two deepwater mooring sites. Deptford Creekside Deptford Creekside lies to the west of Greenwich Town Centre. 10. on the west of Greenwich Peninsula. incorporating the Creek area and the western end of Greenwich town centre. and as far as Woolwich contains large areas that are predominately industrial in character.10 Greenwich Town Centre is a World Heritage Site and a key visitor destination for London. and to upgrade community facilities and open spaces. It suffers from traffic congestion caused by through traffic and visitors.9 Greenwich Town Centre 10.7 The London Plan (2004) defines a Blue Ribbon Network that includes the Thames and London’s other rivers.12 The East Greenwich Riverside comprises two distinct areas. The Framework seeks to ensure that emerging opportunities for the arts. East Greenwich Riverside 10.

and is home to the flagship Millennium Dome and Millennium Village.010 new homes. old Riverside industrial structures.The Village is providing over 3.13 To the south of the industrial area. The urban quarter will provide 10. office. This also relieves wharves in less appropriate locations. Part of Badcock’s wharf is operating as a boat repair yard. and a new school and health centre have been built. retail and light industrial uses. public spaces and a Thameside promenade. Charlton Riverside and The Thames Barrier 10. to take full advantage of its potential for river and rail for transport of raw and finished products. which are protected by a Safeguarding Direction. which are either under-used or used for activities that generate problems for surrounding residential areas. which is expected to remain in use for river-based freight. It includes the safeguarded Victoria Deep Water Terminal.14 The Peninsula is the largest and most important development area in the Borough. under review) sets out a vision and plans for future development over the next 15 to 20 years. high-density environmental quality. This includes Angerstein and Murphy’s Wharves. and is generally well separated from residential neighbourhoods.17 The majority of the Charlton riverside area east of the Aggregates Zone is within a Defined Industrial Area. in particular the Jubilee Line underground station at North Greenwich.The London Plan recognises the Greenwich Peninsula as an Opportunity Area and the Millennium Village as an example of a new brownfield site urban village development based on a new public transport interchange.employers. Alcatel and Amylum. amongst others. hotel and community uses including schools and health care provision. It will therefore be protected from land speculation pressures and safeguarded for long-term business/industrial use.15 A Masterplan for the future of the Peninsula has been granted outline planning permission (the MDL Masterplan).The Council encourages this area be used more intensively for aggregate production.16 The Angerstein Wharf area at Bugsby’s Reach.Associated with the development are new retail and leisure facilities. have been designated for employment-led redevelopment. It has strong community ties and contains picturesque cottages. applying the principles of Sustainable Residential Quality and urban intensification.The Masterplan envisages a new urban quarter based on the principles of sustainable mixed use. 10. encompassing land between the Thames and East Greenwich district centre. 10. East Greenwich Riverside displays a mixed. The development will bring significant regeneration benefits to the Borough and the wider Thames Gateway region. and buildings of historic importance. Regeneration funding is also available for industrial activities and other improvements (see Chapter 2 Jobs and the Local Economy). It benefits from improved accessibility following the Woolwich Road widening. also designated a Preferred Industrial Location the London Plan.000 new homes. to provide local employment opportunities and business locations. The Dome will become a multipurpose entertainment and sports facility and provide large-scale conference capacity. is a Designated Aggregates Zone. 186 WATERFRONT . which have improved access to the Peninsula from elsewhere in the Borough and from London as a whole. The potential of the area will be enhanced by the radically improved public transport networks proposed in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). Greenwich Peninsula and the Millennium Dome 10. It is expected that the development will be completed by the early 2020’s. Continued modernisation and improvements to its commercial building stock would be welcome. yet traditional working environment. as defined on the Proposals Map. 10. which whilst currently still safeguarded are proposed for de-safeguarding for alternative uses by the Mayor. The Peninsula is served by major investments in public transport. The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002.The area also benefits from a railhead (see Policy J2). Lovell’s and Granite Wharves.

000 new homes and accompanying facilities will be completed in Thamesmead between 2003 and 2016. Waterfront schemes will be subject to the policies set out elsewhere in this Plan. and the adjoining proposed mixed-use Warren Lane ‘Teardrop’ site (Site Schedule mu13) will substantially consolidate and diversify the Town Centre. The approach to the Barrier has benefited from a programme of landscaping and environmental improvements. The town centre will be complemented by development of a heritage tourism and leisure quarter on the waterfront in the Royal Arsenal and adjoining land.The London Plan identifies Thamesmead as an Opportunity Area and provides for a range of transport infrastructure works improving accessibility to the wider Thames Gateway. 10.23 The Waterfront Area is defined on Map 12.21 During the Plan period the Waterfront Transit will connect Woolwich to other waterfront attractions and town centres. enhancing links to the Green Chain Walk. Thamesmead 10. Policies 10.22 While the rest of the Waterfront area is a mixture of established communities and town centres and former and existing industrial areas.20 Woolwich contains the Borough’s largest concentration of retail. These projects are supported in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) and in the London Plan.This.10. These include the Waterfront Transit scheme and the Thames Gateway (Gallions Reach) Bridge.The Arsenal is a unique part of Britain’s industrial and military heritage. 10. but the Council has also adopted the following specific policies: WATERFRONT 187 . an important landmark and tourist attraction. and wholesale trade uses. including the major new Urban Village at Gallion’s Reach and a new urban quarter at Tripcock Point.18 Charlton Business Park is within a Strategic Employment Location identified in the London Plan. Thamesmead is a relatively new community undergoing rapid redevelopment. under review). complementing the range of uses in line with the Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (1996 & updates. and to the Jubilee Line. It offers scope for employment-based diversification including provision of ancillary local service facilities for both business and visitor markets. It is a mixed business location and a preferred location for light industry. distributive. Phase 2 is proposed to extend Transit to the DLR at Greenwich.The Council also supports the proposed DLR extension from City Airport to Woolwich opening 2009. and the Sites Schedules identify appropriate uses for the main waterfront opportunity sites.The latter will have segregated public transport lanes to connect the proposed Greenwich Waterfront and East London Transit schemes.19 The Charlton Riverside is also home to Riverside Wharf (Safeguarded) and the Thames Barrier. It is projected that 3. Woolwich Town Centre and Woolwich Royal Arsenal 10. Woolwich is identified as being an Area for Intensification in the London Plan and is undergoing unprecedented change and renewal. community and commercial office activities.

24 The Council aims to ensure that physical and infrastructural developments translate into a lasting social. improves the environment. Urban design guidelines were the cornerstone of the Strategy. and Protect and enhance the river and its foreshore for wildlife and nature conservation. v. and gives the area a strong physical and functional identity. It is anticipated the final report will be published in 2007/8. Proposals within the Area will be expected to satisfy the development principles under Policy W1 and: i. Have regard to adopted Council planning briefs. Consider strategic and local views (Policies D25 .The Strategy is ongoing but has largely been implemented. Integrate and connect new proposals with the existing pattern of development. Assist the improvement and regeneration of existing built up areas. providing new uses for old buildings. iv. Reason 10. and contribute to the completion of a continuous public riverside footpath and cycleway from Deptford to Thamesmead (Policy O16). avoid unnecessary encroachment and contribute positively to the improvement of the local environment. M37).The Council also supports construction of buildings that are energy efficient to build and run. iii.D27).25 For larger sites. Thameside Policy Area W2 The Council will seek a high quality of design respecting the special character of the River Thames within the Thames Policy Area defined on the Proposals Map. physical and economic legacy that enhances the cohesion and character of existing communities. v. The Borough’s Thames Policy Area boundaries have been defined in consultation with neighbouring Local Authorities and are in general conformity with the London Plan. Incorporate sustainable modes of passenger. and provided a framework for future development in the Waterfront. iii. integrated into the 188 WATERFRONT . identify detailed boundaries and prepare character appraisals of the river and its environs. Conserve and enhance the area’s historical heritage and biodiversity.26 The London plan states that the Boroughs must designate a Thames Policy Area. Reason 10. The appraisals are being undertaken as part of the Thames Strategy East project. This intention was at the core of the Council’s original vision in the 1991 Waterfront Strategy. iv. Build on and strengthen existing local communities and area character. 10. Develop and enhance the area’s links with the river. and the inclusion of waste separation and recycling facilities. ii. and Encourage active use of the riverfront especially in Town Centres. design guides and urban design guidelines including major development requirement for a Design Statement (see Policy D2). that use materials from sustainable sources. freight and tourist transport as appropriate (see Policies M7. It approached regeneration through a series of development initiatives and new forms of partnership. ii. ecological. Developments within the Borough’s TPA should be of a high quality design. The Plan details the content of the area surveys. planning for a balance of facilities at an early stage will be encouraged. required analysis and recommendations.Development Principles W1 Developments in the Waterfront must: i.

The Council will also seek to ensure that the scale of development is commensurate with existing or proposed infrastructure. or potential for. Redevelopment proposals for under-used sites often seek greater intensities than those existing. are designated for mixed-use redevelopment to include business.The Council will seek an overall increase in employment generating uses and proposals that reduce the level of. Upon planning permissions. sometimes including a substantial residential element.27 Mixed Use Areas have been designated to facilitate the continuing transformation to more productive uses of waterfront areas blighted by the physical. and the changing nature of the East London and Borough profile and economy. including an overall increase in B-Class floorspace on sites currently or last occupied by B Class uses and not re-allocated for other uses (see Policy J5). i. Mixed Use Areas W3 The Mixed Use Areas below. Accordingly. visitor attractions including the Millennium Dome and the Firepower Museum. including its banks and foreshore. employment-generating uses (i. business/employment activity will be resisted. transport and recreation. Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002.e. 10. If residential elements are overly dominant. Major proposals should be accompanied by a Design statement as set out in Policy D2. conditions will be attached. take into account more detailed guidance in planning briefs or approved master plans. where applicable. other Plan policies and. diversity and business activity can be sterilised.The designation seeks to capitalise on the opportunity presented by new transport infrastructure. and that affordable housing and other community benefits are provided wherever appropriate (see Policy SC2). Waterfront locations should be viewed as opportunity sites for landmark buildings and design innovation. especially public transport. 10. iii.28 In Mixed Use Areas. any Use Class that provides employment) will be permitted provided they comply with relevant Site Schedules and other Plan policies. residential and other appropriate uses.The only exception to this policy will be where the applicant can demonstrate a requirement for river-dependent use such as for water-borne transport or to enable water-foreshore recreation. as defined on the Proposals Map. or legal agreements negotiated. Deptford Creekside (West Greenwich) Greenwich Peninsula Woolwich Royal Arsenal Reason 10. to ensure a development provides a balanced mixed of uses and range of employment opportunities for existing and future residents within a reasonable timeframe. ii. It can also mar the visual character of the water space. Encroachment into the Thames or Deptford Creek. being updated) and West Greenwich Development Framework (2000) provide more detailed advice on appropriate uses and WATERFRONT 189 . so it is critical to ensure that they are re-used in an appropriate manner to secure the long term regeneration of the waterfront and improve the quality of life and opportunities for waterfront communities and other Borough residents. should be avoided as the progressive narrowing of a river channel increases the likelihood of flooding and can destroy the essential habitats and food sources for fish. Proposals must comply with the Site Schedules. and this should be reflected in the choice of quality materials. social and environmental consequences of the decline of heavy industry or port activity in the Borough. with uses mixed both horizontally and vertically.29 The Site Schedules. where redevelopment takes place the Council will seek to ensure that there is a significant rise in employment.existing pattern of development and consider existing ecology. open spaces. These areas contain many of the most significant waterfront redevelopment sites remaining in the Borough. birds and other wildlife.

Safeguarded Wharves W5 Angerstein. Masterplans that benefit from planning permission set the tone for redevelopment on Greenwich Peninsula and Woolwich Royal Arsenal.32 The extension of the Waterfront Transit to Thamesmead within the Plan period is a priority.Tunnel Glucose wharves and the Victoria Deep Water Terminal are safeguarded for river-based cargo handling. a balanced range of facilities to serve the local community. The Secretary of State has issued a Direction Notice (1998. Development proposals for all these wharves are referable to the Mayor of London. who has a duty to periodically 190 WATERFRONT . or exceptionally for a strategic proposal of essential benefit to London that cannot be provided for elsewhere in Greater London. including its residential and open space uses is likely to approach completion (see paragraph 10. Detailed guidance is provided in the Tripcock Point Development Framework (2003). subject to further consideration and clarification of matters agreed by the Council in August 2003.The development will be characterised by a high quality of sustainable urban design. Riverside. Proposals for specific areas within Thamesmead are set out in the Site Schedules. Brewery.31 In turn.5 km of river frontage which when complete will be home to over 3. and is consistent with the principle of sustainable developments.The last major residential area to be developed in Thamesmead will be Tripcock Point. Following guidance in PPS6 Planning for Town Centres and the London Plan. Where development takes place on a Safeguarded Wharf or an adjoining site. 10.33 Wharf facilities are a finite resource. to have regard to their maintenance for cargo use. public open space and a mix of dwellings including affordable housing.30 Over the Plan period the Thamesmead development.other requirements for their respective areas. Thamesmead W4 The Council supports the ongoing development of Thamesmead to form a distinctive. population growth has stimulated proposals for additional commercial development within Thamesmead district centre. which has largely preceeded the completion of residential areas which will support it. the Council will seek to ensure that all practicable measures are employed to minimise the potential conflicts between wharf operations and adjoining uses. limited additional provision may be appropriate providing it is at a scale in keeping with Thamesmead’s role as a District Centre and the needs of its local catchment (mostly within 5 minutes drive of the centre). covering 55 hectares in western Thamesmead. including 2. and does not compromise the vitality and viability of Woolwich. A modest range of neighbourhood shopping and service facilities will also be provided in the Gallions Reach Local Centre.They seek to ensure future waterfront uses deliver the Council’s vision for a revitalised and sustainable waterfront. Reason 10.000 homes. accessible and mixed community with a good quality of life and environment. and the Council supports the principle of the Thames Gateway Bridge. The movement of goods by water rather than road can help reduce traffic congestion. It will include around 2. The most significant recent scheme in Thamesmead is the Gallions Reach Urban Village.Alternative uses will only be considered if the wharf is no longer capable of being made viable for river-based cargo handling.22). air and noise pollution.500 residents. as amended 2005) affecting six wharves in Greenwich. Once unimplemented retail permissions are developed. Thamesmead centre will almost fully utilise its allocated area. 10. adopted by the Council as Supplementary Planning Guidance. Reason 10. a primary school and public open space. Murphy’s.

ii. On vacant wharves temporary uses that would not preclude freight use will be considered on merit. and proposals for moored vessels should not conflict with these established patterns of land use. Not unduly impact on the River. use of the River for tourism and recreation. Other than in the exceptional circumstances identified in the Policy. as well as the use of buffers and other mitigation techniques (see Policy E3). disposition and selection of uses. subject to ecological considerations. pollution. will be protected and encouraged. nor with other policies in the Plan and other Council strategies. including the use of any additional areas to service or support activities on a moored vessel. the River forms a backdrop to significant areas of residential and employment activity.36 Maintaining waterway support facilities and infrastructure is vital to sustaining uses on and adjacent to the Borough’s waterways. Reason 10. iv. Detailed guidance for floating vessels is set out in Advice Note 4 Planning Criteria for Floating Vessels. Floating Vessels W6 Proposals to moor temporary or permanent floating vessels on the Thames. and careful attention to the design. nor adversely effect existing or potential wharfage operations. To promote activities such as angling and uses such as boat servicing (yards exist at Badcock’s Wharf and Cory Barge Works). Historical sections of the river are not suitable for the mooring of vessels. noise and refuse generation. iii. proposals for uses other than river-based cargo handling on safeguarded wharves should be supported by an operational viability assessment of the wharf against the criteria in the London Plan. Positively contribute to the River’s life and scene.review wharf safeguarding and make recommendations to the Secretary of State with regards to existing or possible additional safeguarding directions. Not compromise existing or potential River transportation. its tributaries and other waterways for passenger. particularly along site boundaries. the provision of new facilities should be WATERFRONT 191 . industrial and employment-generating activities. transport. must: i. and is integral to the setting of historic areas including the World Heritage Site at Greenwich. unless they are of related historic character and do not obscure important riverside settings and historic views. a source of enjoyment for residents and visitors. The Thames is also an important recreational and amenity resource. recreation or other river-dependent uses. its foreshore and environs through ecological disruption. Sympathetically relate to historic waterfront and riverside areas.35 The main active River use is for passenger and freight transport. Support facilities for water-based uses W7 Support facilities and infrastructure required to enable the use of the River Thames. and Not conflict with residential amenity. 10. and the policy seeks to minimise or avoid conflicts between moored vessels and river traffic. In addition. Reason 10. v.34 The policy also seeks to ensure that operations on safeguarded wharves or development adjoining sites do not unduly fetter each other. This amounts to a dual responsibility on both wharf owners/operators and occupiers/developers of adjoining land to employ the best practicable means to minimise the potential for land use conflict. Appropriate measures include enabling continued highway access to the wharf.The London Plan suggests the Mayor and the Boroughs identify wharves to be safeguarded against development that could preclude their future use for cargo handling.

stairs and other waterway access points.encouraged. dry docks. navigation and biodiversity. subject to their impact upon flood-risk. slipways. 192 WATERFRONT . facilities and infrastructure generally will also be identified through the appraisals in the Thames Strategy East (final report expected 2007/8). boat hoists and cranes. The Borough’s support infrastructure includes mooring and land storage facilities. piers and other landing stages.Those relevant to riverbus sites are shown on the proposals maps.

other public sector agencies and the private.The general policies for Implementation are: SIM1 To monitor and review the UDP regularly to ensure it remains up-to-date. 11. Investment decisions by private developers. corporate initiatives. its Strategic Partners. Best Value requirements are a means by which local authorities are held accountable by their communities for the quality and efficiency of their services. include the introduction of Local Development Frameworks.2 The successful implementation of the plan will depend on the commitment of the Council. On the basis of these trends the Council can reach a judgement about the continuing usefulness of the Plan’s policies and when a further review or replacement Plan is required. where relevant and appropriate. continue to work in partnerships and consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents. consultation and community liaison. The Council’s own resources iv. relevant trends. These would contain various Local Development Documents 11. will need to be monitored.7 IMPLEMENTATION 193 . as set out in Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Development Frameworks (2004). the Council will consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents and planning applications.This will be carried out by. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 11. Consultation is necessary to ensure that the requirements of Best Value in Local Government and the Human Rights Act (2000) are met. such as the rate of house building. community and voluntary sectors to improving the living and working environment. including monitoring and reviewing. government. the Council will use enforcement powers to ensure compliance with planning policies. the Council. Land owners. or on behalf of.11. In particular where development is carried out without planning permission or contrary to conditions attached to a permission. For the policies in the plan to remain up-to-date and relevant to the changing circumstances of the Borough. SIM2 To attract the necessary resources to implement the plan.3 11. European and national government funds and grants iii. The resources necessary to implement the Plan include the following: i.1 The implementation of the plan can be carried out in number of ways. statutory agencies and householders (supplemented as necessary by planning obligations) 11. Planning System reforms under the 2004 Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act.4 ii.6 11. to aid the implementation of the plan. partnership working. The Council will use its planning powers.5 In order to ensure that everybody has an opportunity to participate in the planning process. attracting resources. and through enforcement. including the Council and public sector agencies All of the above need to be mobilised through partnerships and co-operative working between the Council and others. IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 11. SIM3 To use relevant planning powers in the implementation of the plan.

These will be used to monitor the effectiveness of the plan through an Annual Monitoring Report.the London-wide mechanism for data collection on planning permissions and completions.9 Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Development Frameworks (2004) recommends the use of objectives and targets to assist in monitoring whether the Plan is achieving its objectives. local employment and condition of dwellings. It will also report on progress against the LDS production schedule for LDDs.g. amongst others. Accordingly. The Council is also required to keep under review matters that may affect the development and use of land within the Borough over the Plan period. 194 IMPLEMENTATION . vi. iv. Monitoring information will also feed into. Policies Monitoring and Review IM1 The Council will both monitor changes in the planning environment and review the effectiveness of the policies and proposals of the Plan. regional and strategic planning guidance. the policies and proposals of the Plan will be monitored and reviewed on a regular basis. One of the Documents would be a Statement of Community Involvement. industrial restructuring. and amend them where necessary. and provide a projection for future housing delivery.These LDDs propose to involve the community at an early stage of preparation. as well as those required by government. maintained or changed or where the policy is serving no useful purpose. Reason 11. usually within three years of its formal adoption. vitality of shopping centres. In addition. the London Development Database . shopping and recreational behaviour. The aim of the reforms. National and European legislative changes. This approach to LDF/UDP performance measurement is supported by the London Plan (2004). Continued public consultation. ii. iii. will report on a range of matters. This can help to identify where policies need to be strengthened. The results of more detailed local studies such as planning briefs. setting the standards for community participation. External influences such as demographic and economic trends e.These changes are made up of a number of factors: i. and in part derive from.Targets and indicators derived from the Greenwich Strategy (2003) are also included where appropriate. In addition. Changing national. v. and vii.8 The Annual Monitoring Report. 11. is to achieve greater local ownership and legitimacy for the Council’s land use policies. including progress assessment against the indicators and targets in this Chapter. another LDD. not least the extent to which policies are being successfully implemented.10 To assist in this process and in accordance with Best Value Performance Indicators a comprehensive set of key targets and indicators have been set out in Table IM1. and national trends such as birth and death rates.11 The Council needs both to observe and analyse changes that are taking place in the planning environment and to assess whether the Plan’s policies and proposals are being successfully implemented. the Sustainability Appraisal indicates the impact each policy in the plan is likely to have on the environment. The availability and uptake of developable land in the Borough. Local trends and problems such as changes in traffic movement.(LDDs) that replace the Unitary Development Plan. the proposed changes to the planning system would require the Council to replace this UDP with a Local Development Framework. 11. 11.

Partnership IM3 The Council will work in partnership with the community and voluntary sector as well as with other bodies and private businesses. 11. for the implementation of the policies and proposals in this Plan. 11. It is Council policy to pursue all available funding for appropriate schemes.Resources IM2 The Council will seek all available resources.17 The Greenwich Partnership is the Local Strategic Partnership for Greenwich Borough. and • Community benefits secured via planning obligation (see Policy SC2). 11. • Spending by Government Departments and other public service providers including the Housing Corporation and English Partnerships. the Single Programme (incorporating remaining Single Regeneration Budget. at all levels of implementation of this Plan.13 The Council’s Economic Development Strategy 2002-07 identifies that over £180 million regeneration funding has been secured along with an estimated £2 billion of public and private sector investment. public and private. • Regional and sub-regional government spending including Transport for London and the London Development Agency. Financial resources include: • European Social Fund and European Regional Development Fund grant funding. the public sector contribution in Greenwich is likely to provide a substantial amount of development investment over the Plan period.16 The Council is committed to working in partnership. 11. Reason 11. environmental improvements and community capacity building. access. SRB) and the National Lottery. although the Council and the London Development Agency are two of a number of public sector agencies that own land which will become available for development in the Borough. The availability of resources is one of the main determinants of what the Plan can achieve. business support. building on the success of the former Greenwich Waterfront Development Partnership. Most land in the borough is privately owned. housing. • Investment by infrastructure and utilities service providers. Reason 11.12 The 2004 Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act requires planning authorities to have regard to the likely availability of resources when preparing their Plans. • Investment by private land-owners and developers. These funds will assist in addressing issues including skills and training. • Council Capital and Revenue Spending Strategies. the Sustainable Communities Plan in the Thames Gateway could make a significant contribution to UDP implementation resources as it is likely to receive considerable Government funding. community safety. community and voluntary sectors with the Council and the public sector as a IMPLEMENTATION 195 .14 The availability of developable land is an important resource to implement the UDP. with the community and voluntary sector as well as with other bodies and private businesses. • Targeted regeneration funding sources including Neighbourhood Renewal.15 Finally. It brings together the Borough’s business. In addition to private investment by households and businesses.

20 The Council is also a member of a number of partnerships that cover areas larger than the Borough. ranging from neighbour consultations for small residential extensions to widespread public consultations on major applications. community and environmental groups as relevant on planning applications. social and environmental regeneration of Thames Gateway. local businesses and other stakeholders in preparing Planning briefs. Government legislation requires all planning authorities to consult local populations. other planning studies including Conservation Area designation and on major transport infrastructure and traffic management schemes. transport providers. and ensure that their views are taken into account in making planning decisions.19 A Woolwich Regeneration Agency was set up with support from the Department for Communities and Local Government. This consultation is essential to ensure that everyone who may be affected by a Plan has an opportunity to put their point of view and have an opportunity to influence the process of change. It will oversee implementation of the Greenwich Strategy (2003) (See Part 1 paragraph 5. the public. and Engage with statutory bodies and other agencies as appropriate. with specialist advice from the Greenwich Council for Racial Equality and the Greenwich Association of Disabled People. and the Greenwich Community Network Steering Group. businesses and passenger interests to improve bus and rail services. Consult with adjoining occupiers. older people and minority ethnic groups are given an opportunity to participate in planning decisions. the Greenwich Public Services Forum. statutory authorities and other stakeholders when preparing a land use plan. iii. to reduce dependence on the car and increase accessibility to jobs.The Council is also a member of SELTRANS (The South East London Transport Strategy). and proposed legislative changes would further strengthen consultation arrangements. operators.Woolwich and Eltham work to improve their town centres to better serve local communities and businesses. London Development Agency and the Council. 196 IMPLEMENTATION . the Council will seek to improve the quality and quantity of planning material available online by the end of 2005. 11. Thames Gateway London Partnership is a sub-regional alliance comprising local authorities and Training and Enterprise Councils in east and southeast London.There is also a town centre manager for Thamesmead who oversees the long term development of Thamesmead town centre. a partnership between local authorities. advice and guidance to those interested in or affected by development in Greenwich.21 An integral part of the planning system is regular public consultation and liaison. London. 11. and adjoining areas of Essex and Kent and English Partnerships. 11. 11.The Thames Gateway London Partnership will play a key role in the development of the East London Sub Regional Development Framework. These include the Thames Gateway London Partnership and Thames Estuary Partnership covering parts of the Thames Gateway. ii. Area strategies.22 The Council will maintain its policy of consulting those affected on planning applications.The Partnership includes members from the Council. economic.26).18 Town Centre Managers for the Greenwich area. The Council will seek to provide planning information.whole. Consultation and Community Liaison IM4 The Council will: i. Reason 11. the Bexley and Greenwich Chamber of Commerce.The Council participates in the activities of the Partnership to bring about sustainable physical. In particular. people with disabilities. Engage with the community. It is particularly important to ensure that disadvantaged groups such as women.

28 In the interests of the general implementation of this Plan. the Council will take enforcement action against those who undertake development or carry out works without the appropriate consent or permission under the Planning and related Acts. Following the landowners default. the Council will not hesitate to take planning enforcement action where appropriate. plans and initiatives. almost immediately. and in compliance with government guidance. a planning injunction. Strategies adopted or being prepared by the Council are identified in Part One paragraph 5. stating the required steps to remedy an alleged breach within a time limit. and in turn the UDP assists in the delivery of those strategies.There are a wide range of such initiatives that can be pursued. any activity to which the accompanying enforcement notice relates.The Greenwich Strategy is the overarching plan for all these strategies. from Council wide strategies on issues such as regeneration. Corporate Initiatives 11. To serve a listed building enforcement notice. ii. To serve an enforcement notice. and to charge the owner for the costs incurred. Reason 11.24 The implementation of the Plan can also be achieved through corporate initiatives within the Council.27 The Council’s main enforcement powers are: i. or where conditions attached to consents or permissions are not observed or where other breaches of planning control have been committed.26). 11. To enter on privately-owned land for enforcement purposes. IMPLEMENTATION 197 . 11. to enter land and carry out the remedial work required by an enforcement notice. To serve a breach of condition notice if there is a failure to comply with a condition imposed on a grant of planning permission. The Council and its partners will contribute to at many levels. 11.25 Policies in the UDP draw on a range of other Council strategies.1 and 5. if conditions attached to a permission are not complied with. specifying the alleged contravention and requiring steps to be taken within a stated period to remedy it.26 The Council has powers granted under the Town and Country Planning Acts to take action when development is started without planning permission.11. or when other breaches of planning control have been committed.28. iii.23 The Council will also carry out public consultations in the preparation of planning briefs for individual development sites and on other proposals. jointly and through individual services (see Part One paragraphs 2. To serve a stop notice. which can prohibit. and vi. through to more focused strategies on capital expenditure as expressed in Housing Investment Programmes and the Local Implementation Plan (for transport). Enforcement IM5 In circumstances where it is considered necessary in the public interest. v. in particular their spatial and land use dimensions. iv. On a wider level the Council will carry out consultations and have regular liaison with various statutory bodies.

5 3. The percentage of dwellings delivered on previously developed land through planning permissions and completions (Best Value Indicator BV106). Additional number of dwellings permitted and completed annually. B1. monitored from planning permissions and completions. Jobs & the Local Economy To protect sites in designated employment areas.25 hectares).100 net additional dwellings over the period 1997 to 2016 (target inclusive of vacant and non-selfcontained accommodation) (Policy SH1). Source: the Building Research Establishment. 2016 (Policy SH5). To ensure 10 per cent of new build dwellings (including affordable housing) on developments of 25 units or more are at full wheelchair standard or capable of being so adapted (Policy H19). B2.3 Provide at least 35% of total housing provision Additional number of affordable units provided annually. To provide a mix of dwellings by size and type Number and percentage of dwellings by number of (Policy H15). Number and percentage of dwellings completed annually that achieve the Building Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ excellent rating.4 3.2 3. to serve areas experiencing significant new development (Policy SC3). monitored by permissions and completion data. 3.000 m2 gross). bedrooms and by dwelling type.1) (Policy SJ4). B8 floorspace (i) permitted (ii) completed (schemes exceeding 1.1 2. Housing To make provision for at least 16. Percentage of new build dwellings (including affordable housing) on developments of 25 units or more at full wheelchair standard or capable of being so adapted. Area of land designated or in use for employment purposes (including employment Site Schedules) where planning permission is granted for non-employment uses (sites exceeding 0. and sites elsewhere in active employment use. Benefits & Services To ensure adequate land use provision for Number of relevant planning applications granted/ refused community. health care and education facilities which involve a change of use. as affordable housing between 1997 and monitored from planning permissions and completions.1 Community Needs.Table IM1: Targets and Indicators for UDP Monitoring UDP Objective ~ Target 1 1. Indicator and Monitoring Information 2 2. To achieve a high standard of design quality and environmental performance in new housing development (Policy H7).6 198 IMPLEMENTATION . from change of use to non-employment activity (‘employment uses’ as defined in para 2.2 3 3.1 3. To exceed 90% of dwellings provided on previously developed land (Policy H1). To increase the quantity of modern business floorspace in the borough (Policy SJ1).

IMPLEMENTATION 199 . Number of applications where an Environmental Impact Assessment concludes there would be an unacceptable impact on the environment.000 sqm and/or proportion of energy generated from 10 residential units. the percentage and number that renewable sources (Policies E8 and E9) incorporate renewable energy production equipment to provide at least 10% of the predicted energy requirements. 5. from the forthcoming Borough Open Space Strategy. Number of relevant planning permissions granted where they maintain the Green Chain Walk or riverside walk/cycleway networks. and those refused that would have caused severence.4 4.3 To improve energy efficiency and increase the On developments of at least 1. 4.3 4. Greenwich Strategy). To protect viable existing and encourage new The percentage of the Borough designated as open space provision for leisure and sports facilities and accessible to the public. SO4). Greenwich Strategy). (Policies E18 and E19) To prevent development that would have an unacceptably damaging impact on the environment.UDP Objective ~ Target 4 4.This will be assessed by scrutiny of Environmental Impact Assessments (Policy SE2). Number of planning permissions implemented along the route that make contributions towards the riverside footpath and cycleway. Monitor via the Green Chain Working Party. Environmental Protection To prevent development within fluvial flood risk areas or catchment areas where inadequate flood defence or attenuation measures are taken.2 5. 5 5.1 4. Baseline data to be derived (Policy SO1.2 Open Spaces To prevent inappropriate development on identified open space (Policies SO2. Area (hectares) of land designated as a Sites of Nature Conservation Importance or Site of Special Scientific Interest that is lost to non-ancillary development.5 To protect Sites of Nature Conservation Importance from inappropriate development (Policy O18). To complete the riverside footpath and cycleway as part of any development proposal adjacent to the route (Policy O17.1 Number of planning permissions granted contrary to the advice of the Environment Agency on either flood defence or water quality grounds. Indicator and Monitoring Information Designated open space lost to non-ancillary development. To protect the ‘Green Chain Walk’ and riverside footpath (Policies O14 and O15).

To preserve all Listed Buildings from neglect or inappropriate changes. Town Centres To maintain viable.000 m2 gross).1 7. non-A1 and vacant units in defined shopping frontages (Source: Experian GOAD and/or bi-annual surveys). To complete the Waterfront Transit from Greenwich to Abbey Wood (Policy M12). The number of buildings on the English Heritage Listed Buildings at Risk Register Success rate in defending appeals against refusal of consent for inappropriate development requiring Listed Building or Conservation Area Consent. New A1 retail and D2 indoor leisure floorspace permitted/completed (i) within defined centres and (ii) outside defined centres on sites not allocated for retail use (proposals exceeding 1. Financial or land contribution by Section 106 legal agreement towards Waterfront Transit. The proportion of planning permissions that exceed the maximum applicable parking standards. Management Proposals.2 6.UDP Objective ~ Target 6 6.TC2. vibrant and thriving Town Centres (Major.1 Design & Conservation To ensure high quality design of all development particularly major schemes. 7 7.3 6.1 8. STC2.3 8 8. To increase the retail and leisure floorspace in Woolwich.4 To preserve the archaeological heritage of the Number of approved Archaeological Assessment Borough (Policies D30 & D31). D16 & D17).D22). and reduce the number of listed buildings at risk (Policies SD3.TC3. STC2). 6. Progress of works on the Woolwich DLR extension and station terminus.2 200 IMPLEMENTATION . To preserve and enhance the character of Number of published Conservation Area Appraisals and designated Conservation Areas (Policies SD3.2 7. D1 and D2). Percentage of A1. To implement car-parking provision in accordance with the maximum standards set out in Policies M23 to M27. District & Local Centres) with a range of shops and services (Policies STC1. Statements. those located on key development sites and those that contribute strongly to the image of the Borough (Policies SD1. Civic Trust).g. Indicator and Monitoring Information Number of Design Statements provided by applicants of major schemes. Eltham and Greenwich Town Centres over the lifetime of the Plan (Policies STC1. D18 . Movement To complete the Docklands Light Railway (DLR) link to Woolwich Arsenal (Policy M8). Number of schemes nominated for and/or awarded a design award (e.TC9 and TC14).

Number of planning applications for major new tourist facilities granted/refused within.UDP Objective ~ Target 9 9.e. Monitor through Planning and Building Control records. loss of entertainment facilities. and providing new waterway support facilities and infrastructure to enable use of the Thames and Deptford Creek for river-dependent uses (Policy W7) To reduce the amount of vacant and/or derelict land in the Waterfront Area. or outside.1 Tourism Indicator and Monitoring Information To protect viable existing and encourage Number of Tourism-related planning applications new provision for tourism.2 IMPLEMENTATION 201 . designated Town Centres and other sites designated in the UDP. To locate major new tourist facilities within established Town Centres or on sites identified in the Plan (Policy T1) Waterfront Protecting existing.2 10 10. Area of vacant and/or derelict land remaining. cultural and granted/refused that involve a change of use (i. Use the National Land Use Database and Council Geographic Information System records to establish a baseline and thereafter continue to monitor. (Policies ST1 and ST2) existing facilities). arts. 9. (Policy SW1) Number and type of water support facilities gained or lost through planning application decisions.1 10.

202 IMPLEMENTATION .

SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES Proposals Map Annotation Community Needs and Services Jobs Housing Open Spaces Movement Mixed Uses cb j h o m mu UDP Page 204 205-207 208 209-211 212-213 214-221 SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES 203 .

10) Existing Use Adventure Playground Proposal Community buildings Description The long term aim is to provide community buildings on these sites to serve the Meridian Estate. If the Study concludes that all or part of the site is not needed for Community Facilities.COMMUNITY NEEDS AND SERVICES No. See the proposed Kidbrooke Area Development SPD and Policy H4 (Kidbrooke Development Area). a school. Outline planning permission granted May 2006 for 2000 dwellings. development subject to a Flood Risk assessment in line with Environment Agency advice. service and business uses (ref.87) Vacant Primary School 204 SITE SCHEDULES: COMMUNITY NEEDS AND SERVICES . Replacement of the existing school with expanded capacity for Year 7 and Post 16. cb2 Thomas Tallis Secondary School (2. adopted September 2003.Town Centre uses including residential and B1 (office) uses will be considered. See the Tripcock Point Development Framework. cb1 Site (hectares) Site on the corner of Horseferry Place & Thames Street (0. and may involve Town Centre uses to facilitate community provision The site is subject to a Community Services Study as part of the Tripcock Point Planning Application Section 106 Agreement. hotel and ancillary retail. 03/2618/O).The existing adventure playground to remain in the interim.61) Vacant Significant Community Uses.79) School playing grounds / vacant Secondary school and ancillary uses THAMESMEAD cb3 Community/ Civic site. Thamesmere Drive (0. cb4 Tripcock Point school site (1. Part of an area at risk of Fluvial Flooding.That part of the site in Metropolitan Open Land should be used for open space activities ancillary to the school.

87) Business Centre Offices. scale ancillary retailing and services. j4 17-37 & 18-36 Bowater Road. and not compromise Deptford Creek ecology. Wall and Anchor and Hope including Cory’s B8 Lane (1. No. Business Units (B1) Bookers warehouse and former petrol station SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS 205 . B2. Part of the site has planning permission for light industry and associated offices. Community j2 Riverside between Lombard Industry Industry B1b/c. Eastmoor Street is the main visitor access to the Thames Barrier.31) Storage. Planning permission at Skillions for 26. Proposed uses should exploit the potential of the riverside wharves. B1 uses.711 sqm office and business redevelopment. car workshops.JOBS NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites. Construction Industry B1b/c. Multi-storey pre-war industrial / commercial buildings . Bramshot Avenue (4. j3 Former railway sidings refurbished as a depot with open storage. Preference for the retention of Cory’s works. Adjoins Crossrail works site to which it provides safeguarded road access (see Site m4a). Scope for higher density and multi-storey business development. commercial j5 Thames Barrier Approach.14) Existing Use Proposal Description Under construction with Site j13 for up to 106. Small (Skillions). studio workshops (B1). See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). B8 vacant with Commercial.retention preferred if practicable. Eastmoor Street and Westmoor Streets (2. B8 plus ancillary services. Greenwich Business Centre should be retained if redevelopment for the permitted or an alternative business redevelopment does not prove viable. Development must relate sympathetically with adjoining listed warehouses and Mumford’s Mill.000sqm industrial uses phased 2003-2010 (ref. Listed former Council depot building to be retained and re-used. Was mostly B2. If buildings retained: Offices. (1. j1 Site (hectares) White Hart Triangle.68) Part vacant. offices. 1-3 Faraday Way (1. Public realm improvements required. studio industry. 01/1071). White Hart Lane (14.93) barge works/ Warehousing/ Offices/part vacant Angerstein Triangle. B8 Industry B1b/c. B2. site. vocational training. small breakers yards. j6 25-81 Greenwich High Road Greenwich Light Industry.62) B8 vehicle storage Light industry/ Warehousing B1b/c.

JOBS
NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.
No. j7 Site (hectares) Brookmarsh Industrial Estate & Phoenix Wharf, Lower Norman Road (0.93) Existing Use Proposal Description Longer term there may be scope for comprehensive redevelopment around Greenwich station, whereupon this site may have scope for more intensive mixed business and residential use. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). 1960-1970’s Light Industry/ Small small business / Business Units/ industrial units, Offices (B1). builders merchant.

j8

55-71 Norman Road & railway arches (0.42)

Builders yard & Light Industry/ Small Longer term there may be scope for railway arches Business Units (B1). comprehensive redevelopment around Greenwich station, whereupon this site may have scope for more intensive mixed business and residential use. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). Various commercial including lorry depot and a vacant site Employment (B class uses) Outline planning permission granted for 18,600 sqm B1c use on the vacant “Gateway site” as part of the Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. 02/2903). See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (Nov 2002, being updated). Buffer strip between Aggregates zone and Millennium Urban Village. Outline planning permission for employment use. Small corner site west of Co-op funeral parlour on Woolwich Road roundabout, providing access to industrial uses in Warspite Road; residential and industrial uses under construction in Ruston Road.

j9

Site to east of A102 (M), west of Bugsby’s Way (4.78)

j10

Horn Link Way / Pear Tree Way north of Bugsby’s Way (1.16) J/o Warspite Road and Rushton Road / Woolwich Road (0.40)

Vacant / open storage

Employment / light industry (B1)

j11

Vacant

Industry/ employment (B1b/c, B8)

j12

Harvey’s site, Ramac Way (0.83)

Vacant

Industry (B1b/c, B8) May be affected by Waterfront Transit route. Scope to refurbish/redevelop adjoining Ramac Industrial Estate.

THAMESMEAD j13 Land at Central Way, Nathan Construction Way, Purland Road, east of site previously Belmarsh Prison (10.50) vacant Industry (B1b/c, B2, B8). Under construction with Site j1 for up to 106,000 sqm industrial uses phased 2003-2010 (ref. 01/1071). Site provides safeguarded road access to Crossrail works (see Site m5).

206

SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS

JOBS
NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.
No. j14 Site (hectares) Site fronting Nathan Way (1.05) 4-40 Nathan Way Existing Use Vacant Proposal Industry (B1b/c, B2, B8) Industry, offices (B1, B2, B8) Hotel, light industry, business (B1, B8), other non-retail commercial Description Previously safeguarded site for road link to White Hart Triangle Land, now released for industrial use. Close to Plumstead rail station. May be affected by proposed Crossrail safeguarding. Outline planning permission for a hotel and associated A3 use (ref. 01/2523). Partly below level of A206. Close to Plumstead rail station.

j15

Vacant (0.52)

j16

Site to the east of Plumstead Bus Garage (0.86)

Vacant

SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS

207

HOUSING
NB: Housing will form a significant part of the uses sought on most allocated Mixed Use sites.
No. h1 Site (hectares) Site west of Tilfen Offices, Harrow Manor Way (1.12) McMillan Street (0.15) Eltham pools (0.37) National maritime Museum storage site, Nelson Mandela Road (1.72) Existing Use Open Land Proposal Residential Description Scope to develop in conjunction with Gallions Housing Association offices if these become operationally surplus. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). Subject to relocation of the pools as part of the leisure centre permitted in Archery Road (see site mu2) Outline planning permission for residential use (2004). Development will need to include completion of the wildlife link between the two parts of Nature Conservation Site nc7.

h2 h3

Various

Housing

Swimming pool Residential

h4

Museum storage

Residential

h5

Thomas Tallis school site (2.40)

Secondary school and grounds Housing and open space

Predominately See the pending Kidbrooke Area housing, ancillary Development SPD and Policy H4 community services, (Kidbrooke Development Area) retail Predominately See the pending Kidbrooke Area housing, ancillary Development SPD and Policy H4 community services, (Kidbrooke Development Area) Wingfield Primary School Predominately housing, ancillary community services, Holy Family School See the pending Kidbrooke Area Development SPD and Policy H4 (Kidbrooke Development Area). Re-alignment of Kidbrooke Park Road in agreement with TfL. Part of the area is at risk of Fluvial Flooding, development subject to a Flood Risk assessment in line with Environment Agency advice.

h6

West Ferrier precinct (21.88)

h7

East Ferrier Estate (19.58)

Housing, open space, leisure

THAMESMEAD h8 Land adjacent Broadwater Dock (0.77) Vacant Residential Planning permission for 70 flats (2006). Proposals also include improvements to surrounding open space, infilling and renovation of dock.

208

SITE SCHEDULES: HOUSING

OPEN SPACES
No. o1 Site (hectares) Woolwich Common Temporary MoD building site, Ha Ha Road (3.47) Existing Use Temporary open space/ vacant land Proposal Extension to Common Description The site was formerly part of Woolwich Common and has been occupied by temporary buildings used by the MoD since the 2nd World War. It is intended that the site should revert to open space use when the temporary buildings are vacated by the MoD, to reinstate the continuity of the Common. The Hervey Road playing field lies in an area of local park deficiency.The playing field was originally acquired for a new secondary school development. If the site is surplus to educational requirements as a playing field consideration should be given to its reversion to the original purpose for which it was agreed. If the site is surplus to education needs generally, the site should remain in open space uses, consistent with Policies O7 and O9. See the pending Kidbrooke Area Development SPD and Policy H4 (Kidbrooke Development Area)

o2

Hervey Road Playing Field (4.80)

Education/ Playing Field

Local Park

o3

Sutcliffe Park extension (6.50)

Housing and open space

Open space extension from Sutcliffe Park to Kidbrooke railway station

o4

University of Greenwich Avery Hill Campus, Mansion Site (7.49) University of Greenwich Avery Hill Campus, Southwood Site (7.09)

University University accommodation expansion

Major Developed Site in Metropolitan Open Land for University expansion. See Policy O3. Major Developed Site in Metropolitan Open Land. Planning permission (2003) for 6,500m2 net increase in teaching floorspace. See Policy O3.

o5

University University accommodation expansion

FOOTPATH AND CYCLEWAY PROPOSALS o6 Riverside Walk, Borough boundary to Millennium Quay (N/A) Industry Riverside Walkway It is the Council’s objective to create a continuous riverside walkway alongside the River Thames from Deptford to Thamesmead. It is proposed that the ‘missing links’ will be completed as and when proposals are brought forward for redevelopment of riverside sites. (Policy O16). See also Site Proposal mu32.

SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES

209

OPEN SPACES
No. o7 Site (hectares) Riverside Walk, Deptford Creek to Horseferry Place) (N/A) Riverside Walk, Anchor Wharf to Point Wharf (N/A) Existing Use Industry/ vacant Riverside footpath, industrial uses Proposal Riverside Walkway Description As proposal o6

o8

Walkway improvement including riverside amenity open spaces and viewing area.

Environmental improvements will be carried out to the existing riverside footpath. Opportunities will be taken to realign the footpath alongside the River whenever possible. Small riverside open spaces and viewing areas will be created where opportunities arise. (Policy O16). As for proposal o6.

o9

Riverside Walk,Thames Barrier to Warspite Road (N/A) Riverside Walk, Woolwich Dockyard to Woolwich Ferry (N/A) Riverside Walk, Ferry Approach Link (N/A) Green Chain Walk, Butterfly Lane to Footscray Road (N/A)

Industry

Riverside Walkway

o10

Industry

Riverside Walkway

As for proposal o6. See site proposal mu6. As for proposal o6. The Council, in co-operation with the other constituent authorities of the GCJC, has way-marked a spinal network in the Green Chain (“Green Chain Walk”). Most of the network already exists in the form of public footpaths or pathways through public open space.These proposals cover various ‘missing links’ which will extend or improve the network and create circular and continuous routes through the Green Chain open land within GC.The Council intends to implement them as and when the opportunity arises and subject to reaching agreement with the landowners. (Policy O15). As for proposal o12.

o11 o12

Depot Private sportsground and playing fields

Riverside Walkway Link Footpath

o13

Green Chain Walk, Footscray Road to Court Road (N/A) Green Chain Walk, Dothill Road to Oxleas Wood and to Bexley at Woodlands Farm (N/A)

Private Golf Course Community farm, footpath

Footpath

o14

Footpath

As for proposal o12.

210

SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES

It will include Riverside Walk. o16 Tripcock Park East (c. Park includes site of Nature Conservation Importance where management arrangements. Landscaping of river walk to include footpaths Landscaping to include footpath. O24).6 ha.OPEN SPACES No. level and type of public access are to be determined (Policies W4. O9. Area 6 (N/A) Vacant Riverside Promenade Riverside Footpath o18 Vacant Footpath Vacant o19 Drainage canal The canal system in Area 6 will Link to Thamesmere Extension Lake in Area 4 via the Twin Tumps. O18. SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES 211 . Layout of park must take account of Thames Gateway Bridge (Site m2).) Vacant District Park (part) o17 Riverside Walk.20 ha.The system also links through to the Gallions Reach Urban village.The canal will in parts be provided with “wet margins” for ecological reasons. adjacent to Tripcock Park Areas 6/7 (N/A) Canal system. The proposal includes Thameside Walk landscaping. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description THAMESMEAD o15 Tripcock Park West (c. Proposal forms part of Gallions Reach Urban Village. Area 4 & 6 North (N/A) Riverside Walk. Layout of park must take account of Thames Gateway Bridge (Site m2).) Vacant District Park (part) This proposed District Park will serve the Western part of Thamesmead. The proposed District Park with Tripcock Park West will serve western part of Thamesmead. Canals provide a setting for footpath and cycleway links adjacent development.

MOVEMENT
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description RIVER CROSSINGS m1 Woolwich Rail Crossing (N/A) Various Extension from the Royal Docks to Woolwich Arsenal Options include heavy rail link. Remains safeguarded but may be reviewed as the DLR Woolwich extension is being implemented (see m4). Road crossing with fixed public transport link - possibly DLR or guided bus/tram. Public Inquiry closed 2006, decision awaited. A new crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown Way in L.B. Newham. Should the crossing proceed the Council will require tunnels not a bridge. Tunnel under the River Thames, terminus in Woolwich town centre adjacent Woolwich Arsenal mainline station (see site mu14). Scheduled to open 2009.

m2

Thames Gateway Bridge (N/A)

Various

Multi-modal bridge crossing

m3

Blackwall Crossing (N/A)

Various

River Crossing

m4

Docklands Light Railway Woolwich (N/A)

Various

Extension from City Airport to Woolwich

m5

Crossrail (N/A)

Various

New cross-London Tunnel under the Thames emerging rail link at Plumstead where it joins existing surface line. Station at Abbey Wood. Potential for a station at Woolwich Arsenal. Note the Safeguarding direction also secures access to works sites through the Woolwich Arsenal (Arsenal Way and Wallis Road via Duke of Wellington Avenue) and the White Hart Triangle (White Hart Avenue and North Road).

ROAD SCHEMES m6 Deptford Church Street (N/A) Road Junction Realignment Junction realignment to promote use of Deptford Church Street/A2, and assist in relieving Greenwich of through traffic. See Policy M15. Filter lane provision from Well Hall Road into Shooters Hill Road to enable better bus movement. Subject to TfL approval.

m7

Shooters Hill Road / Well Hall Road (N/A)

Road

Filter lane

212

SITE SCHEDULES: MOVEMENT

MOVEMENT
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description RIVERBUS m8 m9 Thamesmead (N/A) Greenwich Pier (N/A) Vacant Pier Pier / shore facilities To serve Thamesmead town centre and Tripcock Point (see Site mu40). Enhancement of pier/shore facilities Planning Permission granted subject to a legal agreement.

RAIL FREIGHT m10 Land at Angerstein Wharf (4.62) Aggregates Site to continue to be used for rail freight Grant aid available under Section 8 of the Railways act 1974. See Policy M37.

m11

Former Plumstead Coal Yard Storage and (3.21) builders yard

Site with rail sidings Temporary planning permission for with potential for storage and aggregates use. rail freight use Adjacent White Hart Triangle industrial development (see Site j1). Safeguarded works and tunnel portal site for the Crossrail project (see Site m5). Also a Strategic Rail Freight Site.

CYCLING m12 Riverside Walk (N/A) River Frontage Thames Cycle Route Cycle route to be incorporated into the existing proposed riverside walk. See also relevant open space proposals. Detailed examination of schemes required.

SITE SCHEDULES: MOVEMENT

213

MIXED USES
No. mu1 Site (hectares) Coronet Cinema & Tudor Parade, Well Hall Road (0.43) Existing Use Vacant cinema, retail use and residential units above the shops, petrol filling station Proposal Community uses, retail and housing including a significant element of affordable housing Description See the Coronet Cinema Site Planning Brief (2004). Development must include retention of grade II listed cinema building. Residential will need to form part of an integrated and comprehensive regeneration of the site. Planning permission for a leisure centre and Council local service centre (2005, ref.05/2105). Under construction. Site located with the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site and in a Conservation Area. See the Stockwell Street Development Brief (2000). Planning permission for offices, industrial, work/live units, residential and A1/A3 retail (ref. 02/2786).

mu2

Former depot, Archery Road (0.63) Stockwell Street Site (0.81)

Council Depot Leisure centre with swimming pool

mu3

Offices, indoor market, outdoor weekend market Vacant

Mix of town centre uses

mu4

Deals Gateway, 6-42 Blackheath Road (0.51)

Commercial use including B1 on road frontage, elsewhere residential, educational or commercial Residential-led mixed use development, supporting amenity space including a continuous public walk and cycleway along the Thames, and activitygenerating service, leisure and community uses especially on the riverfront. Potential for a hotel and cruise liner terminal. Flats, hotel or other water-frontanimating uses and riverside walk

mu5

Greenwich Reach East (3.14)

Vacant industry/ scrap/ aggregates depot

Creekmouth offers a deep water mooring suitable for cruise liners. Strategic view needs to be safeguarded. Riverwall improvements required. Resolution to grant planning permission (ref. 05/1386) for 980 flats, retail including supermarket and food & drink uses, subject to a legal agreement. Scheme includes a Creekmouth pedestrian bridge.

mu6

St Mary’s and Mastpond Wharves, Woolwich Church Street (1.50)

Vacant

Planning permission for 4 storey hotel (99/0136) and 181 flats (99/0959). Development to retain slipways and safeguard river views from St. Mary’s church. Flood defence improvements required. Flats completed 2006.

214

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

MIXED USES
No. mu7 Site (hectares) Blackwall Lane / Pelton Street (0.28) Existing Use Various, vacant school Proposal Description Commercial uses, Development should enhance and residential including support East Greenwich District affordable housing Centre. See Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002, being updated). Town centre commercial/ business use(s) See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 update, being updated) and Town Centre Policies. Scope for site assembly including Riverside House. Development should complement and form an activity link between Powis Street and the leisure/tourism uses in Warren Lane and the Royal Arsenal. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 draft, being updated) and Town Centre Policies. Active uses including retail and leisure at ground floor level on Hare Street and Powis Street. Former Co-op store is locally listed. Development of sub-areas should not compromise a more comprehensive development approach. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 draft, being updated). Site is in Metropolitan Open Land and a Conservation Area. No proposals to exceed existing footprint of buildings. Presumption in favour of conversion where practicable rather than demolition and new build. See Goldie Leigh Hospital Planning Brief (2000).

mu8

Callis Yard (0.28)

Council depot

mu9

Macbean Centre and former Temporary Woolwich Polytechnic school, market (1.06) pound and community uses

Mixed development of town centre uses including retail, possible covered shopping mall

mu10 Land enclosing Mortgramit Square (Hare & Powis Street) (1.27)

Various commercial, retail and residential uses & vacant premises.

Mixed retail and town centre uses, residential above including affordable housing

mu11 Goldie Leigh Hospital (7.32)

Hospital

Continued health provision, surplus footprint potentially residential

mu12 Land to north of Eltham High Street (1.85)

Various

Town Centre uses See Eltham Town Centre Development including residential, Framework (1997, being updated). principally retail at ground level

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

215

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Various commercial, part vacant Proposal Mixed use development including leisure A3, hotel/tourist facilities, residential. Ancillary A1 only. Description Development should complement and form an activity link between Powis Street and the Royal Arsenal, and must respect the setting of the adjacent Royal Arsenal listed buildings and conservation area. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 draft, being updated). Resolution to grant outline planning permission for 2,517 flats, hotel, leisure including 10-screen cinema and ancillary retail/food& drink uses (ref. 05/2363/O, also covers part of Site mu24). The Secretary of State granted powers for the construction of the DLR Woolwich extension in February 2004. Listed buildings including the former Woolwich Building Society boardrooms to be retained. Scheduled to open in 2009. See the Woolwich Interchange Planning Brief (2002). mu13 Warren Lane ‘teardrop’ site (1.54)

mu14 Woolwich Arsenal mainline station and land south of Spray Street, Woolwich town centre (3.14)

Various

DLR interchange with North Kent line, Waterfront Transit and bus routes.To include retail, commercial and residential development as part of a comprehensive station redevelopment. Retail with housing above, including a significant element of affordable housing Light Industry, Small business Units, Cultural Industries, residential within a mix.

mu15 Grove Market Place (0.51)

Shopping parade with residential above Part offices/ commercial, part vacant

Planning permission to amalgamate and enclose an underused 1960's open shopping arcade to provide a large retail unit, re-providing flats above (2003, ref. 00/1091). Site must include a significant proportion of non-residential uses and public access to the Creek. Adjoining Brewery Wharf is safeguarded by the Secretary of State for river-based freight use. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). Development to be linked to improvements to openness and landscaping of St. Alfege’s Park, which could include limited reconfiguration of open space. Gateway site into the World Heritage Site requiring sensitive design solutions. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000).

mu16 Hilton’s, Lion & Saxon Wharves, Upper Norman Road (0.90)

mu17 Creek Road / Bardsley Lane Part open (0.64) space, some commercial premises including former woodyard

Retail, A3 and community uses, civic open space with residential and/or small offices above.

216

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

hotel. 02/2903) See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002 being updated. 02/2903): up to 325. 02/2903). Cultural Industries Description Non-residential elements must comprise a significant proportion of the total floorspace. Uses as permitted for the Parkside districts in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. north of Millennium Village (9. south side. being updated). Site (hectares) Existing Use Vacant former commercial/ industrial buildings. being updated). leisure and other uses.000 sqm retail & leisure (Meridian Gateway). west of Deptford Creek (Meridian Gateway. mu22 Site between A102M and West parkside. event park and leisure centre within the Dome.72) parking for the Dome Uses as permitted for the Dome Central.54) Millennium Sports arena. mu18 Creek Road. See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. 1.37) mu19 Millennium Dome and the tip of Greenwich Peninsula (16. Residential-led aggregates.000 sqm offices. part mixed use vacant development with ancillary local services. Revised scheme being prepared.41) SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 217 . open space accessible to the public and ecological area along the Dome waterfront Central Business District business/ commercial uses and balanced and appropriately scaled mix of retail. See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. including residential predominately on the eastern waterfront and Dome car-parking. Millennium Square and East Riverside districts in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. Dome.MIXED USES No.86) Industrial uses. 5. 02/2903) See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. being updated). mu20 Site south of Dome adjacent Ancillary North Greenwich Station facilities and (19. Central Park retained. Uses as permitted for the Dome Waterfront district in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref.000 sqm offices over and around a retail and leisure focal point and public transport interchange. Proposal Mixed use development to include residential and a substantial mix of Commercial or educational uses. Ancillary storage facilities for Millennium Dome Residential led mixed use development including secondary school with ancillary local services. Resolution to grant planning permission for 600 flats. riverside conference. Uses as permitted for the Meridian Gardens district in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). 30. mu21 Delta/Blackwall Wharf and land west of North Greenwich Station (9.

13) Former Greenwich University campus. mu25 Royal Hill Court. to include a significant proportion of affordable housing. 218 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES . Calderwood Street (1. Building 10 has planning permission for residential use. Northern part of site affected by safeguarding for the proposed third Blackwall river crossing (see site proposal m3). being updated). Retail at ground level with customer parking. Woolwich Campus closed 2002. entertainment and education functions (See Policy TC4). Vanburgh health clinic to be retained. Design commensurate with a World heritage Site buffer zone location required.The remainder is being developed with Site mu13 (The Warren). Above Commercial and some residential To include convenience and other retail facilities for local residents.39) Retail with commercial and residential above and car parking mu26 Former Greenwich District Hospital (2. which must be preserved and enhanced. Suitable for a mix of employment and activity generating town centre uses. and their setting protected.17) Vacant Commercial leisure Part of mixed-use development of including ancillary the Royal Arsenal. leisure. See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. Site identified as capable of accommodating retail. and includes a number of important listed buildings. mu23 East Parkside/ Bugsby’s Reach (8. 02/2903).The site is within a retail.44) mu24 Woolwich Royal Arsenal (7.85) Vacant hospital Mixed use including residential and activity and employment generating town centre uses mu27 Woolwich Campus “island” site. off Greenwich High Road (0. Description Uses as permitted for the Bugsby’s Reach districts in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. Part of the western end of the block is Grade II listed. Prominent gateway site where uses should complement and reinforce East Greenwich District Centre. including retail and/or leisure along Woolwich Road and Vanburgh Hill frontages. and residential within a mix. Site (hectares) Existing Use Ancillary facilities for Millennium Dome Proposal Residential led mixed use development with ancillary local services.MIXED USES No. residential conservation area. Residential acceptable to the rear. office. residential. Central Park too be retained.

2) University Student Union mu29 Maritime Industrial Estate. Activities and layout must be compatible with the ongoing use of parts of Badcocks’ Wharf and foreshore for boat repairs and associated operations. Granite Mixed use Piper’s & Badcock’s Wharves & Piper’s mainly development (4. Potential for links with Lewisham College mu28 Former public baths building. mu31 Deptford Bridge. Residential element may be appropriate on the northern elevations if suitably buffered and designed. Reconfiguration without increase of existing net retail area. other employment generating.33) Retail warehousing and small industrial / business units Bulky goods retailing and B1b. Lovell’s. educational or vocational uses. occupied by a including the boat repair retention of works. residential within a wider mix. north side (0. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Suitable for re-use for appropriate Town Centre activity Description Locally listed building former Greenwich University Student Union. Site close to DLR station south of Lewisham College on a busy junction environmentally unsuitable for residential use on the street frontage.24) Various commercial B1. plus riverside public open space and walk. Main customer and servicing access to be provided off Bugsby’s Way See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (Nov 2002. Commercial use required to buffer adjoining Defined Industrial Area. The site is located adjacent to statutorily listed buildings which must be preserved and enhanced and their setting protected through any development. Scale and nature of development to be commensurate with the site’s public transport accessibility.MIXED USES No.c/B8 industrial / Business units mu30 Lovell’s. unless a relocation package securing the use of a financially and operationally viable alternative site is implemented before Badcock’s Wharf is cleared for redevelopment. road access constraints and residential context. parts of incorporating a Badcock Wharf significant and its proportion of foreshore employment uses. Bugsby’s Way (2. Substantial weight will be given to the retention of the building in accordance with Policy D23. Vacant Bathway Greenwich (0. SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 219 . with active commercial/ community uses at ground level. creative industries.14) vacant. boatyard operations on Badcock’s Wharf and foreshore. under review) Single Masterplan required for the whole site to incorporate riverside walk and riverside public open space (Local Park Deficiency Area). 1980's retail premises reaching the end of their economic life. Granite.

Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Mixed use development of residential with a significant proportion of commercial floorspace e.57) Various commercial mu34 Davy’s site. offices Mixed use development and interchange enhancement including a significant proportion of B1 office/ business space. 161-171 Greenwich High Road (0.g.52) Various uses including Davy’s wine bar and cellar Gateway location to World Heritage Site requiring sensitive design solutions. Planning application for mixed use including 247 flats.MIXED USES No. and residential as part of a mix Mixed use development of residential with a significant proportion of commercial floorspace (e. Large scale retailing proposals would need frontage on General Gordon Square. studio/office space above A1. update pending). The Greenwich High Road frontage buildings are a mix of statutorily and locally listed. workshops. multi-storey car park A mix of residential. mu33 131-161 Greenwich High Road (j/o Norman Road) (1. mu35 Peggy Middleton House. Site layout and access arrangements should prioritise pedestrian access along Waller Way (the western site boundary) to Greenwich mainline and DLR station. being updated).g.81) Council and government offices. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft. Refurbishment/ development is likely to include re-provision of premises for Davy’s Wine Bar. Post office is locally listed and its retention is encouraged. and former student accommodation. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). mu32 Payne & Borthwick Wharves Document (0. active uses including retail at street level. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000. safeguarded Convoys Wharf (LB Lewisham). A2 & A3 at street level). Payne’s Wharf is Grade 2 listed and should be sensitively incorporated in any redevelopment. retail and/or business/ employment uses 220 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES . Gateway location to World Heritage Site requiring sensitive design solutions. halls of residence.87) storage. Riverfront public access required. Retail and other town centres uses would also be appropriate on the lower Woolwich New Road frontage. Description Uses must not prejudice the potential for river freight operations on the adjoining. studios. Crown building & Post Office (2.

49) Military academy.MIXED USES No.000 dwellings (03/2618/O). See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft. open space Description Possible department store site. Kidbrooke station retail. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft.51 ha. Riverside walk to be maintained mu36 Co-op site. to be preserved and its setting enhanced. local centre.46) Railway station.74) Car Park mu38 Royal Military Academy. SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 221 . Local centre to include medium to large supermarket and a range of smaller shops and services mu39 Kidbrooke station area (4. housing THAMESMEAD mu40 Tripcock Point. community and commercial uses. Thamesmead SE28 (27. Outline planning permission for mixed use including 2. being updated). parade ground and open space Grade II Listed building built in 1804. residential transport and part vacant interchange. Woolwich Common SE18 (8. 125-151 Powis Street (south side) (0. residential above. See the pending Kidbrooke Development Area SPD and Policy H4 (Kibrooke Development Area). See the Tripcock Point Development Framework. to include replacement public car parking Conversion for residential-led mix of uses and/or institutional/ community use. Potential for limited infill development elsewhere. Parade ground and Metropolitan Open Land to be retained without built encroachment nor use for car parking.87) mu37 Waterfront Leisure Centre Car Park (0. being updated). Site (hectares) Existing Use Council offices and car park Proposal Major non-food retail use with possible mixed use including residential on upper floors Mixed use with active uses at street and river level.) Vacant land and temporary aggregates processing Residential led mixed use development with ancillary local retailing and services. SPG adopted September 2003. Parking would need to be provided within the scheme if the parking area were utilised.

222 SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES .

to current national and regional policies. Part II of a Unitary Development Plan shall consist of:a. and d. c. It follows the requirements set out in the Act and in The Town and Country Planning (Development Plan) (England) Regulations 1999. such diagrams. 7 The Proposals in Part II of a Unitary Development Plan shall be in general conformity with Part I. to any strategic guidance given by the Secretary of State to assist them in the preparation of the Plan. c. In formulating the general Policies in Part 1of a Unitary Development Plan the authority shall have regard:a. which sets out guidance on the procedure and content of the UDP. 5 6 A Unitary Development Plan shall also contain such other matters as may be prescribed or as the Secretary of State may in any other case direct. b. d. Part Two of the Town and Country Planning Act sets out the following requirements for a UDP: “2 A Unitary Development Plan shall comprise two parts.APPENDICES A P P E N D I X 1 : L E G I S L AT I V E B AC K G R O U N D Preparation of the Unitary Development Plan (UDP) was commenced by the Council under the provisions of the Town and Country Planning Act (1990). to the resources likely to be available. PPG12 sets out a UDP’s function and format as follows: “[The UDP] should contain the local planning authority’s policies and proposals for the development and use of land.” 4 In addition. to such other matters as the Secretary of State may direct the authority to take into account. the UDP takes account of Planning Policy Guidance Note 12: Development Plans (1999). illustrations or other descriptive or explanatory matter in respect of the general Policies in Part I of the Plan or the Proposals in Part II as the authority think appropriate or as may be prescribed. a map showing those proposals on a geographical basis. 3 Part I of a Unitary Development Plan shall consist of a written statement formulating the authority’s general policies in respect of the development and other use of land in their area (including measures for the improvement of the physical environment and the management of traffic). a written statement formulating in such detail as the authority think appropriate (and so as to be readily distinguishable from the other contents of the Plan) their proposals for the development and other use of land in their area or for any description of development or other use of such land.The 1990 Act also requires structure. local and unitary development plans to include policies in respect of: APPENDIX 1: LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND 223 . b. a reasoned justification of the general policies in Part I of the Plan and of proposals in Part II.

” (Paragraph 3.7) “UDP part II sets out the local planning authority’s detailed policies and specific proposals for the development and use of land which will guide its day-to-day planning decisions. The improvement of the physical environment. UDPs are required to be in general conformity with the Plan. was published in February 2004. and has prepared.The reasoned justification should only contain an explanation behind the policies and proposals in the plan.” (Paragraph 3. and The management of traffic. the Mayor has responsibility for. It has replaced strategic planning guidance for London Planning Authorities (RPG3) and the London Parts of RPG3b/9b (strategic planning guidance for the River Thames).• • • The conservation of the natural beauty and amenity of the land. It should not contain policies and proposals which will be used in themselves for taking decisions on planning applications. together with the UDP (2006). forms the Development Plan for the Borough. a spatial development strategy for London (SDS).2) “Part 1 of UDP’s … should concentrate of providing a strategic framework within which detailed policies can then be framed in Part II of the UDP.” (Appendix A.” (Paragraph 3.The SDS. known as the London Plan.11) “Part II of a plan must be in general conformity with policies in Part I.” (Appendix A. 224 APPENDIX 1: LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND . paragraph 7) “The written statement should also include a reasoned justification of the plan’s policies and proposals. The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 gave the London Plan ‘development plan’ status.The London Plan (2004). paragraph 24) Under the Greater London Authority Act 1999 and the Town and Country Planning (London Spatial Development Strategy) Regulations 2000.

resident only parking bays/permits etc. DCLG Department for Communities & Local Government. which Local Planning Authorities have a statutory duty to produce. to the extent that the average shopper could not reasonably be expected to carry the purchase. Convenience Goods Goods bought frequently or out of necessity e. planning. the character or appearance of which is desirable to preserve or enhance.This removes specified Permitted Development Rights. granted under the Order. where shoppers typically prefer to have a choice of retail outlets in order to compare an article with others of the same type. Government Department responsible for national policy on housing. Height above sea level. major electrical items and appliances. Bulky goods A retail product subcategory of Comparison or durable goods referring to items that are bulky and/or heavy. tobacco. Development Plan A plan for the use of land for a specified area. Biodiversity The variety of plants. Bulky goods are generally considered to comprise furniture. and newspapers. Also referred to as ‘durable goods’. jewellery. often using back gardens and creating a new vehicular access. the differences found within a species and the ecosystems and habitats within which species occur. Article 4 Direction The Local Planning Authority may make a direction under Article 4 of the Town and Country Planning General Permitted Development Order 1995 (GPDO). Backland development Development of land surrounded by existing properties. measured in habitable rooms per hectare (HRH) of residential site area. cosmetics. from a defined area. animals and other living things in a particular area or region.A P P E N D I X 2 : G L O S S A RY A N D A B B R E V I AT I O N S Affordable Housing Housing to meet the needs of households whose incomes are not sufficient to allow them to access appropriate housing in the Borough housing market. AOD Above Ordinance Datum. flooring and DIY goods. APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 225 . typified by parking meters. It includes species.g. Comparison Goods Items such as clothing. Controlled Parking Zone (CPZ) An area in which on-street parking restrictions apply. also including the Social Exclusion Unit and the Neighbourhood Renewal Unit. food.The Greenwich UDP is the statutory Development Plan for the London Borough of Greenwich. regional and local government. Conservation Area An area of special architectural or historic interest. Density (residential) The amount of residential accommodation in any given area. either as an individual item or in the quantity typically purchased. footwear and electrical goods. comprising both Social Rented housing and Intermediate housing including Key Worker housing.

Development Control Policies. 226 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY .sales floor. Durable Goods See Comparison Goods. Site Allocations. The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www.There are five types of DPD:The Core (Spatial) Strategy. public toilets and enclosed public stairwells / lifts between shop floors. plant rooms. Greater London Authority (GLA) Established in 2000. the Environment Agency are a non-departmental public body with responsibility as environmental advisors and regulators. Government Department responsible for national transport policy. EU European Union Floorspace (gross) All floorspace enclosed within the building envelope.Development Plan Document Once prepared Development Plan Documents (DPD) will replace the adopted UDP as the heart of the Local Development Framework (see LDF entry below). Excludes goods storage / delivery / preparation areas. the Proposals Map and Area Action Plans. staff amenity facilities. Government Circulars Periodic Guidance on specific topics relevant to planning which sets out Government policy and guidance on planning matters. tarmac carparking) or temporary structures / outbuildings. DPDs have legal status under the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations 2004.uk) provides a fuller description. Green Belt A stretch of open land encircling Greater London in which development is strictly controlled. sales counters. GAD Greenwich Association for the Disabled General Permitted Development Order (GPDO) The GPDO lists a number of operations to which planning permission is given automatically and where no application to the Local Planning Authority is required. giving definition to the built up area and limiting urban sprawl. published as the London Plan (See Spatial Development Strategy). and will be subject to independent examination. Footprint (of building) Ground area on a given site occupied by permanent buildings.gov.greenwich. Environment Agency Set up by the 1995 Environment Act. The Mayor has responsibility for producing strategic planning guidance for London. Floorspace (net retail) Area of a shop that is accessible to the public . and ancillary facilities such as public seating. the GLA is made up of a Mayor and a separately elected Assembly. in-store cafes or concessions.g. not including areas of hardstanding (e. They will be the main basis upon which planning decisions are made. checkouts / circulation / lobby areas. staff offices. DLR Docklands Light Railway DoT Department of Transport.

Interchange A point/location where a traveller can switch from one form of transport (e. also houses sold at a discount. for example and the journey is continued by another means of transport (e. bus) to another (e. teachers. Used as a measure of housing density.g. ILIP (Interim Local Implementation Plan) and LIP (Local Implementation Plan) A document of Greenwich Council’s transport policies and schemes for the Borough reviewed on a regular basis. Used as a measure of housing density. It is accompanied by a Borough Spending Plan that details the Borough’s annual transport spending bid. Key Worker Workers such nurses. part rented) housing costing more than social rent levels. This is a Central Government initiative implemented through local authorities by a travel plan advisor. including all types of structures such as masts. Habitable Room Habitable Rooms will include all separate living rooms. ft.). and emergency services providers that have clearly identified recruitment and retention problems which are undermining service delivery and the economic well-being of the city. Bexley and Bromley. landings. (140sq. halls and lobbies. Workers in these groups are typically on relatively low pay.Green Chain A chain of open spaces through South-East London extending in a virtually continuous arc through Lewisham. HRA Habitable Rooms per Acre. from and for work. Intermediate housing Subsidised rented or shared ownership (part owned. HMO Houses in Multiple Occupation. rail). but less than the private cost of purchasing / renting. m. Household One person living alone or a group of people (who may or may not be related) living or staying temporarily at the same address with common housekeeping (definition derived from The Census 2001 definitions. chimneys etc. Greenwich. APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 227 . but excluding bathrooms. train). and whilst not in any ordinary sense in housing need. including bedrooms.g. ONS 2001).g. High Building A building. pylons. Occupation of a dwelling by more than one household. Statements accompany the programmes on local housing need. but who also are unlikely to qualify for social rented housing. Kiss and Ride Where one is driven to the station. Green Travel Plan Where an employer has produced a plan of practical measures to reduce car-use for travel to. Kitchens will be counted as habitable where they have an overall floor area greater than 13 sq. are unable to buy or rent in the private market. toilets. HRH Habitable Rooms per Hectare. Housing Strategy and Investment Programme (HIP) The rolling programme of expenditure that the Local Authority submits annually for Central Government funding. Provided for those on moderate incomes (such as key workers) who cannot afford to rent or buy at London prices. which significantly exceeds the height of its surroundings. policies and priorities.

Mixed Use A development that includes more than one land use. The mix can be vertical (a mix of uses within one building) and/or horizontal (a range of uses across a site.uk) provides a fuller description. An area of local interest to which there is a commitment for conservation declared under the National Parks and Access to Countryside Act 1949. and the second or additional uses comprise a significant proportion of the total floorspace. Listed Building (Statutory) A building (and any other fixed object within its curtilage of special architectural or historical interest which is on a list prepared by the Secretary of State for Culture.These buildings are protected under the Town and Country Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) Act 1990. LWT London Wildlife Trust Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) Land of predominantly open character. LNR Local Nature Reserve. Listed Building Consent is required for any proposal to alter. and non-statutory Supplementary Planning Documents. extend or demolish the whole or part of the interior or exterior of any structure within the curtilage of that building. Media and Sport. Pinch Points Narrowing of the road carriageway to prevent passage by certain large/wide vehicles. London Plan See Spatial Development Strategy Low Emissions Zone (LEZ) A defined area from which polluting vehicles that do not comply with set emissions standards are barred from entering. The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www.gov. recognised has having more than Borough significance. It principally comprises Development Plan Documents with legal/statutory status. now known as the Department for Communities & Local Government (see DCLG).Listed Building (Local) A building or structure of architectural or historic interest which does not qualify for inclusion in the statutory list but which in the opinion of the Local Authority make a valuable contribution to the character of the area. ONS The Office of National Statistics Permitted Development Rights Small-scale developments which do not require planning permission in accordance with the General Permitted Development Order 1995. It will generally give details of the favoured land uses for the site and the 228 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY . Planning Brief A statement of the land use opportunities and constraints presented by a particular site.greenwich. each occupying a single-use building) ODPM Following reorganisation in 2006. Local Development Framework (LDF) A Local Development Framework (LDF) is a portfolio of more specific documents that will replace traditional and wider-ranging old-style ‘development plans’ such as the Greenwich UDP.The level of protection afforded to MOL is the same as that afforded to Green Belt land. prepared for the guidance of potential developers.

Residential Site Area Area wholly within the Curtilage (boundary) of the site including internal access roads and incidental open space (see also Annex C of PPG3 Housing). construction. SNCI Sites of Nature Conservation Importance. Published February 2004. Previous guidance RPG3 (1996) was replaced by the London Mayor’s Spatial Development Strategy (SDS) in February 2004. Being replaced by Planning Policy Statements (PPS’s). Social rented housing Housing typically owned and/or managed by a registered Social Landlord for subsidised rent to households on low incomes who would otherwise be unable to access suitable housing. Safeguarding Generally. geology or physiographical features. the reserving of land for a particular purpose. improvement and management. fauna. Registered Social Landlord A non-profit making organisation who allocate housing on the basis of need and are registered with the Housing Corporation (a Government organisation who provide funding to deliver affordable housing).standards that any development should reach. Planning Guidance for London. For mixed use schemes residential density can be estimated by apportioning the site area between different uses. Developers are required to give first preference to locations within town centres. Planning Obligations A legal undertaking entered into in connection with a planning permission under Section 106 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990. Planning Policy Guidance Notes (PPG's) Government advice on various planning policy matters issued from time to time to guide Local Planning Authorities in their operation of the planning system. Sequential Approach Approach to selecting suitable sites for activity generating uses that attract the visiting public. Edge-of-centre sites. Spatial Development Strategy (SDS) Spatial Development Strategy –known as The London Plan. and are subject to a range of additional policy tests. to concentrate these uses within town centres wherever possible. SRB) National government funding programme administered by Regional Development Agencies with the aim of supporting regeneration initiatives carried out by local regeneration partnerships. Sites identified as being of importance for nature conservation purposes. Strategic Guidance Planning Guidance for London that provides a framework for the preparation of Unitary Development Plans.They are responsible for housing provision. which serve the same purpose. issued by the London Mayor. to which Greenwich UDP will have to be in general conformity with. APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 229 . for rent and sale. Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) Sites notified to the Local Planning Authority by the Nature Conservancy Council under section 28 of the Wildlife and Countryside Act 1981 as being of national importance by reason of any of their flora. and in particular retail and indoor leisure developments. Single Programme (formerly Single Regeneration Budget. Planning Briefs are usually adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance. and in the last instance out of centre sites. can only considered if there are no more central alternatives available.

Supplementary Planning Document (SPD) A non-statutory Local Development Document forming part of the Borough’s Local Development Framework (LDF . together with the Proposals Map.The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www. improve the environment. purpose and status.They provide further detail on the implementation of particular policies and proposals contained in the UDP (or successor Development Plan Document). 230 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY . SPD is a material consideration in the determination of planning applications. Prepared by a process incorporating public consultation and formal adoption by Council. One adopted. Examples include area. Traffic calming Traffic management geared to reducing the environmental impact and speeds of vehicles. very similar in scope.greenwich. reduce traffic volumes. All SPG that remains relevant will be updated and re-adopted as SPD. although the UDP will remain the primary policy basis for decision-making. Written Statement The document setting out a Local Planning Authority's policies and proposals for development within its area. Tree Preservation Order (TPO) Individual or groups of trees which the Local Planning Authority consider make a positive contribution to the amenity of the area and which are worthy of preservation. which.or issue-specific planning guidance (such as a planning brief). comprises the UDP. Orders are served in accordance with the Town and Country Planning Act of 1990.gov. but adopted prior to the 2004 Planning & Compensation Act. Supplementary Planning Guidance (SPG) Predecessor to SPD.see above).uk) provides a fuller description. etc. give preferential treatment to certain users. Traffic Management Physical or other changes to roads in order to slow traffic.

Uses such as cinemas. Use for provision of residential accommodation and care to people in need. day nurseries. or use as a hospital or nursing home. D2 Assembly and Leisure. B2 General Industrial Use. theatres. residential school or training centre C3 Self contained residential dwelling D1 Non-residential institution. Some of the more frequently used use classes are: A1 Shops A2 Financial or Professional Services A3 Restaurants and Cafés A4 Drinking Establishments A5 Hot Food Take-away’s B1 Business Use. Uses for places of worship. providing that such a use can be carried out in a residential area without detriment to the amenity of that area. in each case. Government is examining proposals to designate nightclubs as a separate use (Class D3). research and development or light industry.This order groups buildings of similar uses (e. shops. boarding. no significant element of care is provided.g. An industrial use which cannot be carried out in any residential area without detriment to the amenity of that area B8 A building or land primarily for the purpose of storage / distribution of goods. APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 231 .Use Classes Order (UCO) Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order 1987 and subsequent updates. C1 Hotel. Uses for the purposes of offices (other than A2 use). medical services museums etc. offices) within which certain changes of use may take place which will not require planning permission. Sui generis Other uses that do not fall within the categories specified above (including some hybrid uses). guest house or hostel where. C2 Residential Institutions. and potentially sensitive uses that are excluded from any category of the Use Classes Order (1987) and subsequent updates specifically to ensure that proposals for that use will in all instances require planning permission. bingo halls and indoor sport complexes.

232 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful